Home

"user manual"

1. MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Codes Qualifier Codes Num dec hex dec hex 21 10 Frozen Counter 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 22 0 Counter Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 22 1 Counter Event 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 22 2 Counter Event 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 0 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 07 08 limited qty 23 1 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 7 28 index 32 bit with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 2 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 7 28 index 16 bit with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 5 Frozen Counter Event 1
2. Message Function Name MicroLogix Description Type Code 1400 Support Request 21 0x15 FC DISABLE UNSOLICITED Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 22 0x16 FC ASSIGN CLASS No Request 23 0x17 FC DELAY MEASURE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Used for non LAN Request 24 0x18 FC RECORD CURRENT TIME No Used for LAN Request 25 0x19 FC OPEN FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 26 0x1A FC CLOSE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 27 0x1B FC DELETE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 28 0x1C FC GET FILE INFO No Request 29 0x1D FC FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 30 Ox1E FC ABORT FILE No Request 31 0x1F FC ACTIVATE CONFIG 0 Request 32 0x20 FC AUTHENTICATE REO No Request 33 0x21 FC AUTHENTICATE ERR No 34 0x22 to No Reserved 128 0x80 Response 129 0x81 FC RESPONSE Yes MicroLogix 1400 sends Response 130 0x82 FC UNSOLICITED RESPONSE Yes MicroLogix 1400 sends Response 131 0x83 FC AUTHENTICATE RESP No 132 0x84 to No Reserved 255 OxFF Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series B Controllers Message Function Name MicroLogix Description Type Code 1400 Support Confirmation 0 0x00 FC CONFIRM Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses sends Request 1 0x01 FC READ Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 2 0x02 FC WRITE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 3 0x03 FC SELECT Yes
3. 1762 1 0 expansion bus connector Battery wire connector Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 19 Chapter2 Install Your Controller Controller Mounting Dimensions 44516 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BWAA 1766 L32AWAA 1766 L32BXBA Dimension Measurement A 90 mm 3 5 in B 180 mm 7 087 in C 87 mm 3 43 in Controller and Exp ansion The controller mounts horizontally with the expansion I O extending to the 0 g right ofthe controller Allow 50 mm 2 in of space on all sides of the controller system for adequate ventilation Maintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways adjacent equipment and so on as shown below Top 5 5 Side Vy SY In Bottom 44517 Mounting the Controller MicroLogix 1400 controllers are suitable for use in an industrial environment when installed in accordance with these instructions Specifically this equipment 20 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Install
4. 1761 CBL ACOO 44599 This 3 node network is expandable Modbus is a Half Duplex master slave communications protocol The Modbus network master reads and writes coils and registers Modbus protocol allows a single master to communicate with a maximum of 247 slave devices MicroLogix 1400 controllers support Modbus RTU Master and Modbus RTU Slave protocol For more information on configuring your MicroLogix 1400 controller for Modbus protocol refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 For more information about the Modbus protocol see the Modbus Protocol Specifications available from http www modbus org ASCII provides connection to other ASCII devices such as bar code readers weigh scales serial printers and other intelligent devices You can use ASCII by configuring the RS 232 485 port channel 0 and the RS 232 port Channel 2 for the ASCII driver Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 for detailed configuration information For more information on configuring your MicroLogix 1400 controller for Distributed Network Protocol see Channel Configuration for DNP3 Slave on page 197 For more information about Distributed Network Protocol see the Distributed N
5. O ORE BDpounuuzoouusdo dM of occ ol oaqaaoedaeooootb e6sd oa oc ORR 3g Uu M occ o oM dc ocoooonps o im zi B230 0 Radix Binary Swba 20 Prepertics Usage Help As example a Double Bit Binary Input Config File is shown below This file has 10 elements B39 0 0 and B39 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 to 7 of the Double Bit Binary Input Object File B39 1 0 and B39 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 8 to 15 of the Double Bit Binary Input Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved So in the example below Class Level of Index 0 to 7 is 1 B39 0 0 and Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 247 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 B39 0 1 Class Level of Index 8 to 15 is 2 B39 1 0 and B39 1 1 Class Level of Index 16 to 23 is 3 B39 2 0 and B39 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B39 bin Double Bit Input Config File BEI LE O O O O O O O oM oo op oo oo O O O O O O O og oo
6. LJ ze am user supplied cable gt 44603 Cable Connections from to AIC External Power Power Selection Switch Setting Supply Required straight 9 25 pin modem or other communication device port 1 yes external External power supply required unless the is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable 0 Jf wy I 1761 CBL ASO3 1761 CBL AS09 44604 666666 78 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Cable 1761 CBL AS03 1761 CBL AS09 Length 3 m 9 8 ft 9 5 m 31 17 ft Communication Connections Chapter 4 Connections from to AIC External Power Power Selectiqn Supply Switch Setting Required SLC 500 Fixed port 3 yes external SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 processors PanelView 550 RJ45 port port 3 yes external External power supply required unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable 1761 02 Series or equivalent Cable Wiring Diagram E 8 19 eLL 3 f n eT eli 44605 Programmi
7. 185 Status Indicators on the LCD iler repe Ier 186 I O Status Indicators on the 1 187 Normal Operation eoe tuna eat own ua E A pe aa Rates 187 Error Conditions ee ite ata or dantur epis viui 187 Controller Error Recovery Model Meee eevee bei 188 Analog Expansion I O Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 190 Module Operation and Channel Operation 190 Power p Diagnostics vans ox redo Ya era drca eed 190 Critical and Non Critical Errori 2 des ah tuas thes st 191 Module Error Definition 191 Error Odes buon cce 192 Calling Rockwell Automation for Assistance 193 Appendix D Preparing for Firmware IU pBrade ced de stes d en e tiec 195 Install ControlFLASH Software eese 195 Prepare the Controller for Firmware Upgrade 196 Using ControlFLASH for Firmware 197 ControlFLASH Error Messages emen hern SE ree eee n 207 Missing or Corrupt OS 8 8 209 Recovering from Missing or Corrupt OS 210 Appendix E RS 232 Communication 211 RS 485 Communication 211 DEL Full Duplex Protocol 211 Rockwell Automation Publication
8. 1H2714 Protected 11 Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing the OK key Because the N7 0 word is protected you will find that the cursor even does not move to the data value position IMPORTANT The maximum range of words you can monitor with the Integer File Monitoring functionality on the LCD is the first 256 words 0 255 of the target integer file 12 Ifyou have finished monitoring the integer file N7 press the ESC key to return to the Main Menu screen as shown in step 2 Monitoring Double Integer files The LCD allows you to view and change the data value of a double integer file You can access to this functionality via the Monitoring screen of the LCD To monitor a double integer file on the LCD you have to specify its file number in the Target User Defined File Number TUF element of the LCD Function Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 79 Chapter 5 80 Using the LCD File and download your application program to the controller The TUF element can only be changed by a program download The value stored in the TUF element identifies the double integer file with which the LCD will interface Valid double integer files are L9 and L10 through L255 When the LCD reads a valid double integer file number it can access up to 256 words 0 to 255 on the LCD screen The protection bit LCD edit disable in the data file properties of tar
9. Input Type With Autocalibration Enabled Without Autocalibration Accuracy 3 for 10 Hz 50 Hz and 60 Hz Maximum Temperature Drift 4 Filters max at 25 C 77 F at 0 60 at 0 60 C 32 140 F Ambient 32 140 F Ambient Ambient Thermocouple J 210 1200 C 346 2192 F 30 6 C 1 1 F 30 9 C 1 7 F 0 0218 C C 0 0218 F F Thermocouple 200 1300 C 328 2372 F 1 C 1 8 F 31 5 C 42 7 F 0 0367 C C 0 0367 F F Thermocouple 210 200 C 346 328 F 1 2 C 42 2 F 1 8 C 23 3 F 0 0424 C C 0 0424 F F Thermocouple T 230 400 C 382 752 F 1 C 1 8 F 1 5 C 42 7 F 0 0349 C C 0 0349 F F Thermocouple T 270 230 C 454 382 F 5 4 C 9 8 F 7 0 C 12 6 F 0 3500 C C 40 3500 F F Thermocouple 230 1370 C 382 2498 F 1 C 1 8 F 1 5 C 42 7 F 0 4995 C 0 4995 F F Thermocouple 270 225 C 454 373 F 47 5 C 13 5 F 10 C 18 F 0 0378 C C 40 0378 F F Thermocouple E 210 1000 C 346 1832 F 30 5 C 0 9 F 30 8 C 1 5 F 0 0199 C C 0 0199 F F Thermocouple E 270 210 C 454 346 F 34 2 C 7 6 F 6 3 11 4 F 0 2698 C C 40 2698 F F Thermocouple R 1 7 C 3 1 F 2 6 C 4 7 F
10. 44576 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 47 Chapter3 Wire Your Controller Figure 25 1762 0W16 Wiring Diagram 48 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 26 1762 0X6l Wiring Diagram Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 L1 OR DC VA OUTO N C cep Le a OUT N C L2 OR DC OUT1 0 L1 OR DC L2 OR DC L2 OR DC Pamo OUT3 N C 0075 0 44578 49 Chapter 3 50 Wire Your Controller Figure 27 1762 1080W6 Wiring Diagram DC Sinking DC Sourcing 0 TON IN 1 2 NS DC Sinking jid COMO DC Sourcing DC Sourcing v 4 LE ta ING Ll INT DC Sinking DC Sourcing COM 1 L1 or DC VAC Connected Internally VDC VAC 11 L1 or DC Yi ouro Hee OUT 1 L2 or DC OUT 2 OUT 3 YOH 4 i OUT5 LGR 44579 Analog Wiring Consider the following when wiring your analog modules The analog common COM is not connected to earth ground inside the module All terminals are electrically isolated from the system Channels are not isolated from each other Use Belden 8761 or equivalent shielded wire Under normal conditions the d
11. oo r ol D O O O O O O O oo O O O OR oo OR OR ec oooccocclM 1 Radix Binary j 1 1 10 1 1 Columns 16 Desc p y Erepertizs Usage Help DNP3 Counter Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read an object with Any variation Counter Static Objects g20v0 Counter Any Variation e g20vl Counter 32 bit with flag e g20v2 Counter 16 bit with flag g20v5 Counter 32 bit without flag default g20v6 Counter 16 bit without flag default Counter Event Objects e g22v0 Counter Event Any Variation g22vl Counter Event 32 bit with flag default e g22v2 Counter Event 16 bit with flag default Related Object File Number 6 bit Counter Object File Number 32 bit Counter Object File Number Related Configuration File Number 16 bit Counter Config File Number 248 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F 32 bit Counter Config File Number To generate a Counter Object from the
12. DC sourcing DC sourcing 24 INS N25 P N10 N26 5 N27 2 12 7 2avoc 28 77 7771 13 N29 14 0 N30 1 IN 15 IN 31 27 DC DC DC sinking COM2 DC sinking COM 4 DC sourcing DC DC sourcing DC COM 2 COM 4 44920 Figure 19 1762 0A8 Wiring Diagram 44 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 20 1762 0B8 Wiring Diagram EH outro e p 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 m OUT4 OUT 6 T 24V DC source OUT _ DC COM 44574 Figure 21 1762 0B16 Wiring Diagram OUT 6 OUT 7 OUT 8 24V DC source OUT 9 OUT 11 OUT 13 OUT 15 900000199 44575 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 45 Chapter3 Wire Your Controller Figure 22 1762 0B32T Wiring Diagram VDC1 VDC 2 DC DC A CR OUT 16 CR VU V FON OUT 1 OUT 17 GE lt OUT2 OUT 18 CR e Y outs CR OUT 19 cR QY NY OUT 4 i OUT20 y 1 outs y 1 OUT 21 y 4 OUT 6 0
13. 97 Monitoring a Dit Elle essed ponte ny sen e UP dO 98 Monitoring Integer Files 40569555 nan Fase Sese RERO 102 Monitoring Double Integer files oum creer retire s 107 Monitor Floating point Files 113 Monitor System Status 113 Using the Mode 114 Controller Modes abc hte pala Soa yall ow 115 Changing Mode Switch 115 Using a User Defined LCD Screen 88 117 User Defined LCD Screen 118 Configuring Advanced ecus seq he SERRE ehe ee aae 119 Changing Key In etri 120 Key In MOUES acie ren EVO UE bios 120 Changing Key In Modes ooo oo RATE o ced 120 Using Communications Toggle Functionality 122 Ethernet Network Configuration Sra sconto eei pres 122 Viewing Ethernet Status ci vans saciid eee ere y aded ARS 122 Configuring the ev n eene p e E noe 124 Configuring the Ethernet Port eve esu EE pet 128 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN E 2014 vii Table of Contents Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Online Editing Specifications viii Configuring Ethernet Protocol Setup eco erre 130 Usine Trim Patsas qe etc tdt 133 Trim Pot Operation use cedet T ERN RENS 133 Changing Data Val
14. 164 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Troubleshooting Your System Appendix Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF20F2 Error Type Hex Equivalent Module Error Extended Error Error Description Code Information Code Binary Binary Hardware Specific X210 001 0 0001 0000 Reserved Error Configuration Error X400 010 0 0000 0000 General configuration error no additional information X401 010 0 0000 0001 Invalid input data format selected channel 0 X402 010 0 0000 0010 Invalid input data format selected channel 1 X403 010 0 0000 0011 Invalid output data format selected channel 0 X404 010 0 0000 0100 Invalid output data format selected channel 1 represents Don t Care Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF4 and 1762 OF4 ErorType Hex Equivalent Module ExtendedEror Error Description Error Code Information Code Binary Binary No Error X000 000 0 0000 0000 No error General Common X200 001 0 0000 0000 General hardware error no additional information Hardware Error X201 001 0 0000 0001 Power up reset state Hardware X300 001 1 0000 0000 Reserved Specific Error Configuration Error X400 010 0 0000 0000 General configuration error no additional information X401 010 0 0000 0001 nvalid range select Channel 0 X402 010 0 0000 0010 nvalid ran
15. 30 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Recommended Surge Suppressors Device Coil Voltage SuppressorCatalog Number Type Bulletin 100C C09 C97 24 48V AC 100 FSC4g RC 110 280V AC 00 FSC280 380 480V AC 00 FSC480 2 55V AC 12 77V DC 100 FSv55 MOV 56 136V AC 78 180V DC 100 FSV136 37 277 AC 181 250V DC 100 FSV277 278 575 AC 00 FSV575 2 250V DC 100 FSD250 Diode Bulletin 509 Motor Starter Size 0 5 12 120V AC 599 K04 MOV 240 264V AC 599 KA04 Bulletin 509 Motor Starter Size 6 12 120 AC 199 FSMA1U RC 12 120 AC 99 GSMA1 MOV Bulletin 700 R RM Relay AC coil Not Required 24 48V DC 199 F5MA9 MOV 50 120V DC 199 FSMA10 130 250V DC 199 FSMA11 Bulletin 700 Type N P PK or PH Relay 6 150V AC DC 700 N24 RC 24 48V AC DC 199 9 MOV 50 120V AC DC 199 FSMA10 130 250V AC DC 199 FSMA11 6 300V DC 199 FSMZ 1 Diode Miscellaneous electromagnetic devices 6 150V AC DC 700 N24 RC limted to 35 sealed VA 1 Catalog numbers for screwless terminals include the string CR after 100 For example Cat No 100 FSC48 becomes Cat No 100 CRFSC48 Cat No 100 FSV55 becomes 100 CRFSV55 and so on 2 For use on the interposing relay 3 For use on the contactor or starter M RC Type not to be used with Triac output
16. e 3a G5 3a Gao ga in A U N EBE o QO O O O oo So oa O 9 ou eee oo ose oa a aa amp oS 6 O 6 uuu oo 2 2 202 2 02 m 8 O OOO el oo a a Gg ee oS o O O 000570 2 F Ol B36 0 0 Racin Binary Columns 18 gt T Desc B36 m Properties Usage Help For a 32 bit Analog Input Config File Class Level of Index 10 is 1 B37 0 0 and B37 0 1 Class Level of Index 11 is 2 B37 1 0 and B37 1 1 Class Level of Index 12 is 3 B37 2 0 and B37 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B37 bin 32bits Analog Input Config File DSEsEECCISUA I3 IZ 10 100093 5777050857424 43 2 QU B37 0 00000 00080 0 00 0 B37 1 oo0 0000000000010 37 2 pro o 205205 00 0 0 0 g 0 D I M 37 3 0060 O 00 0 Bb og oun go ou tu B37 4 Q dg n g dg ga oo 37 5 oo0000000 0000 00 0 37 6 00000000000 000 0 0 37 7 oo mo 0 0 00 Can g OG D 0 9 B37 8 odd 00 0 0 0 8 0 8 Jg O D a 37 9 a ad 0 00 00 8 ao 0 Q D O 0 Ei EE Bray Smat 0 0 0 0 0 Columns 18 gt EE xl Ea Properties Usage Help For Short Floating Point Analog Input Config File Class Level of Index
17. xO DG SOURCE CABLE EXTERNAL Item Description 1 Port 1 DB 9 RS 232 DTE 2 Port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 DTE 3 Port 3 RS 485 Phoenix plug 4 DC Power Source selector switch cable port 2 power source external external power source connected to item 5 5 Terminals for external 24V DC power supply and chassis ground For additional information on connecting the AIC refer to the Advanced Interface Converter AIC User Manual publication 1761 0 001 Cable Selection Guide E E 1761 CBL APO0 1761 02 2 Cable Length Connections from to AIC External Power Power Supply Selection Required Switch Setting 1761 CBL APOO 45 cm 17 7 in SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processors ch 0 port 2 yes externa 1761 0202 2 m 6 5 ft MicroLogix 1000 1200 or 1500 ch 0 port 1 yes external MicroLogix 1400 ch 2 port 2 yes externa PanelView 550 through NULL modem port 2 yes externa adapter DTAM Plus DTAM Micro port 2 yes externa PC COM port port 2 yes external 1 External power supply required unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable 2 Series C or later cables are required Rockwell Automation Public
18. MicroLogix MicroLogix 1000 Slave 1400 Slave MicroLogix MicroLogix SLC 5 04 SLC 5 03 with 1200 Slave 500 Slave Slave 1747 KE Interface Module Slave Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 185 Appendix E 186 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave on a Multi drop Link When communication is between either your programming software and a MicroLogix Programmable Controller or between two MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers via slave to slave communication on a larger multi drop link the devices depend on a DF1 Half Duplex Master to give each of them access in a timely manner As the number of slave devices increase the time between when slave devices are polled also increases This increase in time may also be large if you are using low baud rates As these time periods grow you may need to increase the poll timeout and reply timeout values for slave devices IMPORTANT If a program download is started when using DF1 Half Duplex but then is interrupted due to electromagnetic interference or other events discontinue communications to the controller for the ownership timeout period and then restart the program download The ownership timeout period is 60 seconds After the timeout you can re establish communi
19. 2 MicroLogix 1400 Memory Module and Built in Real Time Clock 2 1762 Expa sion o E a VERBERE E RATS 3 Communication Cables 4 Programming POTE Un 5 Communication oorr Co eod sete A das 5 Chapter 2 Agency Certifications c cb tenure ta eie ata prada um eie Ms 7 Compliance to European Union 7 EMG Directive ooo pecus t ne sureste Me RE SU e ei 7 Low Voltage Directive 8 Installation Considerations osos rin Pun Ain dd ARE SD Rad 8 Safety Considerations atthe ed 9 Hazardous Location 9 Disconnecting Main Power c ere eh er et e ved 10 Safety Circuits eu ette e XS I D LER ESI a 10 Power Distribution bronce Meo uu 10 Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit 11 Power Considerations zio ove va i paid sede pe tee sh 11 Isolation Transformers e Ro Sep dea a 11 Power Supply nid e e Pre eREEA 11 Loss of Power Source 12 Input States on Power 12 Other Types of Line 12 Preventing Excessive Heat bee E EAR EEE S 12 MasterControl Relay iesus uec korr ee AE AERA E 13 Using Emergency Stop SWItCIesa severi erbe vals 14 Schematic Us
20. 73 vi Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN E May 2014 Using the LCD Table of Contents Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH 485 Connector 74 Grounding and Terminating the DH 485 Network 75 Connecting the AIG Ha erat eed ars AA is 76 Cable Selection Guides ai sid ta ese DEL S Z7 Recommended User Supplied 80 Safety Considerations Nena umen da da 81 Install and Attach the ATO 5o E RA MI RO SER PUE 81 Powers the oe erani tue inlet de qaad 82 Connecting to DeviceNet o ias ds Mad eade eer EA E oe 83 Cable Selection Guide 83 Gonrectne to Etherhet ARR e regla 84 Ethernet Connections a eere t eb ERE eee eas Ae EIER EPIS 85 Chapter 5 Operating Principles cus on cia dees eh apte rede etes 88 Main Menu and Default 91 Operating ceterae el tato ox t 93 Using Menus to Choose 585 93 Selecting Between Menu Items soto e e eet eb ves 93 Cursor Display esed ond ho Oen ie beds ao dd dU i epo HENCE 94 Setting Values curs Exe 95 TO SEUS ee MON tes ts 95 I es NU e Ee Ger esa 96 Monitor User Defined Target 97 Target User Defined File Number TUF
21. DNP3 Analog Input Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with Any variation Analog Input Static Objects e g30v0 Analog Input Any Variations g30v1 Analog Input 32 bit with flag e g30v2 Analog Input 16 bit with flag g30v3 Analog Input 32 bit without flag default g30v Analog Input 16 bit without flag default g30v5 Analog Input Single prec flt pt with flag default Analog Input Event Objects e g32v0 Analog Input Event Any Variation gJ2vl Analog Input Event 32 bit without time default e g32v2 Analog Input Event 16 bit without time default e g32v3 Analog Input Event 32 bit with time e g32v Analog Input Event 16 bit with time g32v5 Analog Input Event Single prec flt pt without time default g32v7 Analog Input Event Single prec flt pt with time Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 253 Appendix F 254 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Related Object File Number 16 bit Analog Input Object File Number 32 bit Analog Input Object File Number Short Floating Point Analog Input Object File Number Related Configuration File Number 16 bit Analog Input Config File Number 32 bit Analog Input Config File Number Short Floating Point Analog Input Co
22. 052 1 C522 52 3 C524 52 5 52 6 52 7 52 529 52 10 52 11 52 12 52 13 52 14 52 15 52 16 52 17 52 18 C52 18 52 20 CS2 21 52 22 52 23 52 24 re 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 301 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 For the elements of the DNP3 Slave Link Layer diagnostic counter CS0 9 to CS0 17 and CS2 9 to 52 17 the counter values are available with the structured display in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro as below Channel Status Oy io Channel 1 Charnel 2 DNF3 Slave Messages Sent n Messages Received This Node n Messages Observed n NAK Messages Received 9 Undelivered Messages 0 Link Layer Error Count o Messages Retied n Link LayerEworCode o Modem Lines RTS CTS DCD Clear 3 Channel Status Lx Channel 0 Channel 1 f DNP3 Slave Messages Sent 0 Messages Received This y Messages bserved Messages Received Bo Undelivered Messages 0 Link Layer Error Count n Messages Retried Link Layer Error Code ATS CTS DCD 302 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F For the elements of the DNP3 Slave Application
23. Chi Ch2 id i 4 Voltage OFF Y Current ON Default 54 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 31 1762 IF4 Terminal Block Layout TIP Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Grounding the cable shield at the module end only usually provides sufficient noise immunity However for best cable shield performance earth ground the shield at both ends using a 0 01 pF capacitor at one end to block AC power ground currents if necessary 55 Chapter3 Wire Your Controller Figure 33 Sensor Transmitter Types 2 Wire Transmitter Transmitter Module Transmitter Supply Signal Transmitter Supply 1 All power supplies rated N E C Class 2 1762 OF4 Output Type Selection The output type selection current or voltage is made by wiring to the appropriate terminals lout or Vout and by the type range selection bits in the Configuration Data File 1762 OF4 Terminal Block Layout ut 0 ut 1 ut 2 ut 3 Commons connected internally 56 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 1762 OF4 Wiring n 0 LAO NY sm Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 57 Chapter3 Wire Your Controller Notes 58 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P
24. 000000 Hl Channel 2 Node Address 18H The user can configure the node address for either channel by using the Up and Down arrow keys Once the address is changed press OK to confirm the change The following screen appears 00000 RU Modbus ATU Slave Channel B Channel 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Chapter 6 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules The MicroLogix 1400 controller has a built in real time clock RTC You can order a memory module as an accessory TIP For more information on Real Time Clock Function File and Memory Module Information File refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 One type of memory module is available for use with the MicroLogix 1400 controller 1766 MM1 Memory Module 384 KB Real Time Clock Operation Operation at Power up and Entering a Run or Test Mode At power up and when the controller enters a run or test mode the values date time and status of the RTC are written to the RTC Function File in the controller The following table indicates the accuracy of the RTC for various temperatures RTC Accuracy Ambient Temperature Accuracy 25 C 77 F 54 5 seconds month 40 C 104 F 29 78 seconds month 55 C 131 F 43 150 seconds month These numbers are maximum worst case values over a 31 d
25. Data Set Prototypes Object File Number e Data Set Descriptors Object File Number To generate a Data Set Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller configure Data Set Prototypes Descriptors Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file and also the Maximum Number of Data Set Prototypes Descriptors Files Each Data Set Prototypes Object file N data file can have up to 10 elements of Data Set Prototypes and each Data Set Descriptors Object file N data file can have up to 10 elements of Data Set Descriptors As an example with Data Set Prototypes files if you configure Data Set Prototypes Object File Numbers to 50 and Maximum Number of Data Set Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 261 Appendix F 262 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Prototypes Files to 9 N Data files 50 to 58 are reserved to store the structure of the Data Set Prototypes configuration lt Data Set Prototypes file N50 Data Set Prototypes file N51 lt Data Set Prototypes file N52 Data Set Prototypes file N53 Data Set Prototypes Data Set Prototypes file N54 Element Array N data file Data Set Prototypes file N58 t m NE n dd t As an example with Data Set Descriptors files if you configure Data Set Descriptors Object File Number to 60 and Maximum Number of Data Set Descriptors
26. Diagnostics for Ethernet Channel Channel 1 This feature is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Diagnostic Counters and Errors in DNP3 Slave subsystem for the Ethernet channel are logged in the Data File The data file is configured in the parameter Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 303 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Diagnostic File Number This table shows the 80 words of the data file for the troubleshooting Data File for Troubleshooting Word Offset Description Category 0 Counter for Commands Received TCP Server Link Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 TCP 1 Counter for Commands Received with Error 2 Counter for Replies Sent 3 Reserved 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Error Count in sessions 7 Error Code in sessions 8 Incoming Message Connections 9 Maximum Connections Allowed 10 Counter for Commands Transmitted 11 Reserved 2 Counter for Replies Received 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Reserved 17 Reserved 8 Reserved 19 Reserved 304 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Data File for Troubleshooting MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Category UDP Datagram Link Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 UDP Word Offset Description 20 Counter for Commands Received 21 Counter for Comman
27. 2014 281 Appendix F Data File List MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Control Generating Event The MicroLogix 1400 checks all elements in the Object Data file for changes at the end of a scan and generates events where needed The key method to turn on and off event generating by ladder logic is to assign or un assign the Class information bits in the Object Config Files The example below shows how to control the event generation condition by ladder logic and implements Deadband for Analog Input Objects which is only necessary for Series A MicroLogix 1400 In this example for 16 bit Analog Input point 0 N11 0 ifthe absolute value of the difference between the present value of N11 0 and the value that was most recently queued as an event for that point exceeds the deadband value then an event is generated for that point Name Number Type Scope Debug Words Elements Last Output 0 0 Global No 18 6 0 5 Input 1 Global No 24 8 I7 Sas o s6 Binary 3 B Global 0 1 1 B3 0 Timer 4 T Global No 3 1 T4 0 Contr 3 Control 6 R Global 0 3 1 R6 0 Integer 7 N Global No N7 0 Float de F No reo o 16 bit Analog Input Object File 11 N Global No 0 0 N11 9 Binary Output Object File 12 B Global No 0 0 B12 0 16 bit32 bit Analog Input Config File 21 B Global No 0 0 21 9 A16l OLD 3
28. viaa BOOTP or DHCP request at controller powerup manually setting the configuration parameters using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Programming Software via LCD display see Configuring the Ethernet Port on page 100 and Configuring Ethernet Protocol Setup on page 102 The configuration parameters are shown on the following page and the configuration procedures follow Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Appendix Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Default Status Hardware The MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet hardware address Ethernet read only Address hardware address IP Address The MicroLogix 1400 internet address in network byte order The internet address must be 0 undefined read write specified to connect to the TCP IP network Subnet Mask The MicroLogix 1400 subnet mask in network byte order The Subnet Mask is used to interpret IP 0 undefined read write addresses when the internet is divided into subnets A Subnet Mask of all zeros indicates that no subnet mask has been configured In this case the controller assumes a Subnet Mask of 255 255 255 0 Gateway The address of a gateway in network byte order that provides connection to another IP network 0 undefined read write Address Gateway Address of all zeros indicates
29. 212 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Keep Alive Interval x1 s This parameter specifies a time interval for TCP Keep Alive mechanism If the timer times out the MicroLogix 1400 transmits a keep alive message The keep alive message is a DNP Data Link Layer status request FC REQUEST LINK STATUS If a response is not received to the keep alive message the MicroLogix 1400 deems the TCP connection broken and closes the TCP connection The valid range is 1 to 65535 Default value is 10 Slave Node Address This value is a node address of this DNP3 Slave The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 1 Local TCP Port Number This value is used to configure Local TCP Port Number which is used for TCP socket listening The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Local UDP Port Number This value is used to configure Local UDP Port Number which is used for UDP socket listening The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Diagnostic File Number The diagnostic file number is used to store the diagnostics for the troubleshooting of DNP3 Ethernet subsystem The status of DNP3 TCP and UDP subsystem is stores to this data file The value of this parameter is N file only Valid range is 0 7 9 to 255 Default value is 0 See Diagnostics on page 296 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F DNP3
30. ATTENTION When you connect or disconnect the Removable A Terminal Block RTB with field side power applied an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding When used Class 1 Division 2 hazardous location this equipment A must be mounted in a suitable enclosure All wiring must be in accordance with Class 1 Division 2 wiring methods of Article 501 of the National Electrical Code and or in accordance with Section 18 1J2 of the Canadian Electrical Code and in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction Figure 3 1766 L32BWA L32BWAA Input Terminal Block 1 1 1 INO COM1 INT ING INTO COM3 9 6 I2 6666666666660660 0000006000000 IN3 IN4 IN6 COM 2 IN 11 IN12 IN14 IN16 1 18 1 1 1 3 J L L L uc VAC COM L2 N OUTO OUTI OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 He OUT7 OUT8 OUT10 ANA ovt 00000000000 Oe tee Ae de chee dy 060 DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 OUTS OUT6 DC6 OUT ovo VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC L p L 44524 Group 0 Groupi Group2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Output Terminal Block Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 33 Wire Your Controller 1766 L32BWAA controllers should not be used to power output circui
31. DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes hex Function Codes Qualifier Codes Num dec dec hex 23 1 Frozen Counter Event 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 17 28 index with flag 07 08 limited qty 0 unsol resp 23 2 Frozen Counter Event 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 17 28 index with flag 07 08 limited qty 30 unsol resp 23 5 Frozen Counter Event 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 17 28 index with flag and time 07 08 limited qty 30 unsol resp 23 6 Frozen Counter Event 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 17 28 index with flag and time 07 08 limited qty 30 unsol resp 30 0 Analog Input Any Variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 30 1 Analog Input 32 bit with flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 29 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 30 2 Analog Input 16 bit with flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 29 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 30 3 Analog Input 32 bit without 1 read 00 01 start stop 29 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 30 4 An
32. Not Applicable max Continuous current per 2 5 A Also see Relay Contact Ratings on page 7 A Also see Relay 2 5 A Also see Relay point max 139 Contact Ratings on Contact Ratings on page 139 page 139 Continuous current per 8A 8A 7 A Also see Relay 8A common max Contact Ratings on page 133 Continuous current per 16A 16A 30A Also see Module 8A module max Load Ratings 1762 0 6 on 140 Surge current max See Relay Contact Rati ngs on page 139 See Relay Contact Ratings on page 139 See Relay Contact Ratings on page 139 Isolated groups Output group to backplane isolation 138 Group 1 Outputs 0 to 3 Group 2 Outputs 4 to 7 Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1 265V AC working voltag Group 1 Outputs 0 to 7 Group 2 Outputs 8 to 15 e IEC Class 2 reinforced All 6 Outputs Individually Isolated Group 3 Outputs 0 to 5 836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s insulation Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Output Specifications Specification Output group to output group isolation Specifications Appendix A Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s 265V AC working voltage basic insulation 150V AC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Vendor D code 1 Product type c
33. OUT 22 gt 4 L fe zw pc 2077 2 OUT 23 FR OUT 8 OUT 24 CR 4 OUT 9 CR OUT 25 CR OUT 10 myt OUT 26 M OUT 11 Vy OUT 27 CRI A up AA OUT 12 M OUT 28 V m our 13 CR OUT 29 CR OUT 14 y 1 OUT 30 0 5 OUT 15 A OUT 81 A DC DC 1 com 1 Y 2 2 44925 46 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 23 1762 0V32T Wiring Diagram VDC 1 VDC 2 DC DC A VDC 1 A 4VDC 2 EN OUT 16 CR AN OUT OUT 17 eU A fa VEN OUT2 CR OUT 18 CR NI oura CR OUT 19 CR OUT 4 OUT 20 4 ours OUT 21 ema oure CR OUT 22 cR 24V OUT7 CRF 24V DC sink OUT 23 outs CR OUT 24 ER fan T fag OUT 9 OUT 25 me ey OUT 10 y 1 OUT 26 ap 21 OUT 11 OUT 27 V OUuT28 oU 13 CR OUT 29 CR 2 ud OUT 14 OUT 30 OUT 15 Aj OUT 31 V DC DC ooa 1 e 2 1 com2 44915 Figure 24 1762 OW8 Wiring Diagram L1 VAC1 L2 DC1 COM 1 VAC2 VAC VDC2
34. Product code 1 Sinking Sourcing Inputs Sourcing sinking describes the current flow between the 1 0 module and the field device Sourcing 1 0 circuits supp 114 96 97 99 98 y source current to sinking field devices Sinking 1 0 circuits are driven by a current sourcing field device Field devices connected to the negative side DC Common of the field power supply are sinking field devices Field devices connected to the positive side of the field supply are sourcing field devices 2 Refer to Publication 1762 IN10 MicroLogix 1762 1016 DC Input Module Installation Instructions for the derating chart 3 Only applicable to Series B 1 0 modules 136 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 2 1 W at 55 C 131 F Specifications Appendix A Output Specifications Specification 1762 0A8 1762 0B8 1762 0B16 1762 0B32T 1762 0V32T Shipping weight approx 215 g 0 48 Ibs 210 g 0 46 Ibs 235 g 0 52 Ibs 200 g 0 44 Ibs 200 g 0 44 Ibs with carton Voltage category 100 240V AC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC source 24V DC sink Operating voltage range 85 265V AC at 20 4 26 4V DC 20 4 26 4V DC 10 2 26 4V DC 10 2 26 4V DC 47 63 Hz Number of outputs 8 8 16 32 32 Bus current draw max 115 mA at 5V DC 115 mA at 5V DC 175 mA at 5V DC 0 88 175 mA at 5V DC 175 mA at 5V DC 0 575 W 0 575 W W 0 mA at 24V DC 0 mA at 24V DC Heat dissipation max 29W 1
35. gt ORS ca a Im oa gt gt o O O O O O O DO O og o oe 2 02 11 0 0 Padi D nar sma Desc p Properties Usage Help As example a Binary Output Config File shown below has 10 elements Each bit can be configured for Online information if the corresponding point is active or not 0 offline 1 online of the Binary Output points B31 0 0 is for Index 0 B31 0 1 is for Index 1 and B31 9 15 is for Index 159 In the example below all bits are cleared and all of the points are in offline state Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Binary Output Database Index MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F If this bit is set the Online bit in the status flag of each Binary Output points is set when you read Binary Output Status objects File B31 Binary Output Config File 5 ike Se ee ee BSL 0 31 1 n naga 8 Oo D31 2 000000000 0 00 0 0 D0 Q0 Ooad000 00 00 00 0 000 D 0 31 4 000000000 00 00 0 0 0 31 5 00000000 00 0 00 0 0 Q0
36. 0 10 0 G 1050 Q Oo B 0 0 Ok 0 50 oo D D 05 0 0 0 d 0 0 OOO 0 O 0 oO oO 0 D 0 02 0 OQ 0 0 0 O 0 Q0 20 D 50 a O 0 O 0 0 O 0 O 0 0n0000n0n020000200 000 0n000n0n0n0200000000 0 0n00n0n0n0n0200200200 00 0 0n000n00n0000000000 0 OO OG 0 0 O 0 0 O 0 0 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 vj sq Radix Binary Columns fie Z ccr 1 Properties Usage Help 70 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 LCD Edit Disable is set to unchecked disable Data File Properties Global Local Constant a The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 3 to specify the bit file B3 as the target bit file to monitor on the LCD as shown in the screen capture below RTC Customized Boot Logo ASCII File Start with Customized Displa 10 Data Input Tirneout of LCD nstuci 0 DN LCD Instruction Job Done ERR LCD Display Operation Error Bit 0 LCD Mo Error x ata update Mode Set Trimpot Low Value impot Hah Value 250 POTO Trimpot 0 Data 0 Trimpot 1 Data TMIN Instruction Display Window 0 OK OK key in Customized Display 0 The controller mode is set to REMOTE RUN Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 11 Chapt
37. 0 0613 C C 40 0613 F F Thermocouple S 1 7 C 3 1 F 2 6 C 4 7 F 0 0600 C C 0 0600 F F Thermocouple C 1 8 C 13 3 F 3 5 C 46 3 F 0 0899 C C 0 0899 F F 146 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Specifications Appendix A 1762 IT4 Accuracy Input Type With Autocalibration Enabled Without Autocalibration Accuracy 3 for 10 Hz 50 Hz and 60 Hz Maximum Temperature Drift 4 Filters max at 25 C 77 F at 0 60 at 0 60 C 32 140 F Ambient 32 140 F Ambient Ambient Thermocouple B 3 0 5 4 F 45 C 48 1 F 0 1009 C C 0 1009 F F 50 mV 15 uV 25 uV 0 44uV C 0 80uV F 100 mV 20 uV 30 uV 0 69uV C 01 251 V F 1 The module uses the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST ITS 90 standard for 2 Accuracy and temperature drift information does not include the affects of errors or drift in the cold junction compensation circuit 3 Accuracy is dependent upon the analog digital converter output rate selection data format and input noise 4 Temperature drift with autocalibration is slightly better than without autocalibration Output Specifications Specification Number of outputs hermocouple linearization TIP For mote detailed 1762 IT4 accuracy information see publication 1762 UM002 1762 IF20F2 2 single e
38. 198 100 166 BH TIP To exit the Network configuration Menu press the ESC key on the LCD keypad at any time Configuring the Ethernet Port The Port Settings screen of the LCD displays the Ethernet port settings assigned to the controller Follow these steps to edit the Ethernet port settings for your controller 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 REMOTE User Display b dvanced Set 100 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 N Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed KeyIn Cfg Cfg IFENET Cfg is selected press the OK key If not select Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 000000 KeyIn Mode DCOHH Cfg Cfg 4 If Port Setting is selected press the OK key If not select Port Setting using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 000006 ENET Cfg bPort Setting Protocol setup 5 The password screen is displayed Press Up Down Left and Right keys to enter Master password with maximum 10 digits In this example the current Master password is al
39. 20 1 Counter 32 bit with flag 7 freeze 06 no range or all 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 2 Counter 16 bit with flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 20 2 Counter 16 bit with flag 7 freeze 06 no range or all 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 5 Counter 32 bit without flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 20 5 Counter 32 bit without flag 7 freeze 06 no range or all 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 6 Counter 16 bit without flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 20 6 Counter 16 bit without flag 7 freeze 06 no range or all 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 21 0 Frozen Counter Any Variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 21 1 Frozen Counter 32 bit with flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 21 2 Frozen Counter 16 bit with flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 29 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 21 5 Frozen Counter 32 bit with flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop and time 06 no range or all
40. 41 2 Analog Output 16 bit 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 41 3 Analog Output 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request Single prec flt pt 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 50 1 Time and Date Absolute 1 read 07 limited qty 1 129 response 07 limited qty time qty 1 2 write 07 limited qty 1 50 3 Time and Date Absolute time at last recorded time 51 1 Time and Date CTO 29 response 07 limited qty Absolute time 30 unsol resp qty 1 synchronized 51 2 Time and Date CTO 29 response 07 limited qty Absolute time 30 unsol resp qty 1 unsynchronized 52 1 Time Delay Coarse 29 response 07 limited qty qty 1 52 2 Time Delay Fine 29 response 07 limited qty qty 1 60 1 Class Objects Class 0 1 read 06 no range or all data 60 2 Class Objects Class 1 1 read 06 no range or all data 07 08 limited qty 20 enbl unsol 06 no range or all 21 dab unsol 60 3 Class Objects Class 2 1 read 06 no range or all data 07 08 limited qty 60 4 Class Objects Class 3 1 read 06 no range or all data 07 08 limited qty 20 enbl unsol 06 no range or all 21 dab unsol 318 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request MicroLo
41. BERS ERE 104 Move cursor between digits left right arrows i i ap GE dome GR JUD UE TED LACE NO 3 00000000000 0 00 00 4 0000000000000 0000 5 0000000 02 02 020 0 0 00 0 6 0000000 0 502000 0000 7 00000002 0 000 0 00 00 8 00020000 0 002 02e 002 02 0 00 9 ow 0 w Gi Go GO 0 O0 0 0 10 10 00000000 0 0 0 0 NT Retain previous value of E5370 z Symbo Colima fies zi Properties Usage Help Left right arrow moves the cursor between the digits of the value Up down arrow changes the value Up arrow increment Down arrow decrement 1 0 Status The MicroLogix 1400 provides I O status indicators on the LCD screen You can view the status of inputs and outputs on the I O Status screen on the LCD as shown below The I O status indicators on this screen are updated every 100 ms to reflect the current I O status in real time regardless of controller scan time Input status indicators 20 Output status indicators 12 A solid rectangle is displayed when the input or output is energized An empty rectangle is displayed when the input or output is not energized Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 67 Chapter 5 68 Using the LCD IMPORTANT If no user defined LCD screen is used the 1 0 Status screen is displayed 5 seconds after the controller has powered up e When the user enters the 1 0 Status screen from other
42. N 1762 1 0 expansion bus connector BN ae j T Battery wire connector 4 Battery connector Battery wires EE EX CHIC D 44522 152 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Replacement Parts Appendix B Battery Handling Follow the procedure below to ensure proper battery operation and reduce personnel hazards Use only for the intended operation Do not ship or dispose of cells except according to recommended procedures e Do not ship on passenger aircraft ATTENTION A e Do charge the batteries An explosion could result or the cells could overheat causing burns e Do not open puncture crush or otherwise mutilate the batteries A possibility of an explosion exists and or toxic corrosive and flammable liquids would be exposed e Do not incinerate or expose the batteries to high temperatures Do not attempt to solder batteries An explosion could result e Do not short positive and negative terminals together Excessive heat can build up and cause severe burns Storage Store lithium batteries in a cool dry environment typically 20 C 2 5 C 68 77 and 4096 6096 humidity Store the batteries and a copy of the battery instruction sheet in the original container away from flammable materials Transportation One or Two Batteries Each battery contains 0 23 g of lithium Therefore up to two batteries can b
43. Number of Nodes The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes Unnecessary nodes such as a second programming terminal that is not being used slow the data transfer rate The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 191 Appendix E 192 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Setting Node Addresses The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in sequential order Initiators such as personal computers should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network The valid range for the MicroLogix controllers is 1 31 controllers cannot be node 0 The default setting is 1 The node address is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 0 to CS0 5 7 Setting Controller Baud Rate The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate which is 19 200 This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix device on the DH 485 network All devices must be at the same baud rate This rate is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 8 to CS0 5 15 Setting Maximum Node Address Once you have an established network set up and are confident that you will not be adding more devices you may enhance performance by adjusting the maximum node address of your controllers It should be set to the highest node address bei
44. install the MicroLogix 1400 system in a properly rated for example NEMA enclosure Make sure that the MicroLogix 1400 system is properly grounded system may malfunction due to a change in the operating environment after a period of time We recommend periodically checking system operation particularly when new machinery or other noise sources are installed near the MicroLogix 1400 system 38 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Wiring Your Analog Analog input circuits can monitor voltage signals and convert them to serial Channels digital data Sensor 2 V Voltage Sensor 0 V Voltage Input Terminal Block 1 n 1 8 1 10 COM 3 113 1 15 1 17 1 19 1 0 IVa COM 2 1 9 Mn 112 1 14 1 16 1 18 IV1 IV3 ANA Sensor 1 V Voltage Sensor 3 V Voltage 44529 The controller does not provide loop power for analog inputs Use a power supply that matches the transmitter specifications as shown The analog output can support a voltage function as shown in the following illustration Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 39 Chapter3 Wire Your Controller Figure 13 Analog Output Uu ey 0 10 VAC 0 3 0 4 065 0 7 0 8 0 1 3 DC4 0 5 0 6 066 0 9 01 VAC VAC Output Terminal Block mE 44680 Analog Channel Wiring Guide
45. 16 bit 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag 06 no range or all 40 3 Analog Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop Single prec flt pt with flag 06 no range or all 322 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response Appendix F DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes hex Function Codes Qualifier Codes Num dec dec hex 4 1 Analog Output 32 bit 3 select 17 27 28 index 129 response echo of request 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 4 2 Analog Output 16 bit 3 select 17 27 28 index 129 response echo of request 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 4 3 Analog Output Single prec 3 select 17 27 28 index 129 response echo of request flt pt 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 50 1 Time and Date Absolute time 1 read 07 limited qty 1 129 response 07 limited qty qty 1 2 write 07 limited qty 1 50 3 Time and Date Absolute time 2 write 07 limi
46. 1762 14 40 50 1762 IF20F2 40 105 1762 108 50 0 1762 1016 70 0 1762 1032T 170 0 1762 IRA 40 50 1762 14 40 50 1762 0 8 115 0 1762 8 115 0 1762 0B16 175 0 1762 0B32T 175 0 1762 0F4 40 165 1762 0V32T 175 0 1762 0W8 2 80 90 160 180 1762 0W16 140 2 18077 1762 0X6l 110 110 1762 1080W6 110 80 Total Modules 7 maximum 4 Subtotal 260 180 1 Refer to your expansion 1 0 Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table 2 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules 344 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 System Loading and Heat Dissipation Appendix H Validating the System The example systems shown in the tables below are verified to be acceptable configurations The systems are valid because Calculated Current Values Maximum Allowable Current Values Calculated System Loading lt Maximum Allowable System Loading Validating Systems using 1766 L32AWA or 1766 L32BXB Maximum Allowable Values Current Calculated Values Current Subtotal from Table on page 344 1225 mA 5V DC 1155 mA Q 24V DC mA 260 mA 260 mA 5V DC 0 mA 180 mA 180 mA Q 24V DC System Loading System Loading 33 845 W 260 mA x 5V 180 mA x 24V 1 300 mW 4 320 mW 5 620 mW 5 62 W Validating Systems using 1766 L32BWA Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values Current for Devices Connected to
47. 2014 251 Appendix F 252 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 If both 16 bit Counter Object File Number and 32 bit Counter Object File Number were configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file the 16 bit Frozen Counter Object starting index number is 0 and the 32 bit Frozen Counter Object starting index number of starts after the last index number for 16 bit Frozen Counter Object For example if 10 elements of 16 bit Counter Object were configured and 10 elements of 32 bit Counter Object were configured the index numbers will be 16 bit Frozen Counter Object From 0 to 9 32 bit Frozen Counter Object From 10 to 19 When only one of the Counter Object File was configured Index number starts from 0 for the configured object As an example a Frozen Counter Config File is shown below These files have 10 elements for each B34 0 0 and B34 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 of the 16 bits Frozen Counter Object File B34 1 0 and B34 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 1 ofthe Counter Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved So in the example below for 16 bit Frozen Counter Config File Class Level of Index 0 is 1 B34 0 0 and B34 0 1 Class Level of Index 1 is 2 B34 1 0 and B34 1 1 Class Level of Index 2 is 3 B34 2 0 and B34 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 r3 Dota File BH bin 1555 Frozen Counter Conf
48. 28 index 87 1 Data Set Present Value 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 5B free format 06 no range or all 17 28 index 88 0 Data Set Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 88 1 Data Set Event Snapshot 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 5B free format 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 90 1 Application Identifier 16 init appl 06 no range or all 17 start appl 5B free format 18 stop appl 91 1 Status of Requested Operation 129 response 07 limited qty qty 1 101 0 Binary Coded Decimal Integers 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 101 1 Binary Coded Decimal Integers 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 00 01 start stop small 30 unsol resp 17 28 index 120 1 Authentication Challenge 32 Auth Request 5B free format 31 Auth resp 5B free format 120 2 Authentication Reply 32 Auth Request 5B free format 31 Auth resp 5B free format 120 3 Authentication Aggressive Any requests 07 limited qty 29 response 07 limited qty Mode Request 120 3 Authentication Aggressive 30 unsol resp 07 limited qty Mode Request 120 4 Authentication Session Key 32 Auth Request 07 limited qty Status Request 324 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Netwo
49. AIC s D zi Ted Person MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix 1400 1000 Computer 1200 1500 cum DH 485 Network Belden shielded twisted pair cable Belden shielded twisted pair cable AIC 3 1762NCO1M A ER 1761 CBL APOO or 1761 CBL PM02 1 DC user supplied port 1 or port 2 1747 CP3 to PC or 1761 CBL ACOO 3 1 DB 9 RS 232 port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 3 RS 485 port 4 Series A or later cables are required 194 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Modbus Communication Protocol ASCII Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Appendix E Typical 3 Node Network PanelView 550 PanelView LE M az MicroLogix 1400 RJ45 port 1761 CBL AS09 or 1761 CBL AS03 1747 or 0 en or 1761 CBL HM02 LJ
50. B31 6 pooo nro nru o n uro p B31 7 poon noda nanan Dana 0 0 31 8 O00 000 00 090 00 0 Q D 31 9 000000000 0 n Binary Symbol 3cfurms fis Desc p3 Properties Usag Help Binary Command Control relay output block CROB The MicroLogix 1400 has three control models for Binary Output Control They are Activation model Complementary latch model and Complementary two output model For the Complementary two output model two bits are required to control this model in the Binary output object The point index is different than in the Activation or Complementary latch model The point index varies as shown in the table below The maximum number of Binary Output index for Complementary two output model is 2048 Activation model or Complementary latch model Complementary two output model 0 BO Index 0 BO Close Index 0 1 BO Index 1 BO Trip Index 0 2 BO Index 2 BO Close Index 1 3 BO Index 3 BO Trip Index 1 4 BO Index 4 BO Close Index 2 5 BO Index 5 BO Trip Index 2 4094 BO Index 4094 BO Close Index 2047 4095 BO Index 4095 BO Trip Index 2047 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 245 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 These control codes and point models are implemented in the MicroLogix 1400 controller 0x00 NUL NUL Clear field Off 0x20 NUL NUL Clear fie
51. BBBBBHT1 UnProtected 9 Press OK to apply the changes The new value 1300 is applied Note that the target word 0 which is to the right of L9 is flashing The cursor is moved automatically to the target word position B II HEHUTE 9 8 BHBBBHT38H UnProtected Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 83 Chapter5 Using the LCD 10 You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software Data File L9 dec 1 Offset 0 il 2 3 4 19 0 1300 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 z Symbol Ts Columns 5 TIP After changing the data value of a target double word press the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC key to discard the changes 11 Now we will view an example of the data value of a protected property If LCD Edit Disable is set to checked enable the Protected message will be displayed and this data file cannot be edited by the LCD x General File 9 L Name Desc Elements 256 Last 3 255 Attributes Debug Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Global C Local Ta File LAD 2 MAIN_PROG Protection Constant C Static None Memory Module Download J Web View Disable CCD Edit REMOTE 9 8 BBBBBHT Protected 12 Try to move the cursor to the data value
52. due to heat build up considerations Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where normally only non conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected Overvoltage Category II is the load level section of the electrical distribution system At this level transient voltages are controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the products insulation Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Install Your Controller Chapter 2 ATTENTION Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting A holes for your controller or other equipment within the enclosure or panel Drilled fragments that fall into the controller or 1 0 modules could cause damage Do not drill holes above a mounted controller if the protective debris shields are removed or the processor is installed WARNING Do not place the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable A Controller in direct sunlight Prolonged exposure to direct sunlight could degrade the LCD display and have adverse effects on the controller The controller is not designed for outdoor use Safety Considerations Safety considerations are an important element of proper system installation Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and others as well as the condition of your equipment is of primary importance We recommend reviewing the following safety considerations Hazardous Location Considerations Thi
53. e g3v2 Double bit Binary Input With flags Double bit Binary Input Event Objects e g4v0 Double bit Binary Input Event All Variations e g4vl Double bit Binary Input Event Without time e g4v2 Double bit Binary Input Event With absolute time e g v3 Double bit Binary Input Event With relative time default Related Object File Number 246 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Double Bit Binary Input Object File Number Related Configuration File Number Double Bit Binary Input Config File Number To generate a Double Bit Binary Input Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Double Bit Binary Input Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When the Double Bit Binary Input Object File is configured the Index number starts from 0 2 bits are used for one Index As an example a Double Bit Binary Input Object File is shown below This file has 10 elements and 80 Double Bit Binary Input points Index 0 of the Double Bit Binary Input Object is B20 0 0 and B20 0 1 Index 1 is B20 0 2 and B20 0 3 and Index 79 is B20 9 14 and B20 9 15 3 Data File B20 bin Double Bit Input Object File Offset 15 14 13 12 10 gt N o a a cc
54. for more information on the use of the battery in relation with RTC 17 Chapter 2 Install Your Controller IMPORTANT WARNING When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that the area is nonhazardous before proceeding For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 When the controller s Battery Low indicator is set displayed as a solid rectangle with the battery wire connector connected you should install a new battery immediately Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Install Your Controller Chapter 2 Connecting the Battery Wire Connector Follow the procedure below to connect the battery wire connector to the battery connector 1 Insert the replaceable battery wire connector into the controller s battery connector 2 Secure the battery connector wires so that it does not block the 1762 expansion bus connector as shown below Battery compartment Battery N gt T p Battery wires str H i E 19 2 MI UJ 44522 B
55. have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph The table below lists the sections that document new features and additional or updated information about existing features Summary of Changes Topic Page Viewing and changing of protocol configuration through LCD 59 MicroLogix 1400 LCD Menu Structure Tree updated with Protocol Configuration 60 Protocol Configuration step by step guide 116 Firmware Revision History Features are added to the controllers through firmware upgrades See the latest release notes 1766 RN001 to be sure that your controller firmware is at the level you need Firmware upgrades are not required except to allow you access to the new features You can only upgrade firmware within the same series of controller Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Summary of Changes Notes iv Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Summary of Changes Hardware Overview Install Your Controller Table of Contents Firmware Revision cedet toes tot ol OULU east s egt Mt iii Preface Who Should Use this Manual eu caudally th abet es 17 Purpose of this Manital cd eos sheeted ed tse 17 Related 18 Common Techniques Used in this 18 Chapter 1 Hardware Features cov beu eed dues 1 Component Descriptions cs coi trt eR I ep RUMP RUE EDU
56. is kept from falling into the module Debris that falls into the module could cause damage when the module is under power DIN Rail Mounting The module can be mounted using the following DIN rails 35x7 5 mm EN 50 022 35 x 7 5 or 35x 15mm EN 50 022 35x 15 Before mounting the module on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latch Press the DIN rail mounting area of the module against the DIN rail The latch momentarily opens and locks into place Use DIN rail end anchors Allen Bradley part number 1492 EA35 or 1492 EAH35 for vibration or shock environments The following illustration shows the location of the end anchors 24 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Install Your Controller Chapter 2 End anchor End anchor 44974 1762 expansion 1 0 must be mounted horizontally as illustrated TIP For environments with greater vibration and shock concerns use the panel mounting method described below instead of DIN rail mounting Panel Mounting Use the dimensional template shown below to mount the module The preferred mounting method is to use two 4 or 8 panhead screws per module Mounting screws are required on every module For more than 2 modules number of modules 1 x 40 mm 1 59 in 142 44 i 1 59 4 s 100 06 90 MicroLogix 3 939 3 54 1400 f U v 2119 Le NO
57. the Point Addressing parameters for the Descriptor element are replaced by 10 Point Addressing parameters These should be configured in the same order of the DAEL elements in the relevant Prototypes Descriptor Element Configuration Index Descriptor Code Data Type Code NONE Max Data Length bytes gt Ancillary Value 0000000000000000000000000 Cancel Point Address 1 Point Address Standard DNP3 Point 7 Point Type NONE Point Index o r Point Address Point Address Type Standard DNP Point Type Point Index 0 m Point Address 2 Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point Point Type NONE Point Index 0 r Point Address 7 Point Address Type Standard DNF Point Type NONE Point Index o Point Address 3 Point Address Type Standard Point Point Type NONE Point Index 0 r Point Address 8 Point Address Type Standard DNF Point Type NONE Point Index 0 Point Address 4 Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point Point Type Point Index o Point Address 9 Point Address Type Standard DNP Point Type NONE Point Index o Point Address 5 Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point Point Type NONE Point Index o r Point Address 10 Point Address Type Standard DNP Point Type NONE Point Index
58. 0 Counter 16bits 0 Counter 32besy o Counter 32518 o Analoginput i6bits f4 Frozen Counter 1860 0 Andoginput 325 s 0 Frozen Counter 32bits D Analog 0 Analog Input 16bits 35 Analog Output 16bits o Analog Input 0 Analog Output 3255 0 Andog Input Short Floating 0 AnelegUutpu Gsorrleatng 0 Double Ditinpul 0 Double BitIrout 0 SmalBED D SmalBcD fo Cancel pp Help 278 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 4 files will be automatically generated in the tree list of the Data Files 3 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 be Channel Configuration Program Files svso svs1 4 Lap2 Data Files Cross Reference 00 ourPuT E 1 pur D 52 83 BINARY 74 TIMER cs COUNTER E CONTROL DI 7 INTEGER p SIME D i 630 Binary i B36 16bits Analog Input Contig File F8 FLOAT Input Object File Data Logging Appendix F You need to adjust the number of the elements for each file according to your application In this example the number of the elements is 10 for Binary Input Object File and 10 for 16 bit Analog Input Object File In the Binary Input Config File the bit 1 bit 0 of B30 0 B30 1 and B30 2 are configured to 0 1
59. 0 41 CS0 41 CS2 41 Reserved Always 0 42 CS0 42 CS2 42 Reserved Always 0 43 CS0 43 52 43 List Category ID 10 44 CS0 44 CS2 44 Length 14 45 CS0 45 CS2 45 Format Code 2 46 CS0 46 CS2 46 Pre Send Time Delay 47 CS0 47 CS2 47 Node Address for this Slave 48 CS0 48 CS2 48 Reserved always 0 298 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Communication Status File Words MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Words Offset File Element File Element Description Description for Description for Channel 0 Channel 2 49 CS0 49 CS2 49 RTS Send Delay 50 CS0 50 CS2 50 RTS Off Delay 51 CS0 51 CS2 51 bits 0 7 Baud Rate bits 8 9 Parity bits 10 15 Reserved Always 0 52 CS0 52 CS2 52 List Category ID 6 53 CS0 53 CS2 53 Length 32 54 CS0 54 CS2 54 Format Code 2 55 CS0 55 CS2 55 Application Layer Error Codes 0 NO_ERROR No error found in the Application Layer 1 FC_CANNOT_BROADCAST Reserved 2 FC_NOT_SUPPORTED The received packet has unsupported Function Code 3 OBU_NOT_SUPPORTED The received packet has unsupported object s 4 BAD_REQUEST_LENGTH Reserved 5 CONFIGURATION_ERROR The error was caused by the invalid configuration during packet generating E g invalid Data Set Configuration 6 BAD_PARAMETER The received packet has invalid parameters except Function Code and Object Codes E g inv
60. 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 297 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Communication Status File Words Words Offset File Element File Element Description Description for Description for Channel 0 Channel 2 17 CS0 17 CS2 17 Link Layer Error Codes 0 ERR NO ERROR 1 ERR NO BUFFER 2 ERR TOO SHORT 3 ERR TOO LONG 4 ERR UART ERROR 5 ERR BAD CRC 6 ERR CTS TIMEOUT 7 ERR CTS DROP MID PKT 8 ERR UNKNOWN CHAR 18 CS0 18 CS2 18 Reserved Always 0 19 CS0 19 CS2 19 Reserved Always 0 20 CS0 20 CS2 20 Reserved Always 0 21 CS0 21 CS2 21 Reserved Always 0 22 CS0 22 CS2 22 Reserved Always 0 23 CS0 23 52 23 Data Link Layer Active Node Table 24 CS0 24 CS2 24 Length 25 CS0 25 CS2 25 Format Code 26 CS0 26 CS2 26 Number of Nodes 27 CS0 27 CS2 27 Reserved Always 0 28 CS0 28 CS2 28 Reserved Always 0 29 CS0 29 CS2 29 Reserved Always 0 30 CS0 30 CS2 30 Reserved Always 0 31 CS0 31 CS2 31 Reserved Always 0 32 CS0 32 CS2 32 Reserved Always 0 33 CS0 33 CS2 33 Reserved Always 0 34 CS0 34 CS2 34 Reserved Always 0 35 CS0 35 CS2 35 Reserved Always 0 36 CS0 36 CS2 36 Reserved Always 0 37 CS0 37 CS2 37 Reserved Always 0 38 CS0 38 CS2 38 Reserved Always 0 39 CS0 39 CS2 39 Reserved Always 0 40 CS0 40 CS2 40 Reserved Always
61. 0 0 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 v 41 Radix Decimal x smi Properties Usage Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 75 Chapter5 Using the LCD The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 7 to specify the integer file N7 as the target integer file to monitor on the LCD as shown in the screen capture below Function Files HSC PTOX PWMX STI El RTC LCD MM lt 1 Address H LE Customized Boot Logo ASCII File 0 SCD Start with Customized Display H TO Data Input Timeout of LCD Instructic 0 HDN LCD Instruction Job Done ERR LCD Display Operation Error Bit 0 ERN LCD Module Operation I arget User De JOG Jog data update M Trimpot Low Value TMA Trimpot High Value L POTO Trimpot 0 Data POTI Trimpot 1 Data TMAX WND Instruction Display Window OK OK key in Customized Display Thecontroller mode is set to REMOTE RUN Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the integer file N7 1 On the Main Menu screen select Monitoring by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad 00000 REMOTE 10 Status bHonitoring Made Switch 2 Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The File Number prompt is displayed B II HEHOTE File Hum Data Press to
62. 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 offline 1 online For Binary Output Element 0 for data index 0 to 15 238 For other Input type data you can configure Class information and the object flag information in the Configuration file The lower 2 bits in the elements of the Configuration files are the configuration of Class information to the relevant objects The upper byte of the configuration file of these objects is used to configure the object flag Other bits are reserved Two new bits are defined in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The bit TE is used to generate an event by setting it regardless of the change of state This bit can be used to generate the timed events Once this bit is set by the Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F ladder logic or communications the MicroLogix 1400 clears it automatically after generating an event at the end of scan The bit DCE is used to suppress the events by the change of state For example if you want to trigger an event for an analog point every 15 minutes you should set the TE bit every 15 minutes by the ladder logic But in this case you may not want the state change events to be generated Then set the bit DCE You can get the timed events
63. 0 001 0 005 100 0 kHz 0 008 0 003 0 008 0 003 0 008 60 0 kHz 0 0125 0 0075 0 0125 0 007 0 0115 40 0 kHz 0 025 0 019 0 025 0 018 0 023 20 0 kHz 0 075 0 062 0 072 0 066 0 074 6 7 kHz 0 100 0 089 0 100 0 088 0 098 5 0 kHz 0 250 0 229 0 250 0 228 0 248 2 0 kHz 0 500 0 459 0 500 0 455 0 492 1 0 kHz 1 00 0 918 0 995 0 910 0 979 0 5 kHz 2 000 1 836 1 986 1 820 1 954 250 Hz 4 000 3 672 3 968 3 640 3 904 125 Hz 8 000 7 312 7 868 7 280 7 804 63 Hz 16 000 14 592 15 668 14 560 15 604 31Hz 1 This is the default setting Standard DC Input Filter Settings Inputs 4 and higher Nominal Filter Setting ms ON Delay ms OFF Delay ms Maximum Frequency Hz Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum 0 500 0 107 0 439 0 024 0 499 1 0 kHz 1 000 0 597 0 964 0 470 0 978 0 5 kHz 2 000 1 437 1 864 1 415 1 990 250 Hz 4 000 3 397 3 964 3 095 3 790 125 Hz 8 000 6 757 7 564 6 735 7 690 63 Hz 16 000 14 597 15 964 13 455 14 890 31Hz 1 This is the default setting 132 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Analog Input Filter Settings Specifications Appendix A Analog Input Filter Settings Filter Bandwidth 3dB Freq Hz Sampling Frequency 250 Hz 250 Hz 1 kHz 60 Hz 60 Hz 1 kHz 50 Hz 50 Hz 1 kHz 10 Hz 10 Hz 1 kHz Relay Contact Ratings Maximum Volts Amperes Amperes Volt Amperes Make Break Continuous Make Break 240V AC 15 0A 1 5A 5 0 A 3 0A 3600 VA 360 VA 120V AC
64. 1 0 and 1 1 respectively The event for the index 0 15 of Binary Input Object will be generated as a Class 1 event the event for the index 16 31 as a Class 2 event and the event for the index 32 47 as a Class 3 event if Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 219 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 280 there are any changes for the points B10 0 B10 1 or B10 2 For any other Binary Input points the events will not be generated Data File B30 bin Binary Input Config File Offset P5 p I3 2511 18 75 30 0 8 30 1 0000000000 0001 B30 Z 000000000 Q0 B D I B30 3 0n0n0a0ao000000 Q0 30 4 000000000 0 a 30 5 0000000000 000 0 B30 6 000000000 0 I B30 7 00 00000 DO 0 30 8 0 00 0 30 9 Bap gun o b 00 Fo EE Radi i Columns zl EE cl Eo Properties Usage Help 4 Data File B10 bin Binary Input Object File NS ee al 10 0 B10 1 0000200802002800200202020 10 2 Oo 0 0 07 O00 0 D oO 0 O 0 BD oO 10 3 Oo 0 000 000 0 0 0 0 0 10 4 oO 0000 0 OO 0 0 0 oU Bl0 5 0 00 08 o o p o u 10 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 a D G 8 0 0 0 0 10 7 000 0 UU 0 IBIO 8 D g D 0 0 Gd D G amp 0 JG O0
65. 1766 UM001H EN E 2014 ix Table of Contents MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DF1 Half Duplex Protocol cus etes tenet 212 DF1 Half Duplex Operation 212 Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave on a Multi drop Link suerte ebbe pets 214 Using Modems with MicroLogix Programmable Controllers 214 DH 485 Communication 215 DH 485 Configuration Parameters 216 Devices that use the DH 485 216 Important DH 485 Network Planning Considerations 217 Example DH 485 221 Modbus Communication Protocol 223 AWSGII oleae die edi 223 Distributed Network Protocol 223 Appendix F Channel Configuration for DNP3 5 225 Channel 0 and Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration 227 Channel 1 Link Layer 228 DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration 230 Channel 0 and Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration Parameters 232 Channel 1 Ethernet Link Layer Configuration Parameters 236 DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration Parameters 241 DNP3 Slave Application Layer vas 2222 22h
66. 20 is 1 B38 0 0 and B38 0 1 Class Level of Index 21 is 2 B38 1 0 and B38 1 1 256 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Class Level of Index 22 is 3 B38 2 0 and B38 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B38 bin Short Floating Point Analog Input Confi E3 Offset 151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 L1 O0 B38 0 oo 8 ob be oo oe 38 1 0000200202000000010 B38 2 on oo 0 0 0 00 1 838 3 38 4 0000000000000000 B38 5 0000000000000000 B38 6 0080000002000007000 B38 7 00000000200000700 0 B38 8 008000000200000000 38 9 008000000200000 00 0 411 Binary inl sma Dec oY ps Properties Usage Help DNP3 Analog Output Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read an object with Any variation Analog Output Status Objects e g40v0 Analog Output Status Any Variations e g 0v1 Analog Output Status 32 bit with flag default e g40v2 Analog Output Status 16 bit with flag default g40v3 Analog Output Status Single prec flt pt with flag default Analog Output Command Objects e g lvl Analog Output 32 bit g lv2 Analog Output 16 bit e g lv3
67. 2014 Supported Communication Protocols Chapter Communication Connections This chapter describes how to communicate with your control system The method you use and cabling required to connect your controller depends on what type of system you are employing This chapter also describes how the controller establishes communication with the appropriate network Topics include supported communication protocols default communication configurations e using communications toggle functionality connecting to RS 232 port connecting to RS 485 network connecting to AIC connecting to DeviceNet connecting to Ethernet The MicroLogix 1400 controllers provide three communication channels an isolated RS 232 485 communication port Channel 0 an Ethernet port Channel 1 and a non isolated RS 232 communication port Channel 2 MicroLogix 1400 controllers support the following communication protocols from the primary RS 232 485 communication channel 0 and the RS 232 communication channel 2 DH 485 e Full Duplex e Half Duplex Master and Slave e DFI Radio Modem Modbus RTU Master and Slave e ASCII DNP3 Slave The Ethernet communication channel Channel 1 allows your controller to be connected to a local area network for various devices providing 10 Mbps 100 Mbps transfer rate MicroLogix 1400 controllers support Ethernet IP with CIP explicit messaging message exchange BOOTP DHCP Client HTTP Se
68. 21 6 Frozen Counter 16 bit with flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop and time 06 no range or all 21 9 Frozen Counter 32 bit without 1 read 00 01 start stop 29 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 21 10 Frozen Counter 16 bit without 1 read 00 01 start stop 29 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 22 0 Counter Event Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 22 1 Counter Event 32 bit with flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 30 unsol resp 22 2 Counter Event 16 bit with flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 22 5 Counter Event 32 bit with flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index and time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 22 6 Counter Event 16 bit with flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index and time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 0 Frozen Counter Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 321 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response
69. 23 Delay Measurement used for Non LAN Procedure This function code is used to measure the communication channel delay time Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 229 Appendix F 230 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 FC RECORD CURRENT TIME FC Byte 0x18 24 Record Current Time used for LAN Procedure This function code is used in the procedure for time synchronizing MicroLogix 1400 controllers that communicate over a LAN This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC OPEN FILE FC Byte 0x19 25 Open File This function code is used to make a file available for reading or writing FC CLOSE FILE FC Byte 26 Close File After the file reading or writing operation this function code used to unlock the file FC DELETE FILE FC Byte 0 1 27 Delete File A DNP3 master uses this function code to delete a file FC GET FILE INFO FC Byte 0x1C 28 Get File Information This function code is for the master to retrieve information about a file in the MicroLogix 1400 This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC AUTHENTICATE FILE FC Byte 0 10 29 Authenticate File This function code is used to obtain an authentication key that is needed to open or delete a file FC ABORT FILE FC Byte 0x1E 30 Abort File This function code is used to immediately request termination of the current read write operation
70. 3 seconds to return to the Main Menu screen as shown below 000000 PISO Status Monitor ing Mode Switch RU RU Configuring Advanced With the Advanced Set menu which is a sub menu under the main menu of the Se ttings LCD you can use the following features changing Key In mode using communications toggle functionality configuring Ethernet Network Configuration using trim pots viewing system information viewing fault code e saving loading Communication EEPROM changing LCD contrast and backlight e viewing changing the Modbus RTU Slave Node address You can access to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown below by selecting Advanced Set on the Main Menu screen Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 91 Chapterb Using the LCD Changing Key In Mode 92 0000008 bKeyIn Cfg ENET Cfg RU Key In Modes There are two Key In modes Continuous and Discrete TIP The Key In mode has an effect only when you change the data value of a trim pot on a trim pot screen either Trim Pot 0 or Trim Pot 1 screen For more information on how to change the data value of a trim pot see Changing Data Value of a Trim Pot on page 106 The current Key In mode determines how the value changes are applied when you press the Up and Down keys to change the data value for a trim pot When set to Continuous the changes are applied immediately whenever you
71. 30 0A 3 0 A 5 0 A7 3 0A 3600 VA 360 VA 125V AC 0 22 A 28 1 5 0 A for UL 508 3 0A for UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2 Hazardous Locations Groups A B C D 2 3 0 A above 40 C 104 F 3 For DC voltage applications the make break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by the applied DC voltage For example 28 VA 48V DC 0 58 For DC voltage applications less than 14V the make break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A Working Voltage Working Voltage for 1766 L32AWA A Description Recommendation Power Supply Input to Backplane Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second eration 265V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Input Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1517V AC for 1 second or 2145V DC for 1 second 132V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Input Group to Input Group Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1517V AC for 1 second or 2145V DC for 1 second 132V AC Working Voltage basic insulation Output Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second 265V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output Group to Output Group Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 183
72. 485 specification Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 75 Chapter4 Communication Connections End of Line Termination p Jumper Belden 3106A or 9842 Cable 1219 m 4000ft Maximum Jumper MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 to DH 485 Communication Cable Pinout When connecting MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 to DH 485 communication cable pinout using an RS 232 cable the maximum that the cable length may be extended is 15 24 m 50 ft Refer to the following typical pinout DTE Device DCE Device DH 485 MicroLogix connector 1400 Channel 0 8 Pin 6 pin 7 TXD 6 Termination 4 RXD 5 A 2 GND 4 B 1 B 3 Common 8 2 Shield 5 DCD 1 ChassisGround 6 CTS 3 RTS Connecting the AIC You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to a DH 485 network via Channel 0 directly without using an optical isolator such as AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC because Channel 0 is isolated However you need to use an AIC to connect your PC or other MicroLogix Family products such as MicroLogix 1200 to a DH 485 network 76 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Communication Connections Chapter 4 The following figure shows the external wiring connections and specifications of the AIC AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 NET AIC g a ana 2 Li n fens
73. 6 5 mA max at 132V AC 63 Hz 30 0V DC Inrush current max 250 mA Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable 250 mA Nominal impedance 2K Q at 50 Hz 3K o 3K o 10K Q at 60 Hz IEC input compatibility Type 1 Type 1 1 Type 1 Type 1 Isolated groups Group 1 inputs 0 7 internally connected commons Group 1 inputs 0 7 internally connected commons Group 1 inputs 0 7 Group 2 inputs 8 15 Group 1 Inputs 0 7 Group 2 Inputs 8 15 Group 3 Inputs 16 23 Group 4 Inputs 24 31 Group 1 inputs 0 3 Group 2 inputs 4 7 Input group to backplane isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1517V AC for 1 s or 2145V DC for 1 s 132V AC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V ACAC for 1 sor 1697V DC for 1 s 75V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V AC for 1 s or 1697V DC for 1 s 75V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V AC for2 s or 1697V DC for 2 s 75V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V AC for 1 s or 1697V DC for 1 s 75V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Vendor D code 1 Product type code 7
74. 61 W 2 9 W at 30 86 F 3 4 W at 26 4 DC 2 7 W at 26 4V DC Signal delay max resistive load On delay 1 2 cycle Off delay 1 2 cycle On delay 0 1 ms Off delay 1 0ms On delay 0 1 ms Off delay 1 0 ms On delay 0 5 ms Off delay 4 0 ms On delay 0 5 ms Off delay 4 0 ms Off state leakage current 2 mA at 132V 0 1 mA at 26 4V DC 0 1 mA at 26 4V DC max 2 5 mA at 265V On state current min 10 mA 0 mA 0 mA 1 0 mA 1 0 mA On state voltage drop 1 5 at 0 5 A 1 0V DC OV DC 0 3V DC at 0 5 A 0 3V DC at 0 5A max Continuous current per 0 25 A at 55 C 0 5 A at 55 131 F 0 5 A at 55 131 F 0 5 at 60 C 140 F 0 5A at 60 C 140 F point max 131 F 0 A at 30 C 86 F 0 A at 30 C 86 F 0 5 A at 30 C 86 F Continuous current per 1 0 A at55 C 131 F 4 0 A at 55 C 131 F 4 0 at 55 131 F 2 0 at 60 C 140 F 2 0 A at 60 C 140 F common max 2 0 A at 30 86 F 8 0Aat30 C 86 F 8 0 at 30 C 86 F Continuous current per 2 0 A at 55 C 131 F 4 0 A at 55 4 0 A at 55 C 131 F 4 0 A at 60 140 F 4 0 at 60 C 140 F module max 4 0 A at 30 86 F 8 0Aat30 C 8 0 A at 30 C 86 F Surge current max 5 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s fora duration of 25 ms 2 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s at 55 C 131 F
75. 65535 For User 10 91 Reserved 0 0 0 For User 10 92 Update Key 0 0 0 0 to 65535 93 Update Key 1 0 0 0 to 65535 94 Update Key 2 0 0 0 to 65535 95 Update Key 3 0 0 0 to 65535 96 Update Key 4 0 0 0 to 65535 97 Update Key 5 0 0 0 to 65535 98 Update Key 6 0 0 0 to 65535 99 Update Key 7 0 0 0 to 65535 Diagnostic File Number in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The diagnostic file number is used to store the diagnostics for the troubleshooting of DNP3 Secure Authentication subsystem The value of this parameter is N file only Valid range is 0 7 9 to 255 Default value is 0 See the table for the contents of the data file in the section Diagnostics Default Variation Config File Number This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 223 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 224 This file number is used to define default variations in a response to a Class 0 poll request The value of this parameter is N file only Valid range is 0 7 9 to 255 Default value is 0 In RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software when this parameter is configured properly you can see a DNP3 Default Variation Config File tree in Channel Configuration 15 E Project Help 8 Controller i Controller Prope
76. Cancel 8 The AB SNMP BOOTP Server Running dialog box may take several seconds or minutes to appear AB SNMP BOOTP Server Running fx Waiting for BOOTP request from hardware address 00008 394 83 Providing IP address 10 116 38 203 You may need to wait several seconds before you are returned to the AB SNMP DLL Enter IP Address dialog box Within several seconds the Device Identification box displays the processor s current revision information 172 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Appendix D 9 Click the OK button AB SNMP DLL Enter IP Address Enter the IP address of the target module name or dot notation 10 116 38 203 Device Identification Vendor Allen Bradley Product Name 1766 L32BWAA Series Revision 2 0 System Name MicroLogix 1400 Location Contact OK 10 Select the appropriate revision from the Firmware Revision dialog box and click the Next button Firmware Revision Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Humber Eurrert Revision 4 20 Con trol Select the new revision lor this update Revision Show All Restictions Current Folder c program lilesscontrolllash Ja lt Back Cancel Hep Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 173 Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade You
77. D D 00 10 9 0 80 0 2 g dG D G 8 0 OD D D u ET HE Radix Binar Sybod Oe Columns 16 Desc po Properties Usage Help In the same manner this 16 bit Analog Input Object File has bit 1 bit 0 of B36 0 B36 1 and B36 2 configured to 0 1 1 0 and 1 1 respectively The event for the index 0 of 16 bit Analog Input Object will be generated as a Class 1 event the event for the index 1 as a Class 2 event and the event for the index 2 as a Class 3 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F event if there are any changes for the points N14 0 N14 1 or N14 2 For any other 16 bit Analog Input points the events will not be generated Data File B36 bin 16bits Analog Input Config File ge eh 2919930 B36 0 0000n0n0a000000200001 B36 1 0000000000000010 36 2 1 36 3 36 4 0000n0n00000000000 0 36 5 auory 000 00 0 36 6 0 36 7 B36 8 0000n000000000000 B36 9 0000n00000000000 0 lal HE Rai E Swbd 0 coms 6 E eee Properties Usage Help Data File N14 dec 16bits Analog Input Object File iY Properties Usage Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P
78. DNP3 Appendix F Asan example a Binary Input Config File shown below has 10 elements B30 0 0 and B30 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 to 15 ofthe Binary Input Object File B30 1 0 and B30 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 16 to 31 of the Binary Input Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved Class Level of Index 0 to 15 is 1 B30 0 0 and B30 0 1 Class Level of Index 16 to 31 is 2 B30 1 0 and B30 1 1 Class Level of Index 32 to 47 is 3 B30 2 0 and B30 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 F4 Data File B30 bin Binary Input Config File E t o o Oo oo a o 0 D o O0 O o oM eC c GO oH cO c OO OU O O O O ooo O O c0 oF oe orm O O O O O oA So oc ae se eC Ej e e d UO 4L E Binar gt o REEKAE 8 1 1L 5 1 0 5 5 p Erooeites Usage Help DNP3 Binary Output Object The supported object group and
79. DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Counter Object File Numbers in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When only one Counter Object File is configured the Index number starts from 0 for the configured object One word is used for one Index of a 16 bit Counter Object and one double word is used for one Index of a 32 bit Counter Object If both the 16 bit Counter Object File Number and 32 bit Counter Object File Number were configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file the starting index number of 16 bit Counter Object is 0 and the starting index number of 32 bit Counter Object starts from the ending index number of the 16 bit Counter Object For example if 10 elements of a 16 bit Counter Object were configured and 10 elements of a 32 bit Counter Object were configured the index number will be as below 16 bit Counter Object From 0 to 9 e 32 bit Counter Object From 10 to 19 Let s suppose you configured both 16 bit and 32 bit Counter Object Files as below Data File N12 has 10 elements and L13 has 10 elements accordingly In total 20 Counter Object indexes are configured Index 0 of the Counter Object is N12 0 Index 1 is N 12 1 Index 10 15 L13 0 and Index 19 is 13 9 Data File N12 dec 1Gbits Counter Object File 10 Dosa Properiies Usage Hep Z zl L13 Properies
80. DNP3 over IP Enable is configured in the Channel 1 tab and other parameters are configured in the Chan 1 DNP3 tab DNP3 over IP Enable The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked Power cycle is required for changes to take effect When the selection is Disabled Unchecked DNP3 service over Ethernet is disabled after power cycle When the selection is Enabled Checked DNP3 service over Ethernet is enabled after power cycle Enable Master Address Validation The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests from any DNP3 Master Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 209 Appendix F 210 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests only from the DNP3 Master Node Address which is configured in the parameters Master Node0 on page 210 and Master Nodel Master Node2 Master Node3 Master Node4 on page 211 The maximum number of Master Node Address for the Master Address Validation is 5 Enable Self Address The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When this bit is Disabled Unchecked any packets which contain the destination address 65532 FFFCh
81. Deadband for point 2 Element 3 Deadband for point 3 Element 4 Deadband for point 4 Element 5 Deadband for point 5 For Analog Output type data you can configure the object flag information in the Configuration file The upper byte of the configuration file of these objects is used to configure the object flag Other bits are reserved Related Configuration File Numbers 16 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B 32 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B Short Floating Point Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B 240 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Analog Output Configuration Data File MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Bit Offset 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Element 0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F FO r r r r r r r r Element 1 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 H FO r r r r r r r r Element 2 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F FO r r r r r r r Element 3 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r r r r r r Element 4 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r r r r r r r Element 5 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F FO r r r r r r r r reserved F7 F0 Object Flags FLAG7 F Small BCD Configuration File Data LAG6 FLAGS LOCAL FORCED REMOTE FORCED COMM LOST RESTART ONLINE For Small BCD type data you can configure Class information in the Configuration file The lower 2 bits in each element ofthe Confi
82. E DNP3 DS Descriptor 4 DNP3 DS Descriptor 5 E ONP3 DS Descriptor 6 DNP3 DS Descriptor 7 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 8 For DNP3 DS Prototype X you can configure the MicroLogix 1400 to construct the Data Set Prototype objects DNP3 Data Set Prototype 0 5 Number of Prototype Elements o Prototype Element Configuration Index Descriptor DataType Code Max Data Length bytes Ancillary Value Lenath bytes Ancillary Value i 0 0 NONE NONE 0 2 NONE NONE 0 0 0 3 NONE NONE 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 NONE NONE 0 0 0 i NONE NONE 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 263 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 For DNP3 DS Descriptor X you can configure the MicroLogix 1400 to construct the Data Set Descriptor objects DNP3 Data Set Descriptor 0 General Number of Descriptor Elements o r Characteristics RD Point Address PIN e 0 Standard DNP3 Point NONE 0 0 ST LIES 1 Standard DNP3 Point NONE 0 0 2 Standard DNP3 Point NONE 0 0 Event Class a Standard DNP3 Point 0 0 Event Class po Trigger Event Disable Change of State Event PT Point Type Point Index FN File Number File Element FSE File Sub
83. Es Eg to E 0 44514 44515 13 12 11 10 9 8 Left side view Top view Description 1 Comm port 2 9 pin D Shell RS 232C connector 2 Memory module refer to MicroLogix 1400 Memory Module Installation Instructions publication 1766 INO10A for instructions on installing the memory module User 24V for 1766 BWA and 1766 BWAA only 3 4 Input terminal block 5 LCD Display Keypad ESC OK Up Down Left Right 6 Battery compartment 7 8 9 1 62 expansion bus connector Battery connector Output terminal block 10 LCD Display Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 1 Chapter 1 Description Hardware Overview 11 Indicator LED panel 12 Comm port 1 RJ45 connector 13 Comm port 0 8 pin mini DIN RS 232C RS 485 connector Controller Input and Output Description Catalog Number 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32AWA Description Input Power 100 240V AC 1766 L32BXB 24V DC User Power 24V DC None Embedded Discrete 1 0 12 Fast 24V DC Inputs 8 Normal 24V DC Inputs 12 Relay Outputs 20 120V AC Inputs 12 Relay Outputs 12 Fast 24V DC Inputs 8 Normal 24V DC Inputs 6 Relay Outputs 3 Fast DC Outputs 3 Normal DC Outputs Embedded Analog 1 0 None 1766 L32BWAA 1766 L32AWAA 100 240V AC 24V DC 12 Fast 24V DC I
84. Ethernet connection is intact throughout the upgrade process IMPORTANT If you are connecting to the controller through a hub you can use a standard Ethernet patch cable If you are connecting to the controller directly from your computer you need to use an Fthernet crossover cable Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 169 Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The Welcome to ControlFLASH dialog box is displayed Welcome to ControlFLASH Welcome to ControlFLASH the firmware update tool ControlFLASH needs the obige esie from you before it can in updating a device Control Catalog Number of the target device 2 The Network Configuration parameters optional 3 The Network Path to the target device 4 The Firmware Revision for this update ma ree 2 Click the Next button 3 Select the appropriate catalog number from the Catalog Number dialog box and click the Next button Catalog Number Enter the catalog number of the target device i 766LEC lt Back Cancel Hep 170 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Appendix D The AB SNMP DLL Enter IP Address dialog box is displayed AB SNMP DLL Enter IP Address Enter the address of the target module name or dot notation 10 116 38 203 Device dentification Get Info Cancel
85. FREEZE CLEAR No response message is returned when this request is issued from a DNP3 master FC COLD RESTART FC Byte 0 00 13 Cold Restart This function code forces the MicroLogix 1400 to perform a complete restart upon powering up Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F FC WARM RESTART FC Byte 0 0 14 Warm Restart This function code forces the MicroLogix 1400 to perform a partial reset This applies only to the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller FC INITIALIZE APPL FC Byte 0x10 16 Initialize Application This function code is used to initialize the user program which was downloaded by RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software FC START APPL FC Byte 0x11 17 Start Application This function code is used to start the user program which was downloaded by RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software FC STOP APPL FC Byte 0x12 18 Stop Application This function code is used to stop the user program which was downloaded by RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro FC ENABLE UNSOLICITED FC Byte 0x14 20 Enable Unsolicited Message This function is used to dynamically enable unsolicited messages generated in the MicroLogix 1400 FC DISABLE UNSOLICITED FC Byte 0x15 21 Disable Unsolicited Message This function is used to dynamically disable unsolicited messages generated in the MicroLogix 1400 FC_DELAY_MEASURE FC Byte 0x17
86. File to 9 N Data files 60 to 68 are reserved to store the structure of the Data Set Descriptors configuration lt Data Set Descriptors file N60 lt Data Set Descriptors file N61 lt Data Set Descriptors file N62 lt Data Set Descriptors file N63 Data Set Descriptors lt Data Set Descriptors file N64 Element Array N data file j amp Data Set Descriptors file N68 o un Once the Data Set Prototypes and Descriptors are configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration of RSLogix500 RSLogix Micro software you can see the DNP3 DS Prototype X and DNP3 DS Descriptor X trees under the Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Channel Configuration of RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software where X is the element numbers of each Prototype or Descriptor ML1400B_UM RSS 8 Project Help 3 Controller i Controller Properties Ly Processor Status tS Function Files AI 10 Configuration ps Channel Configuration he Channel Status B DNP3 DS Prototype 0 DNP3 DS Prototype 1 E DNP3 DS Prototype 2 DNP3 DS Prototype 3 DNP3 DS Prototype 4 E DNP3 DS Prototype 5 DNP3 DS Prototype 6 DNP3 DS Prototype 7 DNP3 DS Prototype 8 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 0 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 1 DNP3 DS Descriptor 2 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 3
87. Help This section covers DNP3 Slave Application Layer Function Codes and Internal Indications For details of Packet Formats for the request and response refer to the DNP3 Protocol specifications Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Function Codes FC CONFIRM FC Byte 0x00 00 Confirm A DNP3 master sends a message with this function code to confirm receipt ofa response fragment In a general environment the MicroLogix 1400 receives a response with this function code But the MicroLogix 1400 may generate a response with this function code when a DNP3 Master sends a request with the CON bit set in the application control header FC READ FC Byte 0x01 01 Read The READ function code is used by a DNP3 master to request data from the MicroLogix 1400 FC WhITE FC Byte 0x02 02 Write The WRITE function code is used to write the contents of DNP3 objects from the DNP3 master to the MicroLogix 1400 This function code is used for clearing bit IIN1 7 DEVICE RESTART setting time in the MicroLogix 1400 and downloading user programs to the MicroLogix 1400 controller FC SELECT FC Byte 0x03 03 Select The SELECT function code is used in conjunction with the OPERATE function code as part of select before operate method for issuing control requests This procedure is used for controlling binary output CROB or analog o
88. IEC 950 EN 60950 s MCR 24V DC Lo Hi 7 VO Line Terminals Connect to terminals of Power Supply 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32AWAA 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32BWAA Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Circuits Line Terminals Connect to 24V DC terminals of Power Supply 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BXBA 44564 15 Chapter2 Install Your Controller Schematic Using ANSI CSA Symbols L1 12 230V 4 Disconnect Fuse MCR 230V AC M Output Circuits Operation of either of these contacts willl ransformer remove power from Mi external 1 0 Master Control Relay 1 LNA yo circuits stopping machine motion Cat 700 PK400A1 30V AC Emergency Stop Suppressor Fuse Push Button Gveritavel Stop Start Cat No 700 N24 ak Limit Switch Js o50 31 lis T Suppr MCR e MCR 115 230080 e o 1 0 Circuits DC Power Supply Use NEC Class 2 for UL Listing MCR Lo Hi 24 V DC 1 0 Line Terminals Connect to terminals of Power 1 du Supply 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32AWAA 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32BWAA Line Terminals Connect to 24V DC terminals of Power Supply 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BXBA 44565 Installing a Memory 1 Remove the memory module port cover Module 44534 16 Rockwe
89. If the error occurs again cycle power and restart the firmware upgrade process Failed to Receive Initial TFTP Request from Target 9 Faled to recotve riia TFTP requost from target Modulo need to be reset I this problem persists may moan thot router geteray betvoen the PC and Langet is not passing the request throug A Update Failed reset module This error message is displayed when the initial TFTP request is not received 180 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Appendix D To clear this error 1 Connect the controller s Ethernet port directly to the computer s Ethernet port using a crossover cable or disable or uninstall any firewall VPN or virus protection software running on the computer 2 Cycle power to the processor 3 Restart the firmware upgrade procedure as described in the section Using ControlFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 169 Communication error during TFTP transfer AB SNMP DI I ui Communications error during TFTP transfer OK This error message is displayed when there is a communication error during TFTP transfer To clear this error 1 Check your Ethernet connections are intact 2 Cycle power to the processor 3 Restart the firmware upgrade procedure as described in the section Using ControlFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 169 4 If the error still persists connect the contr
90. Length 8 bytes 4 words including format code 2 CS0 2 CS2 2 Format Code Always 0 3 CS0 3 CS2 3 Communications Configuration Error Code 4 CS0 4 CS2 4 bit 15 Reserved Always 0 bit 14 Modem Lost Bit bits 5 13 Reserved Always 0 bit 4 Communications Active Bit bit 3 Selection Status Bit bit 2 Outgoing Message Command Pending bit 1 Incoming Message Reply Pending bit 0 Incoming Command Pending 5 50 5 CS2 5 bits 8 15 Baud Rate that the selected link layer driver is operating at out communication channel bits 0 7 Node Address 6 CS0 6 CS2 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier 7 CS0 7 CS2 7 Length 8 CS0 8 CS2 8 Format Code 9 50 9 CS2 9 bits 4 15 Reserved modem control line states Always 0 bit 3 Data Carrier Detect bit 2 Reserved modem control line state Always 0 bit 1 Request To Send bit 0 Clear To Send 0 CS0 10 CS2 10 Total Packets Sent 1 CS0 11 CS2 11 Total Packets Received for this node 12 CS0 12 52 12 Total Packets Observed 13 CS0 13 52 13 Undelivered Message Packets 14 CS0 14 52 14 Message Packets Retried 15 CS0 15 CS2 15 NAK Packets Received 16 CS0 16 CS2 16 Link Layer Error Count 296 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Communication Status File Words Words Offse
91. Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 User Display b dvanced Set RU Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 61 Chapter4 Communication Connections 2 Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed QJ key 000000 bKeyIn Hode Cfg ENET Cfg RU Select DCOMM Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK 000006 KeyIn KDICOHM Cfg ENET Cfg HU The DCOMM Configuration screen is displayed In this example the current status is Disable The DCOMM status indicator which is the fourth of the six indicators at the top left of the LED display is displayed as an empty rectangle It means that the communication configuration is set to a user defined communication mode at present Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Communication Connections Chapter 4 5 Use the up arrow to change the indicator position so that it is pointing to Enable Press the OK key to change to the default communication mode bEnable Disable RU The DCOMM Mode Change Notification screen is displayed It indicates that the communication configuration is changed to the default communication mode The DCOMM status indicator is displayed in solid rectangle DFi default
92. MicroLogix 1400 is connected to an RS 485 network and a 1763 NCO cable is used you must select No Handshaking 485 Network If you want to send an ASCII string via a serial channel which is configured to DNP3 Slave protocol use AWA and AWT instructions to control the Modem For Cabling and Connections see Communication Connections on page 59 For AWA and AWT instructions refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual 1766 RM001 Hequest LL Confirmation Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F When the selection is Disabled Unchecked Primary Frames from the MicroLogix 1400 are sent out with the function code FC UNCONFIRMED USER DATA 4 When the selection is Enabled Checked Primary Frames from the MicroLogix 1400 are sent out with the function code FC CONFIRMED USER DATA 3 In this case the MicroLogix 1400 waits for the confirmation and may retry the Frame if it did not receive the confirmation from DNP3 Master within the time Confirmation Timeout x1 ms Send LL Confirmation Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the optional Secondary Frame is not sent out with the function code
93. No Object function code only 13 cold restart No Object function code only 23 delay meas Implementation Table for Series B controllers Qualifier Codes hex 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Function Codes dec 129 response 129 response Qualifier Codes hex 00 start stop 00 start stop 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop DNP Object Group amp Variation Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Group Var Num Description Function Codes Num dec 0 211 239 Device Attribute 1 read 241 243 248 250 252 0 240 Device Attribute 1 read 245 247 2 write 0 254 Device Attribute Non specific 1 read all attributes request Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 06 no range or all 319 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes hex Function Codes Qualifier Codes Num d
94. OK key on the LCD keypad EHET Setup Master Password Ifthe Master password is incorrect an error message will be displayed 000008 EHET Setup Password Wrong MEN Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 7 If the password is correct the Ethernet network type screen is displayed as below Press Up or Down key to select the appropriate Ethernet mode 000000 ETH bootp Press U D key If you press the OK key at the static mode the IP address flashes 000000 ENET Made stati IP address 192 168 198 201 After configuring the IP address press OK key The Subnet Mask screen is displayed 000000 HEHUTE ENET Made stati Subnet Mask 255 255 255 After configuring the Subnet Mask press the OK key The Gateway address is displayed oo 000000 EHET stati Gateway address 192 168 188 981 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 99 Chapterb Using the LCD 10 After configuring the Gateway address press the OK key The Primary DNS is displayed 000000 ENET stati Pri DNS 198 18H 1080 BUT 11 After configuring the Primary DNS press the OK key The Secondary DNS is displayed 000000 ENET Mode stati Sec ONS
95. Operating humidity 5 95 non condensing Operating altitude 2000 m 6561 ft Vibration Operating 10 500 Hz 5 g 0 030 in max peak to peak Shock Operating 30 g Module power LED On indicates power is applied Recommended cable Belden 8761 shielded For 1762 IT4 Shielded thermocouple extension wire for the specific type of thermocouple you are using Follow thermocouple manufacturer s recommendations Agency certification C UL certified under CSA C22 2 No 142 L 508 listed CE compliant for all applicable directives C Tick marked for all applicable acts 1762 IR4 and 1762 IT4 cc Hazardous environment class Noise immunity Class Division 2 Hazardous Location Groups A B C D UL 1604 C UL under CSA C22 2 No 213 NEMA standard ICS 2 230 Radiated and conducted emissions EN50081 2 Class A Electrical EMC The module has passed testing at the following levels ESD immunity 4 kV contact 8 kV air 4 kV indirect IEC1000 4 2 Radiated RF immunity 10 V m 80 1000 MHz 80 amplitude modulation 900 MHz keyed carrier IEC1000 4 3 EFT B immunity 2 kV 5 kHz IEC1000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV galvanic gun IEC1000 4 5 Conducted immunity 10V 0 15 80 MHz 2 3 IEC1000 4 6 1 Refer to the module s Installation Instruction for exact operating temperature range 2 Conducted Immunity frequency range may be 150 k
96. Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Install Your Controller Chapter 2 closed 59 Panel Mounting Mount to panel using 8 or 4 screws To install your controller using mounting screws 1 Remove the mounting template from inside the back cover of the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions publication 1766 IN001 2 Secure the template to the mounting surface Make sure your controller is spaced properly See Controller and Expansion I O Spacing on page 20 Drill holes through the template Remove the mounting template Mount the controller Nn B o Leave the protective debris shield in place until you are finished wiring the controller and any other devices Ok H X M J E xe GM 44521 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 23 Chapter2 Install Your Controller 1762 Expansion 1 0 Dimensions Dimension Measurement 90 mm 3 5 in 40 mm 1 57 in 87 mm 3 43 in Mounting 1762 Expansion 1 0 A ATTENTION During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris such as metal chips and wire stands
97. Reques 8 0x08 FC IMMED FREEZE NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 9 0x09 FC FREEZE CLEAR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 10 0x0A FC FREEZE CLEAR NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 11 Ox0B FC FREEZE AT TIME No Reques 12 Ox0C FC FREEZE AT TIME NR No Reques 13 0x0D FC COLD RESTART Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses MicroLogix 1400 should not be in the executing mode and any program and files should not be in open state Reques 14 OxOE FC WARM RESTART No Reques 15 OxOF FC INITIALIZE DATA No Obsolete Reques 16 0x10 FC_INITIALIZE_APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Clears fault and changes the controller mode to Remote Program See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 294 Request 17 0x11 FC_START_APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Clears fault and changes the controller mode to Remote Run See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 294 Request 18 0x12 FC_STOP_APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Changes the controller mode to Remote Program See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 294 Request 19 0x13 FC_SAVE_CONFIG No Deprecated Request 20 0x14 FC_ENABLE_UNSOLICITED Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses 312 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series A Controllers MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F
98. Slave Application Layer Configuration Parameters Channel for Unsolicited Response Only channels already configured for DNP3 protocol appear in the Channel for Unsolicited Response dropdown menu Any and all Unsolicited Responses are transmitted via this selected channel Channel 1 is only supported in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Valid selections are enabled checked and disabled unchecked with disabled as default value Restore Events After Power Cycle When the selection is disabled unchecked DNP3 events which are generated before a power cycle are flushed after a power cycle When the option is enabled checked all DNP3 events are restored after a power cycle Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 will not send any enabled Unsolicited Responses after a restart until it has received a FC_ENABLE_UNSOLICITED 20 command from the DNP3 Master When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 will send any enabled Unsolicited Responses after a restart to the DNP3 Master unconditionally Enable Unsolicited For Classi Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked Unsolicited Response is disabled for Class 1 events To prevent overflowing
99. Type in the IP address for the processor IMPORTANT Use the IP address that was configured earlier or use an available IP address assigned to by your network administrator 5 Click the Get Info button If the IP address was previously configured and the necessary information about the controller is obtained go to step 9 6 The AB SNMP BOOTP Server dialog box is displayed indicating that this IP address has not been configured into the processor AB SNMP BOOTP Server Could not find the host on the network This machine will now attempt to act as a BOOTP server for this IP address Enter the hardware address of the module below or cancel to re enter the IP address Help 7 Enter the hardware address of the controller that is being upgraded as noted in step 2 of Prepare the Controller for Firmware Upgrade on page 168 and click the OK button Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 171 Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System For the IP address to be configured using the ControlFLASH BOOTP server the BOOTP settings should be enabled in the controller see step 2 of Prepare the Controller for Firmware Upgrade on page 168 AB SNMP BOOTP Server Could not find the host on the network This machine will now attempt to act as a BOOTP server for this IP address Enter the hardware address of the module below or cancel to re enter the IP address 00008 394 9
100. UINT 4 2 Max transmit fragment size 2048 27 2048 When this value is written to the controller the communication configuration file is changed to this value 241 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max receive fragment size 2048 242 Read Only VSTR length of the length of the Device manufacturer s This variation returns firmware FRN FRN string value string value software version 1 00 Supported ranges FRN FRN x yyy FRN xx yy or FRN where x xx is 0 99 and yy 00 999 For example FRN 1 00 FRN 1 05 FRN 12 05 FRN 102 27 or FRN 103 117 243 Read Only VSTR length of the length of the Device manufacturer s This variation returns This variation returns string value string value hardware version hardware series hardware series and revision of the revision of the controller HW SER controller HW SER A REV 01 A REV 03 Supported ranges HW SER x REV yy where xis A F and yy is 00 31 For example HW SER A REV 01 HW SER B REV 03 or HW SER C REV 31 244 Reserved for future assignment 245 Read VSTR length of the length of the User assigned location name Non NULL terminated Write string value string value max 255 max 255 bytes bytes 276 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Object Group 0 Variations fo
101. Usage Hep As an example a Counter Config File is shown below These files have 10 elements for each B32 0 0 and B32 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 249 Appendix F 250 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 of the 16 bits Counter Object File B32 1 0 and B32 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 1 of the Counter Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved So in the example below for 16 bit Counter Config File Class Level of Index 0 is 1 B32 0 0 and B32 0 1 Class Level of Index 1 is 2 B32 1 0 and B32 1 1 Class Level of Index 2 is 3 B32 2 0 and B32 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B32 bin De B32 i e D D D D 15 14 1 B gt rf fF oc 1 6bits Counter Config File D D D D D OD OD 12 11 10 Gas oom DoD D D D O DoD II gt rr 822 0 0 Radix Binary Symbol Caurs 15 Prepertes ue tee For a 32 bit Counter Config File Class Level of Index 10 is 1 B33 0 0 and B33 0 1 Clas
102. Your Controller Chapter 2 is intended for use in clean dry environments Pollution degree 20 and to circuits not exceeding Over Voltage Category IEC 60664 1 ATTENTION Do not remove the protective debris shield until after the controller and all other equipment in the panel near the controller are mounted and wiring is complete Once wiring is complete remove protective debris shield Failure to remove shield before operating can cause overheating debris strip ATTENTION Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices inside the controller Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas TIP For environments with greater vibration and shock concerns use the panel mounting method described on page 23 rather than DIN rail mounting 1 Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where normally only non conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected 7 Over Vo tage Category Il is the load level section of the electrical distribution system At this level transient voltages are controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the product s insulation Pollution Degree 2 and Over Voltage Category are International Electrotechnical Commission IEC designations Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 21 Chapter 2 22 Install Your Controller DIN Rail Mounting Th
103. an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding WARNING The local programming terminal port is intended for temporary use only and must not be connected or disconnected unless the area is free of ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 35 Chapter3 Wire Your Controller Sinking and Sourcing Any of the MicroLogix 1400 DC embedded input groups can be configured as e sinking or sourcing depending on how the DC COM is wired on the group Wiring Diagrams 8 SINON EUR Type Definition Sinking Input The input energizes when high level voltage is applied to the input terminal active high Connect the power supply VDC to the input group s COM terminal Sourcing Input The input energizes when low level voltage is applied to the input terminal active low Connect the power supply VDC 4 to the input groups COM terminal ATTENTION The 24V DC sensor power source must not be used to power output circuits It should only be used to power input devices for example sensors switches See Master Control Relay on page 13 for information on MCR wiring in output circuits 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BWAA 1766 L32AWAA 1766 L32BXBA Wiring Diagrams TIP In the following diagrams lower case alphabetic subscripts are appended to common terminal connections
104. and 20V DC ime is equal to the module scan time which is based on the number of enabled ency of each channel and whether cyclic calibration is enabled is limited due to input impedance 145 AppendixA 1762 IT4 Accuracy fications 1762 IT4 Repeatability at 25 C 77 F 2 Input Type Repeatability for 10 Hz Filter Thermocouple J 0 1 C 40 18 F Thermocouple 110 1300 C 166 2372 F 0 1 C 0 18 F Thermocouple 210 110 C 346 166 F 0 25 C 0 45 F Thermocouple T 170 400 C 274 752 F 0 1 C 0 18 F Thermocouple T 270 170 C 454 274 F 15 C 22 7 F Thermocouple 270 1370 C 454 F 2498 F 0 1 C 40 18 F Thermocouple 270 170 C 454 274 F 2 0 C 43 6 F Thermocouple E 220 1000 C 364 1832 F 0 1 C 40 18 F Thermocouple E 270 220 C 454 364 F 1 0 C 41 8 F Thermocouples and 0 4 C 40 72 F Thermocouple C 0 2 C 40 36 F Thermocouple B 0 7 C 1 26 F 50 mV 6 uV 100 mV 6 uV 1 Repeatability is the ability of the input module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the same input signal 2 Repeatability at any other temperature in the 0 60 C 32 140 F range is the same as long as the temperature is stable
105. because if the or PWM instructions were deleted during runtime online edit outputs could stop in an unpredictable state causing unexpected equipment operation If you attempt to insert or modify a rung with MSG PTO and PWM instruction the following error message will be generated by programming software Error Online editing of PTO PWM and MSG are not allowed on ML1400 RUN mode And the rung with MSG PTO and PWM instruction will not be accepted RSLogix 500 Pro AN Rung Has Errors Cannot Accept Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 123 Chapter7 Online Editing In online edit during PROGRAM mode program online edit there are no restrictions For example a user can insert MSG instruction if related MG file or MG RI file is already defined in data file ATTENTION When editing a rung that contains an MCR instruction both the MCR start and MCR end rungs must be edited whether it be test assemble cancel at the same time We recommend that you fully understand the possible results of the edit to the system under control Failure to properly edit a running program could result in unexpected controller operation Physical injury or equipment damage may result ATTENTION If you use Ell or STI interrupts and your application requires a quick interrupt latency the online edit feature is not recommended Online editing feature may increase the interrupt latency response time To
106. bit with time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 5 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 7 28 index Single prec flt pt without 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time 32 7 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 7 28 index Single prec flt pt with 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 317 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Codes Qualifier Codes Num dec hex dec hex 40 0 Analog Output Status 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 40 1 Analog Output Status 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 32 bit with flag 40 2 Analog Output Status 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 00 01 start stop 16 bit with flag 40 3 Analog Output Status 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop Single prec flt pt with flag 41 1 Analog Output 32 bit 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack
107. controller is powered up The following LCD screen appears if it s successfully done 000000 PRO CPU Booted PROG Hode Norte that I O output status may be changed for some programs While the controller is powered on follow these steps to change the position of the Mode Switch 1 On the Main Menu screen select Mode Switch by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad 000000 10 Status Monitoring Switch RU 88 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Mode Switch screen is displayed as shown below 000000 I O Status Manitaring Hode Switch The arrow indicates current Mode Switch position RU 3 When the Up or Down key is pressed the mode indicated by the arrow starts to blink if the mode is different from the current mode of controller Press OK key to set the controller to the mode indicated by the arrow 4 Ifyou have finished changing mode switch position press the ESC key to return to the Main Menu screen as shown in step 1 Using a User Defined LCD The MicroLogix 1400 controller allows you to use user defined LCD screens Screen instead of the default built in screens To use a user defined screen you need to create a group of appropriate instructions using the LCD instruction in your application program For more information on how to create a user define
108. controllers 33 terminal groupings 36 throughput 585 time synchronization 316 trim pot information function file 134 trim pot operation 153 trim pots 133 changing values 134 configuring in LCD function file 135 error conditions 135 location 133 using 133 troubleshooting 185 true 585 TUF 97 U unsupported connections 4 64 upload 385 user defined LCD screen 117 using communications toggle functionality 60 using communications toggle push button 60 using emergency stop switches 14 using memory modules 147 using real time clock 147 using the battery 17 using trim pots 133 V viewing fault code 137 viewing system information 136 W wiring analog channels 39 392 wiring diagram 1762 1A8 42 1762 IF20F2 differential sensor 53 1762 IF20F2 single ended sensor 54 1762 1016 43 1762 10327 44 1762 108 43 1762 1080W6 50 1762 048 44 1762 0B16 45 1762 0B32T 46 1762 0B8 45 1762 0V32T 47 1762 0W16 48 1762 0W8 47 1762 0X6l 49 1766 L32AWA input 36 1766 L32AWA output 38 1766 L32BWA output 38 1766 L32BWA sinking 37 1766 L32BWA sourcing 37 1766 L32BXB output 38 1766 L32BXB sinking 37 1766 L32BXB sourcing 38 terminal block layouts 33 53 55 wiring diagrams 32 wiring recommendation 27 wiring with spade lugs 28 wiring without spade lugs 28 wiring your controller 27 working voltage 161 workspace 386 write 386 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Rockwell Au
109. conventions used in this manual Rockwell Automation support Use this manual if you are responsible for designing installing programming or troubleshooting control systems that use MicroLogix 1400 controllers You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic If you do not obtain the proper training before using this product This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1400 controllers and expansion I O It describes the procedures you use to install wire and troubleshoot your controller This manual explains how to install and wire your controllers gives you an overview of the MicroLogix 1400 controller system Refer to publication 1766 RM001 MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual for the MicroLogix 1400 instruction set and for application examples to show the instruction set in use Refer to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software user documentation for more information on programming your MicroLogix 1400 controller Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 xv Preface Related Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning Rockwell Automation products To obtain a copy contact your local Rockwell Automation office or distributor Resource MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual 1766 001 Description In formation on
110. destination node The MSG Connection Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range from 250 to 65 500 MSG Reply The amount of time in ms that the MicroLogix 1400 will wait for a reply to a command that ithas 3 000 ms read write Timeou initiated via a MSG instruction The MSG Reply Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range from 250 65 500 Inactivity The amount of time in minutes that a MSG connection may remain inactive before it is terminated 30 minutes read write Timeou The Inactivity Timeout has a 1 minute resolution and a range from 1 65 500 minutes Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 335 Appendix Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Default Status Contact The Contact string which is specified by the SNMP client The maximum length is 63 characters read only Location The Location string which is specified by the SNMP client The maximum length is 63 characters read only Network Link ID The Link ID assigned to the MicroLogix 1400 by either an RSLinx OPC topic or by the routing table in 0 read write a 1756 DHRIO or 1756 DH485 module The range is 0 199 Starting Data The first ASCII A file number in a contiguous block of 4 32 ASCII files 4 per User Provided Web 0 read write File Number Page The range is 9 252 or 0 for disable Number of Pages The number of User Provided Web Pages provided th
111. diagnostics are performed at both levels of operation Both module hardware and channel configuration error conditions are reported to the controller Channel over range or under range conditions are reported in the module s input data table Module hardware errors are reported in the controller s I O status file Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 for more information When a fault condition is detected the analog outputs are reset to zero Power up Diagnostics At module power up a series of internal diagnostic tests are performed Module Status LED State Table If module status Indicated Corrective action LED is condition On Proper Operation No action required Off Module Fault Cycle power If condition persists replace the module Call your local distributor or Allen Bradley for assistance Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Module Error Table Troubleshooting Your System Appendix C Critical and Non Critical Errors Non critical module errors are recoverable Channel errors over range under range errors are non critical Non critical error conditions are indicated in the module input data table Non critical configuration errors are indicated by the extended error code See Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF2OF2 on page 164 Critical module errors are conditions that prevent normal or recoverable oper
112. directly without using an external optical isolator such as Advanced Interface 64 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Communication Connections Chapter 4 Converter catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown in the illustration below because Channel 0 is isolated within the controller MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 T JB Computer i i Personal 1761 CBL APOO or 1761 CBL PM02 1 Tum fer p 44593 1 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications Using a Modem You can use modems to connect a personal computer to one MicroLogix 1400 controller using DF1 Full Duplex protocol to multiple controllers using DF1 Half Duplex protocol or Modbus RTU Slave protocol via Channel 0 as shown in the following illustration See Appendix E for information on types of modems you can use with the micro controllers IMPORTANT Do not attempt to use DH 485 protocol through modems under any circumstance The communication timing using DH 485 protocol is not supported by modem communications Personal Computer Modem Cable mi straight through EV Zon MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 Protocol Options Full Duplex protocol to 1 controller DF1 Half
113. displayed as decimal hexadecimal or binary for each word element depending on what each elements means DnpBBBBOBBOBBEOE rithmetic flags For more information see the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 Using the Mode Switch The MicroLogix 1400 provides the controller mode switch on the LCD The possible positions of the mode switch are PROGRAM REMOTE and RUN You can change mode switch position using the Mode Switch screen on the LCD as shown below In this example the mode switch position is set to REMOTE 000006 Program Remote Run All the built in LCD screens except the Boot Message screen display the current mode switch position at their top right portion as shown below In this example the mode switch position is set to RUN Current Mode Switch Position 000000 HU I BBOOOOOOO00000 0100000 6143456789012 456789 86 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 Controller Modes The table below shows the possible controller modes when the mode switch positions at PROGRAM REMOTE or RUN For example if the Mode Switch is at RUN and you want to test a control program with running it for a single scan you have to first change mode switch position to REMOTE before you run the control program in the remote test single scan mode with your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro pro
114. edi 3 If Integer is selected as shown in step 2 press the OK key If not selected press the Down key to select it and then press the OK key 76 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 4 The current data value ON of the N7 0 word is displayed Note that the target word 0 which is right next to N7 5 is flashing which means the cursor is at the target word position B UnProtected 5 We will change the data value of the N7 0 word to the negative decimal value 1300 First press OK to move the cursor to the data value position Then the last digit of 00000 will be flashing which means the cursor is at the data value position 6 Press the Left key twice Then the cursor will position at the third digit Press the Up key three times to change the third digit to 3 B UnProtected 7 Press the Left key once Then press the Up key once The second digit will change to 1 Note that 1 is still flashing which means the cursor is still at the data value position B 01 300 UnProtected Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 71 Chapter5 Using the LCD 8 Press the Left key once Then press the Down key once The sign digit will change to as shown below Note that is still flashing
115. eed 254 Function Odes s du e 254 Internal Indications 46v emca do ccc qeo 259 DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data Files 260 DIN PS Fee a ote ev E rss asd eq es de AU IIS 264 DNP 3 Configuration c5 265 DNP3 Binary Input Object esse ceo e temere tror een 269 DNP3 Binary Output OBIect ciues varie cca tpe e ER ewe 271 DNP3 Double Bit Binary Input 274 DNDS Counter CBIeGE 276 DNP3 Frozen Counter Object asy ueste ede da ade ne Re eaten 279 DNP3 Analog 281 DNP3 Analog Output Object cese he te sedato e petto 285 BED ERR as 287 DNP3 Data Set Objects ey veka e ee qu Vend 289 Object Quality Flags iiis cs eis eo e um e one e eg s 299 DINE Device Attribute OBIEGtses eset eh p Re E ha hens 303 Event Reporting dete c Nu read dao i ett 307 Generating Events sso ouod scat osea Odi eed ET EE red 307 Control Generating Event ed neus avrete EE ets e t dapi 311 Reporting Event Polled Response 312 Reporting Event By Unsolicited Response 313 Collision ced 315 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN E 2014 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface System Loading and Heat Dissipation Table of Contents Time Synchronization 316 Download
116. ensure minimum interrupt latency place the mode switch in LCD screen in the RUN mode This prevents the use of the online editing feature Types of Online Editing The type of online editing is dependent on the MicroLogix 1400 processor s mode switch position in LCD display and the processors mode There are two types of online editing Program Online Editing when the processor is in either PROG mode or REM Program mode Runtime Online Editing when the processor is in either REM Test or REM Run mode The following table summarizes the MicroLogix 1400 processor mode switch positions in LCD and modes that enable online editing mode switch Position MicroLogix 1400 Editing Mode Processor Mode RUN RUN Not Available PROGram Program Program Online Editing REMote REMote Program Program Online Editing REMote REMote Test Runtime Online Editing REMote REMote Run Runtime Online Editing IMPORTANT Online editing is not available when the mode switch in LCD screen 124 is in the RUN position Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Online Editing Chapter 7 ATTENTION Use the online editing function while in the RUN A mode to make minor changes to the ladder program We recommend developing your program offline since ladder rung logic changes take effect immediately after testing your edits Improper machine operation may occur causing personnel injury or equipment damage Edit Function
117. every 15 minutes Related Configuration File Number 16 bit Counter Config File Number 32 bit Counter Config File Number 16 bit Frozen Counter Config File Number 32 bit Frozen Counter Config File Number 16 bit Analog Input Config File Number 32 bit Analog Input Config File Number Short Floating Point Analog Input Config File Number Class and Object Configuration for Other Input Data Type Bit Offset 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Element 0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F FO r r DCE TE r r CO Element 1 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r DCE TE r r CO Element 2 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r DCE TE r r C0 Element 3 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F FO r r DCE TE r r C co Element 4 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r DCE TE r r co Element 5 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 Fi FO r r DCE TE r r C CO reserved 1 0 Class level 0 to TE Trigger Event for the point In Series B DCE Disable Change of state Event for the point In Series B For other Inputs Element 0 for data index 0 F7 F0 Object Flags FLAG7 FLAG6 FLAG5 LOCAL_FORCED REMOTE_FORCED COMM_LOST RESTART ONLINE For Counter type data you can configure Threshold information in the Configuration file Each element can be configured to the threshold value for each point A counter event is generated if the absolute value of the difference between the present value of a counter point and the value that was mo
118. from the controller and software Communication Options The MicroLogix 1400 controllers provide three communications ports an isolated combination RS 232 485 communication port Channel 0 an Ethernet port Channel 1 and a non isolated RS 232 communication port Channel 2 The Channel 0 and Channel 2 ports on the MicroLogix 1400 can be connected to the following operator interfaces personal computers etc using DF1 Full Duplex point to point aDH 485 network e aDFI Radio Modem network e aDFI half duplex network as an RTU Master RTU Slave aModbus network as an RTU Master or RTU Slave an ASCII network aDeviceNet network as a slave or peer using a DeviceNet Interface catalog number 1761 NET DNI an Ethernet network using the Ethernet Interface module catalog number 1761 NET ENL or 1761 NET ENIW e aDNP3 network as a Slave When connecting to RS 485 network using DH 485 DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave Modbus RTU Master Slave or DNP3 Slave protocols the MicroLogix 1400 can be connected directly via Channel 0 without an Advanced Interface Converter catalog number 1761 NET AIC The Channel 0 combo port provides both RS 232 and RS 485 isolated connections The appropriate electrical interface is selected through your choice of communication cable The existing MicroLogix 1761 communication cables provide an interface to the RS 232 drivers The 1763 NC01 cable provides an interface to the RS 485 drivers Th
119. hrs Default value is 1800 30 mins When DNP3 Master does not change the Session Key within this time configured the MicroLogix 1400 invalidate the Session Key and its state for each user Expected Session Key Change Count in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This parameter is used for configuring the expected session key change count The valid range is 1 to 10000 Default value is 2000 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Reply Timeout x100 ms in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This parameter is used for configuring the reply timeout in 100 msec The valid range is 0 1200 120 s Default value is 20 2 s Maximum Error Count in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This parameter is used for configuring the maximum error count The valid range is 0 10 Default value is 2 HMAC Algorithm in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This parameter is used for configuring the HMAC Algorithm e HMAC SHA 1 truncated to 4 octets serial e 2 HMAC SHA I truncated to 10 octets networked e 3 HMAC SHA 256 truncated to 8 octets serial 4 HMAC SHA 256 truncated to 16 octets networked The vali
120. initiated The valid range is 0 to 6013 Default value is 10 Hold Time after Class2 Events x1 s This parameter is only for Unsolicited Response The MicroLogix 1400 holds the events during Hold Time after Class2 Events x1 s before initiating an Unsolicited Response The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 5 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F The value of 0 indicates that responses are not delayed due to this parameter Note that parameters Number of Class2 Events and Hold Time after Class2 Events x1 s are used together so that if either one of the criteria are met an Unsolicited Response is transmitted Number of Class3 Events If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured not to initiate Unsolicited Response this parameter used to limit the maximum number of events which is generated and logged into the event buffer for Class 3 events In this case value 0 will disable to generate the event If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured to generate Unsolicited Response and the number of queued Class 3 events is reached to this value Unsolicited Response is initiated The valid range is 0 to 6013 Default value is 10 Hold Time after Class3 Events x1 s This parameter is only for Unsolicited Response The MicroLogix 1400 holds the events during Hold Time after Class3 Events x1 s before initiating an Unsolicited Response The vali
121. menu in your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software point EEPROM and then click Store to EEPROM TIP With MicroLogix 1400 you can also use the LCD and the LCD buttons on the module to transfer applications to or from the controller For more information on program data upload refer to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software documentation Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Chapter Online Editing Directions and Cautions for Download is Required Before Starting Online Editing MicroLogix 1400 Online Editin g User At least one download is required before you can start online editing If you are using a MicroLogix 1400 from out of box state or after clearing processor memory or a firmware upgrade at least one download is required before starting online edits If not an error occurs and programming software will go offline due to a default image mismatch between programming software RSLogix500 and the MicroLogix 1400 You can also see the fault code 1Fh which is a user defined fault code In order to prevent this error you need to download the program to the MicroLogix 1400 although the program is empty This problem happens only in out of box state or after clear processor memory RSLogix 500 Pro Program could not be compiled Online Edit Error Going Offline ATTENTION PTO and PWM instructions may not be deleted during runtime online edit This is
122. mode via DNP3 network To change the controller mode use the function codes FC_INITIALIZE_APPL 16 FC START APPL 17 and FC STOP APPL 18 If the qualifier code is 5 the Application Identifier Object should be used The Application Identifier is a string which cannot exceed 10 bytes The string of Application Identifier is taken from the name in the Properties of the ladder file Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F 2 RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro In this example the Application Identifier is DNP3 TASK UNTITLED lolx 2 DNP3_TASK Project a Program File Properties 5 28 Help S Controler General i Controller Properties A o Processor Status Ts lt Function Files M 10 Configuration 9 E Channel Configuration 5 08 Program Files B syso B syst Type Ladder Mf LAD 2 DNP3_TASK 5 8 Data Files B Cross Reference D 00 OUTPUT File Number 2 Description D n D s2 status B3 BINARY Alimentos Debug D 4 Iv Allow Online Edits View Disable c5 COUNTER om If the qualifier code is 06h the MicroLogix 1400 controller does not check the string of the Application Identifier Initialize User Program If MicroLogix 1400 receives the function code FC_INITIALIZE_APPL 16 with the object Application Identifier g90v1
123. object 276 device attribute object 303 diagnostics 326 double bit binary input object 274 frozen counter object 279 objects 260 slave application layer 254 slave application layer configuration parameters 241 double integer file monitoring 107 download 378 download a user program via DNP3 network 317 DTE Data Terminal Equipment 378 duplicate IP address detection 361 E Electronics Industries Association EIA 211 EMC Directive 7 8 EMI 379 encoder 379 error recovery model 188 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 errors configuration 192 critical 191 extended error information field 192 hardware 192 module error field 192 non critical 191 Ethernet advanced functions 368 messaging 356 processor performance 356 using the SLC 5 05 processors 355 Ethernet communication 355 Ethernet connections 360 Ethernet network configuration 122 Ethernet protocol setup 130 European Union Directive compliance 7 EMC Directive 7 low voltage directive 8 event generation control 311 executing mode 379 expansion 1 0 1762 IF20F2 input type selection 50 1762 IF20F2 output type selection 52 expansion 1 0 mounting 24 25 mounting on DIN rail 24 expansion 1 0 specifications 162 expansion 1 0 wiring 42 1762 IA8 wiring diagram 42 1762 IF20F2 wiring 52 1762 IF4 terminal block layout 55 1762 1016 wiring diagram 43 1762 10327 wiring diagram 44 1762 108 wiring diagram 43 1762 1080W6 wiring diagram 50 1762 048
124. parameter is used with Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms for Collision Avoidance on RS 485 network For more details see Collision Avoidance on page 286 The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 Channel 1 Ethernet Link Layer Configuration Parameters This section is only applicable to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The DNP3 over IP subsystem in the MicroLogix 1400 supports Listening End Point TCP Dual End Point and Datagram End Point type Listening End Point type supports a single TCP connection as a Server and UDP datagram TCP Dual End Point type supports a single TCP connection as a Server a single TCP connection as a Client and UDP datagram Datagram End Point type supports UDP datagram from DNP3 Masters The default TCP and UDP port numbers are 20000 and the port numbers are configurable The End Point type can be determined by the parameter End Point Type According to the parameter the MicroLogix 1400 works as different End Point types See the following table for each configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F End Point Types End Point Type Listening End Point Description A single TCP Server connection Any of the requests are accepted and the responses are transmitted via this connection The unsolicited responses are transmitted via this connection when this connection is available Accepts on
125. port 1761 CBL ASO9 or 1761 CBL ASO3 1747 or ZI i7er Cal amoo CHO 5 or 1761 CBL HM02 oLogix 1400 oo 5 ee E 44599 Recommended Tools To connect a DH 485 network to additional devices you need tools to strip the shielded cable and to attach the cable to the AIC Advanced Interface Converter We recommend the following equipment or equivalent Working with Cable for DH 485 Network Description Part Number Manufacturer Shielded Twisted Pair Cable 3106A or 9842 Belden Stripping Tool Not Applicable Not Applicable 1 8 Slotted Screwdriver Not Applicable Not Applicable DH 485 Communication Cable The suggested DH 485 communication cable is either Belden 3 106A or 9842 The cable is jacketed and shielded with one or two twisted wire pairs and a drain wire One pair provides a balanced signal line and one additional wire is used for a common reference line between all nodes on the network The shield reduces the effect of electrostatic noise from the industrial environment on network communication The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments daisy chained together The total length of the cable segments cannot exceed 1219 m 4000 ft However two segments can be used to
126. position by pressing the OK key Because this double integer file is protected you will find that the cursor even does not move to the data value position 84 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 13 Ifyou have finished monitoring the double integer file L9 press the ESC key to return to the File Number question screen as shown in step 2 Monitor Floating point Files In this section this assumption regarding the application program is made The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 8 This specifies the floating point file F8 as the target file to monitor via the LCD Most of the steps outlined in this section are similar to those found in Monitoring Double Integer files on page 79 However you will not be able to edit floating point files from the LCD 345hHpe H37 Protected The Protected message is displayed on the LCD for floating point files TIP MicroLogix 1400 Series A controllers display an Unprotected message but you will not be able to edit the corresponding data file Monitor System Status Files In this section this assumption regarding the application program is made The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 2 This specifies the system status file 52 as the target file to monitor via the LCD Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 85 Chapterb Using the LCD The format string on the third line is
127. pressing the Down key 00000 User Display b dvanced Set N Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed as shown below 00000 bKevIn Hode Cfq Cfg IFENET Cfg is selected press the OK key If not select Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key QJ 000006 Keyin DCOHH Cfg EHET Cfg If Protocol setup is selected press the OK key If not select Protocol setup using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key A 009000 Cfg Port Setting Protocol setup Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 103 Chapter 5 104 Using the LCD 5 The password screen is displayed Press Up Down Left and Right keys to enter a Master password up to a maximum of 10 digits In this example the current Master password is allocated as 1234 EHET Setup Master Password After entering the Master password press the OK key on the LCD keypad The following menu is displayed SHMP Enabled HI TP Enabled If you want to change the SNMP setting press the Up or Down key and press the OK key to apply the change SHHP Disabl HTTP Enabled Power cyclexxx Rockwell Automation Public
128. programmable controller used to monitor input devices and control output devices controller overhead An internal portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping and set up purposes control profile The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions counter 1 An electro mechanical relay type device that counts the occurrence of some event May be pulses developed from operations such as switch closures or interruptions of light beams 2 In controllers a software counter eliminates the need for hardware counters The software counter can be given a preset count value to count up or down whenever the counted event occurs CPU Central Processing Unit The decision making and data storage section of a programmable controller data table The part of processor memory that contains I O values and files where data is monitored manipulated and changed for control purposes DIN rail Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus DIN standards a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting of your controller download Data is transferred from a programming or storage device to another device DTE Data Terminal Equipment Equipment that is attached to a network to send or receive data or both Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Glossary embedded I O Embedded I O is the controller s on board I O EMI Electromagnetic in
129. secondary of the transformer Power to the DC input and output circuits should be connected through a set of master control relay contacts Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit Any part can fail including the switches in a master control relay circuit The failure of one of these switches would most likely cause an open circuit which would be a safe power off failure However if one of these switches shorts out it no longer provides any safety protection These switches should be tested periodically to assure they will stop machine motion when needed Power Considerations The following explains power considerations for the micro controllers Isolation Transformers You may want to use an isolation transformer in the AC line to the controller This type of transformer provides isolation from your power distribution system to reduce the electrical noise that enters the controller and is often used as a step down transformer to reduce line voltage Any transformer used with the controller must have a sufficient power rating for its load The power rating is expressed in volt amperes VA Power Supply Inrush During power up the MicroLogix 1400 power supply allows a brief inrush current to charge internal capacitors Many power lines and control transformers can supply inrush current for a brief time If the power source cannot supply this inrush current the source voltage may sag momentarily The only effect of limited inrush
130. software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence SHOCK HAZARD labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures gt gt gt IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation MicroLogix RSLinx RSLogix 500 and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Summary of Changes To help you find new and updated information in this release of the manual we
131. the 24V DC Sensor Supply Sum of all sensor currents 250 mA 24V DC 140 mA 24V DC example sensor value Current for MicroLogix Accessories and Expansion 1 0 Current Values Subtotal from Table 1225 mA 5V DC 1155 mA Q 24V DC 0 mA 260 mA 260 mA 5V DC 0 mA 180 mA 180 mA Q 24V DC System Loading System Loading 140 mA x 24V 260 mA x 5V 180 mA 24V 3 360 mW 1 300 mW 4 320 mW 8 980 mW 39 845 W 8 98 W System Lo ading Worksheet The tables below are provided for system loading validation See System Loading Example Calculations on page 344 Current Loading Calculating the Current for Expansion 1 0 Catalog Number n A B nxA nxB Number of Device Current Requirements Calculated Current Modul Y 5VDC mA 24VDC mA G5VDC mA 24V DC mA 1762 1 8 50 0 1762 IFA 40 50 1762 IF20F2 40 105 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 345 Appendix System Loading and Heat Dissipation Calculating the Current for Expansion 1 0 1762 108 50 0 1762 1016 70 0 1762 1032T 170 0 1762 IR4 40 50 1762 IT4 40 50 1762 0A8 115 0 1762 0B8 115 0 1762 0B16 175 0 1762 0B32T 175 0 1762 0F4 40 165 1762 0V32T 175 0 1762 0W8 80 90 1762 0W16 140 2 180 2 1762 OX6l 110 110 1762 1080W6 110 80 Total Modules 7 maximum Subtotal 1 Refer to your expansion 1 0 I
132. the Down arrow key Hl bUser Display Advanced Set 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed bKeyIn Hode Cfg Cfq B Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 3 Select the Protocol Cfg using the Up and Down arrow keys and then press the OK key 00000 RU Comms LLU Setup Protocol Cfg 000000 PHodbus ATU SI 5 The Modbus Slave screen is displayed Channel 0 is selected below 00000 RU Modbus ATU Slave Channel B Channel 2 6 Press the Up or Down arrow key to select a different channel Channel 2 in this example Press the OK key 00000 RU Modbus ATU Slave Channel B Channel 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 117 Chapter 5 118 Using the LCD oo Ifthe channel selected is not configured with the Modbus RTU Slave driver then Modbus Not Configured is displayed as shown below 00000 RU Modbus Not Configured If channel 0 is configured with the Modbus RTU Slave driver with node address 100 the following screen will appear as shown 000000 Hl Channel 8 Node Address 188 Ifchannel 2 is configured with che Modbus RTU Slave driver with node address 100 the following screen will appear as shown
133. the MicroLogix 1400 Controllers instruction set MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions 1766 IN001 In m formation on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1400 Controllers including a ounting template for easy installation Advanced Interface Converter AIC User Manual 1761 UM004 A in description on how to install and connect an AIC This manual also contains formation on network wiring DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761 0 005 n formation on how to install configure and commission a DNI DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual 1770 6 5 16 Modbus Protocol Specifications Available from www modbus org n n formation on DF1 open protocol formation about the Modbus protocol Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Specifications Available from www dnp org n formation about the Distributed Network Protocol Allen Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and Wiring Guidelines 1770 4 1 Application Considerations for Solid State Controls SGI 1 1 n depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley programmable controllers description of important differences between solid state programmable controller products and hard wired electromechanical devices National Electrical Code Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment
134. the MicroLogix 1400 is configured not to initiate Unsolicited Response this parameter used to limit the maximum number of events which is generated and logged into the event buffer for Class 1 events In this case value 0 will disable to generate the event If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured to generate Unsolicited Response and the number of queued Class 1 events is reached to this value Unsolicited Response is initiated The valid range is 0 to 6013 Default value is 10 Hold Time after Class1 Events x1 s This parameter is only for Unsolicited Response The MicroLogix 1400 holds the events during Hold Time after Class1 Events x1 s before initiating an Unsolicited Response The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 5 The value of 0 indicates that responses are not delayed due to this parameter Note that parameters Number of Class1 Events and Hold Time after Class 1 Events x1 s are used together so that if either one of the criteria are met an Unsolicited Response is transmitted Number of Class2 Events If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured not to initiate Unsolicited Response this parameter used to limit the maximum number of events which is generated and logged into the event buffer for Class 2 events In this case value 0 will disable to generate the event If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured to generate Unsolicited Response and the number of queued Class 2 events is reached to this value Unsolicited Response is
135. the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad 000000 bTrimPot Set System Info Fault Code 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Trim Pot Select screen is displayed as shown below 000000 Trimpot Set LCD POTH LCD B POTI The last trim pot whose data value you changed is selected by default If you are accessing to this screen for the first time POTO is selected by default RU RU QJ Selecta trim pot either POTO or whose data value you want to change using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad In this example we will select POTO Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Trim Pot 0 screen is displayed as shown below 000000 TMIN BBBH THAA gt 106 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 TMIN and TMAX indicate the range of data value for the trim pots both POTO and 1 The factory default for TMIN TMAX and POTO values are 0 250 and 0 in decimal respectively TMIN and TMAX on this screen are read only but you can change them using the LCD Function File in your application program The TMIN and TMAX elements can only be changed by a program download For more information on how to change Trim Pot configuration including TMIN and TMAX refer to the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 I
136. the integrity of the program after receiving the last application segment If the downloaded user program fails the integrity check MicroLogix 1400 clears the downloaded user program and restores the default user program In this case the configured Channel configuration is not changed from the last valid configuration user program cannot be downloaded while the controller is in Executing mode Before downloading send a mode change request with the function code STOP APPL 18 See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 294 for more details Executing modes include Run Remote Run Test Continuous Scan and Test Single Scan modes Any others are Non Executing modes Rules for Uploading a User Program A DNP3 master should send the function code OPEN FILE 25 READ 1 and CLOSE FILE 26 for uploading user programs When a master sends the function code FILE 25 with the file command object the file name string in File command object must be in this directory and file name format EXE processorName MG The directory and file name extension string must all be in capital letters and the string size cannot be exceed 64 bytes The file name processorName is from the Processor Name in the Controller Properties dialog in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 293 Appendix F 294 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DN
137. the material is responsible for any hazard created in doing so State and local regulations may exist regarding the disposal of these materials For a lithium battery product safety data sheet contact the manufacturer Sanyo Energy Corporation Tadarand U S Battery Division 2001 Sanyo Avenue 2 Seaview Blvd San Diego CA 92173 Port Washington NY 11050 619 661 4801 516 621 4980 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 155 Appendix Replacement Parts Notes 156 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Understanding the Controller Status Indicators Appendix C Troubleshooting Your System This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller Topics include understanding the controller status indicators controller error recovery model analog expansion I O diagnostics and troubleshooting calling Rockwell Automation for assistance The MicroLogix 1400 provides three groups of status indicators thestatus LEDs on the top of the controller e the status indicators on the LCD e the I O status indicators on the LCD Together they provide a mechanism to determine the current status of the controller if a programming device is not present or available Controller Status LED Indicators Figure 3 Controller LED Location Allen Bradley POWER RUN FAULT FORCE MicroLogix 1400 44607 Controller LED Indicators LED Color Indicates POWER off No input p
138. to connect Network MicroLogix 1400 controllers to the RS 485 network You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your RS 485 network directly without using an external optical isolator such as Advanced Interface Converter AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown in the illustrations below because Channel 0 is isolated within the controller TIP Use a 1763 NC01 Series or later 8 mini DIN to 6 pin RS 485 connector cable or equivalent to connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to a RS 485 network MicroLogix 1400 controllers support various protocols on the RS 485 network including DH 485 DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave Modbus RTU Master Slave ASCII and DNP3 Slave protocols In this section DH 485 protocol is used as an example Any physical connection should be the same as other protocols 70 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Communication Connections Chapter 4 DH 485 Configuration Parameters When MicroLogix communications are configured for DH 485 the following parameters can be changed DH 485 Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Baud Rate 9600 19 2 KBps Node Address 1 31 decimal Token Hold Factor 1 4 See Software Considerations on page 191 for tips on setting the parameters listed above Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 20
139. to indicate that different power sources may be used for different isolated groups if desired Figure 6 1766 L32AWA L32AWAA Input Wiring Diagram COMO INO IN1 IN2 INS COM 1 INA INS ING IN7 COM2 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 1766 L32AWAA only COM COM 3 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 ANA 1 0 1 1 1 2 1V3 1 NOT USED terminals not intended for use as connection points 36 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 7 1766 L32BWA L32BWAA Sinking Input Wiring Diagram DCa 0 0 24V DC Sensor pc POMP pc DCa DCb DCc DC OUT 2 1 DC DC DC COMO INO IN1 IN2 IN3 COM 1 IN4 INS ING IN7 COM2 148 INQ IN10 IN11 DCd DCd 1766 L32BWAA only DC COM COM 3 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 ANA 1VO IV1 IV2 4 IV3 Figure 8 1766 L32BWA L32BWAA Sourcing Input Wiring Diagram 24V DC DCa DCb DCc Sensor Power C DC DCa DCb DCc DC OUT 24 1 DC DC DC COMO INO IN1 IN2 INS COM 1 IN4 INS ING IN7 COM2 IN8 INQ IN10 IN11 1766 L32BWAA only DC COM COM 3 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 ANA IVO 4 IV1 1V2 1V3 Figure 9 1766 L32BXB L32BXBA Sinking Input Wiring Diagram DCa DCb DCc DCa DCb DCc COMO INO IN1 IN2 IN3 COM 1 INA INS ING IN7 com 2 IN8 INQ IN10 IN11 1766 L32BXBA only DC COM COM3 12 IN1
140. to it If you mount a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure place the switch operating handle on the outside of the enclosure so that you can disconnect power without opening the enclosure Whenever any of the emergency stop switches are opened power to input and output devices should be removed When you use the master control relay to remove power from the external I O circuits power continues to be provided to the controller s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still be observed The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the controller It is intended for any situation where the operator must quickly de energize I O devices only When inspecting or installing terminal connections replacing Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 13 Chapter 2 14 Install Your Controller output fuses or working on equipment within the enclosure use the disconnect to shut off power to the rest of the system TIP Do not control the master control relay with the controller Provide the operator with the safety of a direct connection between an emergency stop switch and the master control relay Using Emergency Stop Switches When using emergency stop switches adhere to the following points Do not program emergency stop switches in the controller program Any emergency stop switch should turn off all machine power by turning off the master control re
141. which means the cursor is still at the data value position B I I 01 300 UnProtected 9 Press OK to apply the changes Then the new value 1300 is applied Note that the target word 0 which is right next to N7 5 is flashing The cursor is moved automatically to the target word position You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software as shown below lolx 0 2 3 4 E 6 7 8 E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ifs Radix Decimal Columns 10 Desc Properties Usage Help TIP After changing the data value of a target word press the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC key to discard the changes 78 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 10 Now we will view an example of the data value of a protected property If LCD Edit Disable is set to checked enable the Protected message will be displayed and this data file cannot be edited by the LCD Data File Properties General File 7 Type N Name INTEGER Desc Elements 256 Last NT 255 Attributes Debug Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Global Local To File LAD 2 MAIN PROG Protection Constant C Static None Memory Module Download Web View Disable CCD Edit Di
142. wiring diagram 44 1762 0B16 wiring diagram 45 1762 0B32T wiring diagram 46 1762 0B8 wiring diagram 45 1762 0V32T wiring diagram 47 1762 0W16 wiring diagram 48 1762 0W8 wiring diagram 47 1762 0X6l wiring diagram 49 analog wiring guidelines 50 extended error information field 192 F false 579 FIFO First In First Out 379 file 579 file authentication rules 320 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Index full duplex 64 579 G general considerations 8 generating DNP3 events 307 grounding the controller 51 H half duplex 69 379 hard disk 579 hardware errors 192 hardware features 1 heat dissipation calculating 375 heat protection 12 high byte 580 1 0 Inputs and Outputs 380 1 0 status indicators 95 implementation table 544 initialize user program 325 input device 580 input states on power down 12 inrush current 580 installing battery wire connector 19 ControlFLASH software 195 memory module 16 your controller 7 instruction 380 instruction set 580 isolated link coupler installing 73 isolation transformers power considerations 11 J jump 380 L ladder logic 380 389 Index LCD configuring advanced settings 119 1 0 status indicators 95 187 loading communication EEPROM 138 main menu 91 menu structure tree 88 saving communication EEPROM 138 setup 141 status indicators 186 user defined screen 117 viewing fault code 137 viewing system information 136 least significant
143. 0 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface 8000 ft For additional information on connections using the AIC refer to the Advanced Interface Converter AIC User Manual publication 1761 6 4 Planning Cable Routes Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from electrical interference Keep the communication cable at least 1 52 m 5 ft from any electric motors transformers rectifiers generators arc welders induction furnaces or sources of microwave radiation If you must run the cable across power feed lines run the cable at right angles to the lines If you do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 15 m 6 in from AC power lines of less than 20 A 0 30 m 1 ft from lines greater than 20 A but only up to 100K VA and 0 60 m 2 ft from lines of 100 K VA or more If you run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 08 m 3 in from AC power lines ofless than 20 A 0 15 m 6 in from lines greater than 20 A but only up to 100 K VA and 0 30 m 1 ft from lines of 100 K VA or more Running the communication cable through conduit provides extra protection from physical damage and electrical interference If you route the cable through conduit follow these additional recommendations Use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical interf
144. 0 N Global No 0 0 N30 9 A16l DEADB 31 N Global No 0 0 N31 9 MTm o 29 282 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F LAD 2 Total Rungs in File 3 CLR 0000 Clear Sj Dest B210 0000000000000000 SUB H Subtract pe Source A 10 Source N300 Dest N32 0 ABS Absolute Value _ Source N32 Dest N32 0 GRT TOR 0001 Greater Than A gt B Bitwise Inclusive OR Source A N32 0 Source 1 0 lt 1 lt Source B N31 0 Source B B210 3e 0002 END gt In the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers new configuration files are defined for the Deadband for Analog Input Objects and the Threshold for Counter Objects The feature of the configuration files replaces the ladder program in this section Reporting Event By Polled Response When a DNP3 Master sends a poll to read Class events any events logged to the event buffer will be reported in the polled response When using both Channel 0 and Channel 2 Serial ports for DNP3 communication event polling requests should be sent to one Channel at a time This avoids mis reporting of events to different DNP3 Masters on different Channels For example Master A and Master B are connected to Channel 0 and Channel 2 respectively and 5000 events are logged in the event buffer Master A sends an event polling request and
145. 0 Series B controllers Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 231 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data Files 232 Internal Indications Internal Indication bits are set under the following conditions of the MicroLogix 1400 controllers IIN1 0 ALL STATIONS This bit is set when an all stations message is received IIN1 1 CLASS 1 EVENTS This bit is set when Class 1 event data is available IIN1 2 CLASS 2 EVENTS This bit is set when Class 2 event data is available IIN1 3 CLASS 3 EVENTS This bit is set when Class 3 event data is available IIN1 4 NEED TIME This bit is set when Time synchronization is required IIN1 5 LOCAL CONTROL This bit is set when the controller is in Non Executing mode IIN1 6 DEVICE TROUBLE This bit is set when the controller is in Fault mode IIN1 7 DEVICE RESTART This bit is set when the DNP3 driver is just configured in channel configuration IIN2 0 NO FUNC CODE SUPPORT This bit is set when a request which has an unknown function code is received IIN2 1 OBJECT UNKNOWN This bit is set when a request which has an unknown object is received IIN2 2 PARAMETER ERROR This bit is set when a request with a qualifier range field that cannot be processed is received IIN2 3 EVENT BUFFER OVERFLOY This bit is set when an event buffer overflow condition exists in the c
146. 1 CBL HMO2 1761 CBL APO0 1761 2 4 DF1 Slave radio modem or lease line straight 9 25 pin cable straight 9 25 pin cable MicroLogix 1400 DF1 Slave RS 485 DF1 Half Duplex RS 485 DF1 Half Duplex m 1 DB 9 RS 232 port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 3 RS 485 port 4 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 69 Chapter4 Communication Connections DF1 Half Duplex Network Using PC and Modems Rockwell Software RSLinx 2 0 or sce higher SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 DF1 Half Duplex Protocol SLC 5 05 PLC 5 or MicroLogix 1000 1200 and 1500 processors Modem configured for DF1Half Duplex Master Rockwell Software RSLinx 2 5 required for MicroLogix Uc 1400 2l 2 2 2 2 2 di 7 E 2 2 gt Ps 4 d MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix 1500 with MicroLogix 1500 with SLC 5 03 Slave 1000 Slave 1400 Slave 1200 Slave 1764 LSP or 1764 LRP 1764 LRP Processor Slave Processor Slave die Connecting to a RS 485 The network diagrams on the next pages provide examples of how
147. 1 Half Duplex slave protocol with the control line parameter set to Half Duplex Modem MicroLogix 1400 controllers also support DCD Data Carrier Detect line for DF1 Radio Modem protocol For other protocols you can only access the DCD signal from your ladder logic No other modem handshaking lines such as Data Set Ready and Data Terminal Ready are supported by MicroLogix 1400 controller The DH 485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices that coexist a single pair of wires DH 485 protocol uses RS 485 Half Duplex as its physical interface RS 485 is a definition of electrical characteristics it is protocol RS 485 uses devices that are capable of co existing on a common data circuit thus allowing data to be easily shared between devices The DH 485 network offers interconnection of 32 devices multi master peer to peer capability token passing access control e the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 187 Appendix E Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Devices that Support DH 45 Network maximum network segment of 1 219 m 4 000 ft The DH 485 protocol supports two classes of devices initiators and responders All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers To determine which initiator has the right to transmit a token passing algorithm is used
148. 1 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 2 52 102 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 3 53 103 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 4 54 104 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 5 55 105 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 6 56 106 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Unsolicited Non Critical ASDU 7 57 107 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Non Critical ASDU 8 58 108 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Critical ASDU 310 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Word Offset Current State Description CHO CH1 CH2 9 59 109 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Critical ASDU 0 60 110 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Valid Reply 1 61 111 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Invalid Reply 2 62 112 Security Idle Event Counter for Reply Timeout 3 63 113 Security Idle Event Counter for Max Invalid Replies Or Comm Failure Detected 4 64 114 Security Idle Event Counter for Max Invalid Replies Or Comm Failure Detected 5 65 115 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Error Message 6 66 116 Security Idle Event Counter for Key Change Timeout 7 67 117 Security Idle Event Counter for Expected Key Change Timeout 8 68 118 Security Idle Event Counter for Expected Key Change Timeout 9 69 119 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Key Status Request 20 70 120 Sec
149. 14 Glossary online Describes devices under direct communication For example when RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro is monitoring the program file in a controller operating voltage For inputs the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state For outputs the allowable range of user supplied voltage output device A device such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil that is controlled by the controller processor Central Processing Unit See CPU processor file The set of program and data files used by the controller to control output devices Only one processor file may be stored in the controller at a time program file The area within a processor file that contains the ladder logic program program mode When the controller is not executing the processor file and all outputs are de energized program scan A part of the controller s operating cycle During the scan the ladder program is executed and the output data file is updated based on the program and the input data file programming device Executable programming package used to develop ladder diagrams protocol The packaging of information that is transmitted across a network Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 355 Glossary 356 read To acquire data from a storage place For example the processor READs information from the input data file to solve the ladder program relay An electrically opera
150. 14 n Chapter4 Communication Connections DH 485 Network with a MicroLogix 1400 Controller AIC AIC d En fi PanelView HS E SLC 5 04 DH 485 Network AIC AIC ra M 7 MicroLogix MicroLogix 1400 Persona MicroLogix MicroLogix 1000 Computer 1200 1500 DH 485 Network Belden shielded twisted pair cable Belden shielded twisted pair cable AIC 1763 NC01 3 Ie 25 1761 CBL APOO or 9 amp 1761 CBL PM02 ok 0 E DC user supplied 1747 CP3 to PC or 1761 CBL ACOO port 1 or port 2 Hzc 1 t 1 DB 9 RS 232 port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 3 RS 485 port 4 Series A or later cables are required 44598 72 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Communication Connections Chapter 4 Typical 3 Node Network Channel 0 Connection PanelView 550 e PanelView M I m Mic RJ45
151. 3 1 14 1 15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 ANA IVO 24 IV3Q Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 37 Chapter3 Wire Your Controller Figure 10 1766 L32BXB L32BXBA Sourcing Input Wiring Diagram DCa DCb DCc DCa DCb DCc NOT NOT USED USED DC DC DC COMO INO IN1 IN2 IN3 COM 1 INA IN5 ING IN7 COM 2 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 1766 L32BXBA only DC COM _ 12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 1 17 IN18 IN19 ANA Ivo ivi IVa Figure 11 1766 L32AWA L32AWAA and 1766 L32BWA L32BWAA Output Wiring Diagram DCa DCa Lia L2a Lib L2b Lic L2c Lid L2d Lad Lie L2e L3e Lif Lat Lt Lat Lf Aue Aom Aom DC3 OUT3 4 OUTe 0 7 0 Li Ui DCO DC1 OUTI 062 OUT2 DC OUT4 OUTS 005 066 OUT9 OUTO OUT Ovi 1 400 240 vac VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC Figure 12 1766 L32BXB L32BXBA Output Wiring Diagram DCa DCa 4DCb DCb 0 DOc DCe DCe 06 DCf Aoc Aom Aom OUT Vbce OUT2 OUTs OUT4 OUTS OUT COM2 OUT OVO 1 DON J Controller 1 0 Wiring Minimizing Electrical Noise Because of the variety of applications and environments where controllers are installed and operating it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by input filters To help reduce the effects of environmental noise
152. 4 Channel RTD Resistance Input Module 1762 IT4 4 Channel Thermocouple mV Input Module Use only the following communication cables with the MicroLogix 1400 controllers These cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications e 1761 0 Series C or later e 1761 CBL AP00 Series C or later e 761 CBL PM02 Series C or later e 1761 CBL HM02 Series or later 2707 NC Series C or later e 1763 NCOI Series A or later 1747 CP3 Series or later ATTENTION UNSUPPORTED CONNECTION Do not connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to another MicroLogix family controller such as MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 or the network port of a 1747 DPS1 Port Splitter using a 1761 CBL AMOO 8 pin mini DIN to 8 pin mini DIN cable or equivalent This type of connection will cause damage to the RS 232 485 communication port Channel 0 of the MicroLogix 1400 and or the controller itself The communication pins used for RS 485 communications on the MicroLogix 1400 are alternately used for 24N power on the other MicroLogix controllers and the network port of the 1747 DPS1 Port Splitter Programming the MicroLogix 1400 controller is done using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Revision 8 10 00 or later for Series A controllers Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Hardware Overview Chapter 1 and 8 30 00 or later for Series B controllers Communication cables for programming are available separately
153. 535 can be set in 20 ms increments Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Message Retries 0 255 Specifies the number of times a slave device attempts to resend a message packet when it does not receive from the master device For use in noisy environments where message packets may become corrupted in transmission Pre Transmit Delay 0 65 535 can be set in 1 ms increments When the Control Line is set to no handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to DF1 Half Duplex Modem this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion 68 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Communication Connections Chapter 4 DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave Network Use the following diagram for DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave protocol without hardware handshaking SLC 3 03 __ SE _ 3 MicroLogix 1400 processor THEE DFI o CHO Master 1761 CBL AMOO or 176
154. 6 Frozen 32 bit Counter File Frozen 32 bit Counter Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 16 bit Analog Input File 16 bit Analog Input Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 16 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File In Series B Only N file 7 9 to 255 32 bit Analog Input File 32 bit Analog Input Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 32 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File In Series B Only L file 9 to 255 Short Floating Point Analog Input Short Floating Point Analog Input Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 De Short Floating Point Analog Input Deadband Config Only F file 8 9 to 255 File In Series B 16 bit Analog Output File 16 bit Analog Output Config File In Series B Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 32 bit Analog Output File 32 bit Analog Output Config File In Series B Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Short Floating Point Analog Output Short Floating Point Analog Output Config File In Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 File Series B Small BCD File Small BCD Class Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 For Binary Input Double Bit Binary Input and Small BCD type data you can configure Class information in the Configuration file The lower 2 bits in the elements of the Configuration files are the configuration of Class information to the relative objects Other bits are reserved Related Configuration Files Binary Input Config File Number Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 231 Append
155. 6V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1second 265V AC Working Voltage basic insulation 150V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Working Voltage for 1766 L32BWA A Description Power Supply Input to Backplane Isolation Recommendation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second 265V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Input Group to Backplane Isolation and Input Group to Input Group Isolation Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001 Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1100V AC for 1 second or 1697V DC for 1 second 75V H EN P May 2014 DC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation 133 AppendixA Specifications Working Voltage for 1766 L32BWA A Output Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second 265V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output Group to Output Group Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second 265V AC Working Voltage basic insulation 150V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Working Voltage for 1766 L16BXB A Description Recommendation nput Group to Backplane Isolation and Verif
156. 7 9 255 256 32 bit Counter Object File Only file 9 to 255 Frozen Counter Object 21 23 reflection of reflection of 16 bit Counter Object File t reflection of 32 bit Counter Object File configured Analog Input Object 30 32 256 16 bit Analog Input Object File Only N file 7 9to255 256 32 bit Analog Input Object File OnlyLfile 9 to 255 Short Floating Point Analog Input Object File Only F file 8 9 to 255 Analog Output Object 40 41 256 16 bit Analog Output Object File Only N file 256 32 bit Analog Output Object File Only L file 9 to 255 Floating Point Analog Output Object Only F file 8 9 255 ile BCD Object 101 256 Small BCD Object File Only N file 7 9to255 256 Data Set Object In 85 87 88 10 Data Set Prototypes Object File Only N file 7 9 255 10 Pene 86 87 88 Data Set Descriptors Object File Basically the index number of DNP objects of each type is evaluated by the firmware automatically per the number of elements For example if a Binary Input object file was configured as an element the highest index number of the Binary Input object is 15 The index number can only be increased by 16 Ifa Double Bit Binary Input object file was configured as an element the highest index number of the Double Bit Binary Input object is 7 The index number can only be increased by 8 As another example if a 16 bit Analog Input object file was configured as an element the highest index number i
157. 7 Number of events to be reported Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 299 Appendix F Communication Status File Words MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Words Offset File Element File Element Description Description for Description for Channel 0 Channel 2 68 CS0 68 CS2 68 Transport Function Layer Error Codes 0 NO ERROR No error found in the Transport Layer 1 DISCARD NOT FIRST SEG The received packet was discarded since it was not a first segment 2 DISCARD DUPLICATED AND MORE SEG The received packet was discarded since it had the same sequence number as previous more segments are expected 3 DISCARD DUPLICATED AND FINAL SEG The received packet was discarded since it had the same sequence number as previous final segment received 4 DISCARD OUT OF ORDER SEG The received packet was discarded since the sequence number was out of order 69 CS0 69 CS2 69 Transport Layer Error Count 70 CS0 70 CS2 70 End Of List Category ID 0 300 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F The elements can be seen in the Function Files for each Channel Function Files Sei x PwMx sr en MMi BHI E5875 1 1 CCC PwMx sr cso jesi 1527105 all
158. 7 in 1761 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 45 cm 17 7 in 1761 CBL PM02 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 2 m 6 5 ft 1761 CBL HM02 Series or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 2 m 6 5 ft 2707 9 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 15 m 49 2 ft 1763 NCO1 Series A or later 30 cm 11 8 in 1747 CP3 Series A or later 3 m 8 8 ft A ATTENTION UNSUPPORTED CONNECTION Do not connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to another MicroLogix family controller such as MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 or to the 1747 DPS1 Network port using a 1761 CBL AMOO 8 pin mini DIN to 8 pin mini DIN cable or equivalent This type of connection will cause damage to the RS 232 485 communication port Channel 0 of the MicroLogix 1400 and or the controller itself Communication pins used for RS 485 communications are alternately used for 24V power on the other MicroLogix controllers and the 1747 DPS1 network port Making a DF1 Point to Point Connection You can connect the MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller to your personal computer using a serial cable 1761 CBL PM02 from your personal computer s serial port to the controller s Channel 0 The recommended protocol for this configuration is DF1 Full Duplex You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your personal computer
159. 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 1 Counter 32 bit with flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 2 Counter 16 bit with flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 5 Counter 32 bit without 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 6 Counter 16 bit without 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 2 0 Frozen Counter Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 2 1 Frozen Counter 32 bi 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 00 01 start stop with flag 2 2 Frozen Counter 16 bi 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 00 01 start stop with flag 21 5 Frozen Counter 32 bi 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag and time 21 6 Frozen Counter 16 bi 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag and time 2 9 Frozen Counter 32 bi 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 00 01 start stop without flag 316 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014
160. A 6240 3120 0 0 mA 0 0 148 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Replacement Parts This chapter contains the following information atable of MicroLogix 1400 replacement parts procedure for replacing the lithium battery M icroLogi x 1400 The table below provides a list of replacement parts and their catalog number Replacement Kits Description Catalog Number Lithium Battery See page 151 1747 BA Lithium Battery 1747 BA IMPORTANT When the controllers Battery Low indicator is lit check whether the battery wire connector is connected correctly or replace the replaceable battery with a new one immediately When the indicator turns on it means that either the battery is disconnected or that the battery requires replacement The controller is designed to operate for up to 2 weeks from the time that the indicator first turns on We recommend that you replace the battery immediately when the indicator turns on Installation Follow the procedure below to ensure proper replaceable battery installation 1 Insert a battery into the battery pocket with wires facing up 2 Insert the battery wire connector into the battery connector 3 Secure the battery connector wires around the 1762 expansion bus connector as shown below Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 151 Appendix Replacement Parts Battery compartment Battery
161. AC 9 5 mA Q 24V DC 5 0 mA Q 24V DC Maximum 16 0 mA Q 132 V AC 10 0 mA Q 30V DC 5 5 mA Q 30V DC Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 127 AppendixA Specifications Description 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BWA A 1766 L32BXB A Inputs 0 through 11 12 high speed DC inputs Inputs 12 and higher 8 standard DC inputs Off State Leakage Current 2 5 mA max 0 1 mA max 1 5 mA max Nominal Impedance 12 kQ at 50 Hz 2 0 kQ 5 5 kQ 10 at 60 Hz Inrush Current max at 120V AC 30A Analog Inputs Description Voltage input range 1766 L32AWA A L32BWA A L32BXB A 0 10 0V DC 1 LSB Type of data 12 bit unsigned integer Input coding 0 10 0V DC 1 LSB 0 4095 Voltage input impedance 2199 Input resolution 12 bit Non linearity Overall accurarcy 20 65 C 4 149 F 0 5 of full scale 1 0 of full scale Update tim 100 20 16 67 4 ms selectable Voltage input overvoltage protection 10 5 V DC Field wiring to logic isolation Analog Outputs Description Number of inputs Non isolated with internal logic 1766 L32AWA A L32BWA A L32BXB A 2 single ended Voltage output range 0 10 V DC 1 LSB Type of data 12 bit unsigned integer Step response 2 5 ms 95 Load range Voltage output gt 1 KQ Output coding 0 10 DC 0 4095 Output resolution 12 bit Analog output setting t
162. ANT Use your programming software to ensure that the integer file you specify in the TUF element as well as the appropriate number of elements exists in the MicroLogix 1400 user program The example table below shows how the LCD uses the configuration information with integer file number 7 LCD 0 TUF 7 The data protection for its file depends on the setting for LCD Edit Disable If LCD Edit Disable is set to 1 in file properties the corresponding data file is considered read only by the LCD and the Protected message is displayed IMPORTANT Although you cannot change protected data from the LCD keypad the control program or other communication devices have access to protected data Protection bits do not provide any overwrite protection to data within the target integer file It is entirely the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten TIP The LCD always starts at word 0 of a data file It cannot start at any other address within the file For explanations in this section we assume the following in the application program Aninteger file N7 which is 256 elements long 256 words is defined with the preset data as shown in the screen capture below Data File dec INTEGER inl xl TH 0 1 2 4 6 7 8 E 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 0 0 0 0 0 0
163. Allen Bradley Publication Index 50499 Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary AG 7 1 A in complete listing of current documentation including ordering instructions Also dicates whether the documents are available on CD ROM or in multi languages glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations Common Techniques Used in this Manual The following conventions are used throughout this manual Bulleted lists such as this one provide information not procedural steps Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information e Italic type is used for emphasis xvi Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Chapter 1 Hardware Overview Hardware Features The Bulletin 1766 MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller contains a power supply input and output circuits a processor an isolated combination RS 232 485 communication port an Ethernet port and a non isolated RS 232 communication port Each controller supports 32 discrete I O points 20 digital inputs 12 discrete outputs and 6 analog I O points 4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs 1766 L32BWAA 1766 AWAA and 1766 BXBA only The hardware features of the controller are shown below Chu Gee GSE GEERT cr CCLELD Cat Camm COTES 01 crc Gtr Cane CaS SS cass eS CE
164. Analog Output Single prec flt pt Related Object File Number 16 bit Analog Output Object File Number 32 bit Analog Output Object File Number Short Floating Point Analog Output Object File Number Related Configuration File Number None Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 25 Appendix F 258 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 To generate Analog Output Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure the Analog Output Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When only one of the Analog Output Object File is configured Index number starts from 0 for the configured object 1 word is used for 1 Index of 16 bit Analog Output Object 1 double word is used for 1 Index of 32 bit Analog Output Object and 1 short float is used for 1 Index of Short Floating Point Analog Output Object If the 16 bit Analog Output Object File Number 32 bit Analog Output Object File Number and Short Floating Point Analog Output Object File Number are configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file the starting index number of 16 bit Analog Output Object is 0 and the starting index number of 32 bit Analog Output Object starts from the last index number of 16 bit Analog Output Object For example if 10 elements of 16 bit Analog Output Object are configured 10 elements of 32 bit Analog Output Object and 10 elements of Short Floating
165. Attribute is 0 The supported range of the variation is 211 255 Object Group 0 Variations for Attribute Set 0 Variation Read Attribute Length in Max Length Description Value Series A Value Series B Write Data Type Bytes in Bytes Series A Series B 211 Read Only 2 0 for DNP3 Identifier of support for Returns the identifier Returns the identifier user specific attributes for user specific for user specific attributes attributes Rockwell NULL for DNP3 Automation Inc 1 212 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of master defined 0 0 data set prototypes 213 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of 0 The configured outstation defined data set number in the DNP3 prototypes Slave Application Layer Configuration file 10 max 214 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of master defined 0 0 data sets 215 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of 0 The configured outstation defined data sets number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file 10 max 216 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max number of binary 10 10 outputs per request 217 Read Only UINT 4 2 Local timing accuracy 10 000 in microseconds 218 Read Only UINT 4 2 Duration of timing accuracy 0 in seconds 219 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for analog output 0 0 events 220 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max analog output index 256 3 221 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of analog outputs 0 256 3 222 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for binary output 0 events 223 Read Only U
166. BWA A Maximum controlled load 1440 VA 1080 VA Maximum Continuous Current Current per channel and group 2 5 A per channel 2 5 A per channel common 8A max channel 8 11 common Current per at 150V max 28 A or total of per point controller loads whichever is less at 240V max 20 A or total of per point loads whichever is less Relay Outputs Description 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BWA A 1766 L32BXB A Turn On Time Turn Off Time 10 msec maximum Load current 10 mA minimum 1 Scan time dependent Figure 1 MicroLogix 1400 DC Input Power Requirements for 1766 L32BXB A Unit 1766 L32BXB A Typical Power Requirements 28 E Eg 21 B ccc M za 2 59 7 erf 0 4 8 12 16 20 Calculated Expansion 1 0 Power Load Watts 130 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Specifications Figure 2 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BXBA FET Output Maximum output current temperature dependent Appendix A FET Current per Point 1 5A 30 C 86 F FET Total Current 6 0 6 0A 30 C 86 F 1 25 5 0 a 1 0 40 0 75 60 C 140 F lt 0 3 0 3 0A 60 C 140 F o o 05 5 20 c d 0 25 10 1C 30 50 70C 80 9C 306 5C 7 C 80 50 F 86 122 158 176 50 F 1229 158 1769 Temperature dio Temperature 44533 Description General Operation High Speed Operation Power supply voltage Output 2 3 and 4
167. Binary Input Event With absolute time g2v3 Binary Input Event With relative time default Related Object File Number Binary Input Object File Number Related Configuration File Number Binary Input Config File Number To generate a Binary Input Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Binary Input Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When the Binary Input Object File is configured Index number starts from 0 1 bit is used for 1 Index As an example a Binary Input Object File is configured as shown below This file has 10 elements and 160 Binary Input points Index 0 of the Binary Input Object is B10 0 0 Index 1 is B10 0 1 and Index 159 is B10 9 15 File B10 Binary Input Object File z ni tn o Coo oOo fF oo e of eo oo ao o co G amp G a oe oM o olli D Oo oE olm n o a e e T LB B10 0 0 Radi Binary mwe Desc B10 Properties Usage Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol
168. CP is based and maintains some backward Configure Your Processor compatibility The main difference is that BOOTP was designed for manual configuration while DHCP allows for dynamic allocation of network addresses and configurations to newly attached devices ATTENTION The processor must be assigned a fixed network address The IP address of the processor must not be dynamically provided Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or loss of process control Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 339 Appendix Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Using Subnet Masks and Gateways 340 Configure subnet masks and gateways using the Ethernet channel 1 configuration screen IMPORTANT If BOOTP is enabled you can t change any of the advanced Ethernet communications characteristics If your network is divided into subnetworks that use gateways or routers you must indicate the following information when configuring channel 1 subnet mask gateway address A subnet mask is a filter that a node applies to IP addresses to determine if an address is on the local subnet or on another subnet If an address is located on another subnetwork messages are routed through a local gateway to be transferred to the destination subnetwork If your network is not divided into subnets then leave the subnet mask field at the default If you are Then manually
169. CR mandatory hard wired relay that can be de energized by any series connected emergency stop switch Whenever the MCR is de energized its contacts open to de energize all application I O devices mnemonic A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex or lengthy set of information modem Modulator demodulator Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a communication line modes Selected methods of operation Example run test or program negative logic The use of binary logic in such a way that 0 represents the voltage level normally associated with logic 1 for example 0 5V 1 OV Positive is more conventional for example 1 5V 0 OV network A series of stations nodes connected by some type of communication medium A network may be made up of a single link or multiple links nominal input current The current at nominal input voltage Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 353 Glossary 354 normally closed Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de energized or the switch is deactivated they are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated In ladder programming a symbol that allows logic continuity flow if the referenced input is logic 0 when evaluated normally open Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is de energized or the switch is deactivated They
170. Control of message transfers on the DH 485 network is performed by rotating the token along the nodes on the network A node holding the token can send a message onto the network Each node is allowed a fixed number of transmissions based on the Token Hold Factor each time it receives the token After a node sends a message it passes the token to the next device The allowable range of node addresses is 1 31 There must be at least one initiator on the network such as a MicroLogix controller or an SLC 5 02 or later processor DH 485 Configuration Parameters When MicroLogix communications are configured for DH 485 the following parameters can be changed DF1 Full Duplex Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Baud Rate 9600 19 2K Node Address 1 31 decimal Token Hold Factor 1 4 See Software Considerations on page 191 for tips on setting the parameters listed above Devices that use the DH 485 Network In addition to the MicroLogix controllers the devices shown in the following table also support the DH 485 network Catalog Description Installation Function Publication Number Bulletin 1761 MicroLogix 1000 Series C or later These controllers support DH 485 communications 1761 6 3 Controllers Bulletin 1762 MicroLogix 1200 Series A or later These controllers support DH 485 communications 1762 UM001 Bulletin 1763 MicroLogix 1100 Series A or later These controllers s
171. D keypad The I O Status screen is displayed as shown below 000000 RU I BEHEHEDEOonunag OOOOO 6123456789612 456739 3 If you have finished viewing I O status press the ESC key to return to the Main Menu screen as shown in step 1 The LCD allows you to view and change the data values of 256 bits words or double integers in a user defined file You can access to this functionality via the Monitoring screen of the LCD To monitor the bit file on the LCD you have to specify its file number in the Target User Defined File Number TUF element of the LCD Function File and download your application program to the controller The TUF element can only be changed by a program download Target User Defined File Number TUF Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access Target User Defined File LCD 0 TUF Word int Control Read Only Number The value stored in the TUF element identifies the bit file with which the LCD will interface Valid bit files are B3 and B10 through B255 When the LCD reads a valid bit file number it can access up to 256 bits 0 to 255 on the LCD screen The protection bit LCD edit disable in the data file properties of target bit file are used to define the read only or read write privileges for its file The file type that the LCD interfaces with is bit integer double integer or float file specified in the TUF element IMPORTANT Use your programmin
172. DNP3 Index 1 of the Small BCD Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved In the example below for Small BCD Config File Class Level of Index 0 is 1 B40 0 0 and B40 0 1 Class Level of Index 1 is 2 B40 1 0 and B40 1 1 Class Level of Index 2 is 3 B40 2 0 and B40 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B40 bin Small BED Config File L5 14 I3 12 ll 10 59 8 0n000n00n000000000 01 0000000200002000 10 0n000n00000000001 0n000n0000 000000 0 00 0n000n00n00 000000 00 0000n00000000000 0 0n0 0 00n000n0n000n000002G0 0 0n000n000n0000n000002G80 60 0n0 00n000n0n000n00002G0 0 00 00n000n00000002G80 60 HE Radi Binary Columns po Properties Usage Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F DNP3 Data Set Object This feature is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers These object groups and variations are supported Data Set Objects g85v0 Data Set Prototype Any Variation g85v1 Data Set Prototype With UUID e g86vl1 Data Set Descriptor Data set contents g86v2 Data Set Descriptor Characteristics g87v0 Static Data Set Any Variation g87v1 Static Data Set Present value g88v0 Event Data Set Any Variation g88v1 Event Data Set Snapshot Related Object Configuration File Number
173. Deleting Unused Memory Scope Global C Local File La 2 MAIN PROG zl Protection Constant C Static None Memory Module Download Web View Disable LCD Edit Disable The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 9 to specify the integer file L9 as the target file to monitor on the LCD as shown in the screen capture below The controller mode is set to REMOTE RUN igi x HSC PTOX PWMX STI El LCD BH 4 BEILCU U 1 Customized Boot Logo ASCII File 0 L SCD Start with Customized Display Data Input Timeout of LCD Instructic 0 LDN LCD Instruction Job Done 1 ERR LCD Display Operation Error Bit 0 ERN LCD Module Operation Error Num 0 ser Define File Numbe 4 og data up L TMIN Trimpot Low Value 0 L TMAX Trimpot High Value 2 L POTO Trimpot 0 Data 0 POTI Trimpot 1 Data TMIN TMAX 0 0 LCD 0 CBL Integer Instruction Display Window E OK OK key Customized Display Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the double integer file L9 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 81 Chapter 5 Using the LCD On the Main Menu screen select Monitoring by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad 000000 120 Status Honitor ing Hode Switch Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The File Number prompt is displa
174. Diagrams 8 36 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32AW A 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BW AA 1766 L32AW AA 1766 L32BXBA Wiring Diagrams 36 Controller I O rhe ehe OY xx E a Pene ES 38 Minimizing Electrical NolSes e 38 Wiring Your Analog Channels 52 eee eere he 39 Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines rre rr ter rns 40 Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Channels 41 Grounding Your Analog Cable 42 Expansi n I O Wiring 42 Digital Wiring Diagrams civic ces rettet em toni ends 42 Analog WSEIBE cos Sie wa apio epe qucd cett els piede 50 Chapter 4 Communication Connections Supported Communication 5 59 Default Communication 60 Using the Communications Toggle Functionality 60 Changing Communication 61 Connecting to the RS 232 Portis ode FERA en e ve ot EE eda 63 Making a DF1 Point to Point 64 sing a Modem 65 Connecting to a Half Duplex 68 Connecting RS 485 Network cock coctus sce tt cen vate x a 70 DH 485 Configuration Parameters 71 Tools dau tans rude e baee te vo 73 DH 485 Communication
175. Duplex protocol to multiple controllers 1761 or 1761 CBL PM02 Modbus RTU Slave protocol Modem straight through 44594 1 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your modem directly without using an external optical isolator such as AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown in the illustration below because Channel 0 is isolated within the controller Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 65 Chapter4 Communication Connections MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 to Modem Cable Pinout When connecting MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 to a modem using an RS 232 cable the maximum that the cable length may be extended is 15 24 m 50 ft DTE Device DCE Device MicroLogix Modem 1400 PanelView Channel 0 etc 8 Pin 25 Pin 9 7 TXD TXD 2 3 gt 4 RXD RXD 3 2 2 GND 4 y GND 7 5 1 B DCD 8 1 8 A DTR 20 4 5 DCD DSR 6 6 6 CTS CTS 5 8 3 RTS RIS 4 7 ATTENTION Do not connect pins 1 and 8 This connection will cause damage to the RS 232 485 communication port channel 0 of the MicroLogix 1400 and or the controller itself Constructing Your Own Modem Cable If you construct your own modem cable the maximum cable length is 15 24 m 50 ft with a 25 pin or 9 pin connector Refer to the follo
176. EC 150 Chapter 7 Directions and Cautions for MicroLogix 1400 Online Editing Usetas e a uk s eas HQ ER a om ERE SS 151 A Download is Required Before Starting Online Editing 151 Types of Online Editing e ecco 152 Edit Functions in Runtime Online 4 153 Edit Functions in Program Online Editing Lise 153 Appendix A Specifications for Inputs UC EE 155 Specifications for Outputs in Hazardous Locations Class 1 Division 2 Groups A B 157 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN E May 2014 Replacement Parts Troubleshooting Your System Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Table of Contents Specifications for Outputs in Non Hazardous Locations only 158 eu weld 161 Expansion I O Specifications eH NS 162 cote Veo 162 Analog Modules Sues e Medi atri eel ied ed 169 Appendix B MicroLogix 1400 Replacement 179 Lithium Battery 1747 uso deua ete aat de a o 179 Installatiolt ze decora cov p A dU E 179 181 il ch d 181 Transportati n e tont e Hat aei d doleo etc eds 181 Disposal sitar eva rte OH HG eee eds 183 Appendix C Understanding the Controller Status Indicators 185 Controller Status LED
177. Element Descriptor Element race Index DescriptorCode DataType Code Max Data Length bytes Ancillary Value me Value NONE NONE 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 NONE NONE 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 NONE NONE 0 0 0 NONE NONE 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 3 NONE NONE 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 ERE Data Set Prototypes Configuration Parameters These parameters are used to construct Data Set Prototypes object DNP3 Data Set Prototype 0 B 2 umber of Prototype Elements 0 ecoooooooooo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Number of Prototypes Elements 0 10 This must be the same as the number of the Prototype elements that are configured 264 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Prototype Element Configuration Each Prototypes element is configured in this configuration Double click an element to edit it Prototype Element Configuration E Index fi Descriptor Code NONE Data Type Code NONE Max Data Lenath bytes Ancillary Value Cancel Descriptor Code UUID for element 1 NSPC NAME DAEL for element 2 or higher Data Type Code NONE for element 1 NONE VSTR UINT INT FLT OSTR BSTR TIME for element 2 or higher Max Data Length bytes 0 for element 1 0 255 for element 2 or higher Ancill
178. F UnProtected You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software 14 13 12 11 10 A EG 4 ren B3 0 000n0n0200n02020200020 0 B3 1 000n0002020002002020 0 B3 2 000n002002020020002 0200 B3 3 000n0000n0n002000 000 B3 4 3 5 D 80 0s 0 0 0 0 305 0 0 gt 07 oO 0 10 B3 6 83 7 B3 8 000n000n020200200200200 B3 9 B3 10 00000200200000202000 0 v ALI Mz xy Sd Radix z O 83 a Properties Usage Help TIP When the cursor is at the data value position press the Down key to change the data value of a bit from ON 1 to OFF 0 Press the Up key to change from OFF 0 to ON 1 After changing the data value of a target bit press the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC key to discard the changes Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 73 Chapter 5 74 Using the LCD 8 Now we will view an example of the data value of a protected property If LCD Edit Disable is set to checked enable the Protected message will be displayed and this data file cannot be edited from the LCD 9 Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing the OK key Because the B3 0 0 bit is a protected bit you will find that the cursor does not mov
179. FC NACK 1 or FC NOT SUPPORTED 15 When the selection is Enabled Checked the optional Secondary Frame is sent out with the function code FC 1 or FC SUPPORTED 15 Confirmation Timeout x20 ms When Request LL Confirmation is enabled che MicroLogix 1400 waits to receive a confirmation frame until this timeout has expired The valid range is 1 65535 Default value is 1 Message Retries When Confirmation Timeout x1 ms has expired and this parameter was non zero value the MicroLogix 1400 tries to send retry packets The valid range is 0 255 Default value is 0 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms The MicroLogix 1400 waits for the specified time before sending the packet The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 RTS Off Delay x20 ms When the Control is set at Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking this feature is enabled This specifies a time delay between the end of a transmission and dropping of the RTS signal The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 207 Appendix F 208 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 RTS Send Delay x20 ms When the Control is set at Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking this entry is enabled This specifies a time delay between the raising of the RTS and the initiation of a transmission The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 Max Random Delay x1 ms This
180. Hz to 30 MHz if the Radiated Immunity frequency range is 30 1000 MHz 3 For grounded thermocouples the 10V level is reduced 3V Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 141 Appendix Specifications General Specifications Specification 1762 IF20F2 1762 1 4 1762 0F4 1762 IR4 1762 IT4 Shipping weight 240 g 0 53 Ibs 235 g 0 517 Ibs 260 g 0 57 Ibs 220 g 0 53 Ibs approx with carton Bus current draw max 40 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 5V DC 40 mA at 5V DC 105 mA at 24V DC 50 mA at 24V DC 165 mA at 24V DC 50 mA at 24V DC 50 mA at 24V DC Analog normal Voltage 0 10V DC Voltage 10 10V DC Voltage 0 10V DC NA NA operating range Current 4 20 mA Current 4 20 mA Current 4 20 mA Full scale analog Voltage 0 10 5V DC Voltage Voltage NA NA ranges Current 0 21 mA 10 5 410 5V DC 0 10 5V DC Current 21 21 mA Current 0 21 mA Resolution 12 bits unipolar 15 bits bipolar 4 12 bits unipolar Input filter and 15 bits plus sign configuration dependent Repeatability 0 12 0 12 0 12 30 1 C 0 18 F for See Table 146 Ni and NiFe 0 2 C 0 36 F 0 2 C 0 36 F for other RTD inputs 0 04 ohm for 150 ohm resistances 0 2 ohm for other resistances Input and output group 30V AC 30V DC rated working voltage 30V AC 30V DC rated 30V AC 30V DC 30V AC 30V DC to system is
181. INT 4 2 Max binary output index 256 16 224 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of binary outputs 0 256 16 225 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for frozen counter 1 events 226 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for frozen counters 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 215 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Object Group 0 Variations for Attribute Set 0 Variation Read Attribute Length in Max Length Description Value Series A Value Series B ANrite Data Type Bytes in Bytes Series A Series B 22 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for counter events 1 228 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max counter index 256 2 229 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of counter points 0 256 2 230 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for frozen analog 0 inputs 231 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for analog input 1 events 232 Read Only UINT 4 2 Maximum analog input index 256 3 233 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of analog input 0 256 3 points 234 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for double bit binary 1 input events 235 Read Only UINT 4 2 Maximum double bit binary 256 8 input index 236 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of double bit binary 0 256 8 input points 237 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for binary input 1 events 238 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max binary input index 256 16 239 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of binary input 0 256 16 points 240 Read Only
182. If you change to the user defined configuration from the default configuration mode by selecting Disable and pressing the OK key the DCOMM Mode Change Notification will be displayed 000006 RU Comms config 15 restored 6 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 3 Connecting to the RS 232 There are two ways to connect the MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller to Port your personal computer using the DF1 protocol using a point to point connection or using a modem Descriptions of these methods follow Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 63 Chapter4 Communication Connections ATTENTION All devices connected to the RS 232 485 communication port must be referenced to controller ground or be floating not referenced to a potential other than ground Failure to follow this procedure may result in property damage or personal injury For 1766 L32BWA controllers the COM of the sensor supply is also connected to chassis ground internally The 24V DC sensor power source should not be used to power output circuits It should only be used to power input devices For 1766 L32BXB controllers the VDC NEUT or common terminal of the power supply is also connected to chassis ground internally Available Communication Cables Communication Cables Length 1761 CBL AMOO Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 45 cm 17
183. Index retentive data 384 RS 232 584 RS 232 communication interface 211 RS 485 communication interface 211 rules for downloading a user program 321 rules for file authentication 320 rules for initializing a user program 324 rules for uploading a user program 322 rules for uploading communication status files 324 run mode 384 rung 384 safety circuits 10 safety considerations 9 disconnecting main power 10 hazardous location 9 master control relay circuit periodic tests 11 periodic tests of master control relay circuit 11 power distribution 10 safety circuits 10 save 384 saving communication EEPROM 158 scan time 385 sinking 385 sinking and sourcing wiring diagrams 36 sinking wiring diagram 1762 24BWA 36 sourcing 385 sourcing wiring diagram 1762 24BWA 37 38 1766 L32BWA 37 specifications 155 specifications for outputs in non hazardous locations 158 specifications for outputs in hazardous locations 157 starting and stopping user programs mode change via DNP3 network 324 status 385 status indicators 185 supported communication protocols 59 surge suppressors for motor starters 30 recommended 30 using 29 system configuration DF1 Full Duplex examples 212 DH485 connection examples 221 391 Index system loading example calculations 372 limitations 371 worksheet 373 system loading and heat dissipation 571 T target user defined file number 97 terminal 385 terminal block layouts 1762 IF20F2 53 1762 IF4 55
184. Iout or Vout and by the type range selection bits in the Configuration Data File Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 ATTENTION Analog outputs may fluctuate for less than a second A when power is applied or removed This characteristic is common to most analog outputs While the majority of loads will not recognize this short signal it is recommended that preventive measures be taken to ensure that connected equipment is not affected 1762 IF20F2 Wiring The following illustration shows the 1762 IF2OF2 analog expansion I O terminal block 52 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 28 1762 IF20F2 Terminal Block Layout Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 53 Chapter3 Wire Your Controller Figure 30 Single ended Sensor Transmitter Types 2 Wire Transmitter Transmitter Module Transmitter Supply Signal ransmitter 1 All power supplies rated N E C Class 2 1762 IF4 Input Type Selection Select the input type current or voltage using the switches located on the modules circuit board and the input type range selection bits in the Configuration Data File Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RMO01 You can access the switches through the ventilation slots on the top of the module
185. Jo Frozen Counter 16bits fo Frozen Counter 32bits Analog Input 16bits 36 Analog Input 325 0 Analog Input Short Floating fo Double Bit Input 0 Small BCD Apply The MicroLogix 1400 controller currently supports the first of the two methods listed below for collision avoidance e Detecting transmitted data TX RX line RS485 communication Detecting out of band carrier DCD on RS232C communication When the MicroLogix 1400 is connected to RS485 network it monitors all data on the link If the MicroLogix 1400 is preparing to transmit a packet and finds the link busy it waits for an interval defined by the Backoff Time until it is no longer busy Backoff Time Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms Max Random Delay x1 ms The Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms in the Link Layer Channel Configuration file is a fixed delay and the Max Random Delay x1 ms in the Channel Configuration file is a maximum random delay for Channel 0 and Channel 2 You must specify those parameters to get the collision avoidance mechanism Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Time Synchronization MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F After the Backoff Time the MicroLogix 1400 tries again either indefinitely or up to a configurable maximum number of retries If a maximum is used the protocol considers this as a link f
186. Layer diagnostic counter C 50 55 to 0 69 and CS2 55 to CS2 69 the counter values are available with the structured display in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software as below LT ox Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 2 Ext DNP3 Slave Application Layer Application Layer Error Code Received Confirm FC Counter Application Layer Error Count 0 Received Read FC Counter 0 FClastemorz Received Write FC Counterz 0 Last Trans IIN in response Received Etc FC Counter Data file Num last error request 0 Trans Solicited Res FC Counter 0 Data element Num lasterrorrequest 0 Trans Unsolicited Res FC Counter 0 Transport Layer Error Code 0 Number of events to be reported Transport Layer Error 0 FC Function Code Res Response Trans Transmitted L cemestuws ox DNP3 Slave Application Layer Application Layer Error Code 0 Received Confirm FC Counter 0 Application Layer Error Count 0 Received Read FC Counter 0 FClastemorz D Received Write FC Counterz 0 Last Trans IIN in response B Received Etc FC I Data file Num last errorrequestz 0 Trans Solicited Res Counter 0 Data element Num last error request Trans Unsolicited Res FC Counter Transport Layer Error Code J Number of events to be reported 0 Transport Layer Error Countz 0 FC Function Code Res Response Trans Transmitted
187. MPORTANT The same TMIN and TMAX values are used for both trim pots POTO and POT1 This behavior is intended by design for simplicity in Trim Pot configuration When you enter this screen the last digit of the POTO value is flashing It indicates the current digit Press the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad to change the value of the current digit Press the Left and Right keys to select a different digit as the current digit If the Key In mode is set to Continuous the changes are applied immediately after you press the Up and Down keys While if it is set to Discrete you have to press the OK key to apply the changes after you change the data value For more information on how to set the Key In mode see Changing Key In Mode on page 92 TIP The Key In mode has an effect only when you change the data value of a trim pot on a Trim Pot screen either the Trim Pot 0 or Trim Pot 1 screen 5 Ifyou have finished changing the data value of the selected trim pot POTO in this example press the ESC key to return to the Trim Pot Select screen as shown in step 2 Trim Pot Configuration in LCD Function File The configuration for Trim Pots in the LCD Function File including trim pot low and high values for data value range is described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RMOO1 Error Conditions Error conditions regarding the Trim Pot functionality are described in the Mic
188. MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 4 0x04 FC OPERATE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 5 0x05 FC DIRECT OPERATE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 6 0x06 FC DIRECT OPERATE NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 7 0x07 FC IMMED FREEZE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 8 0x08 FC IMMED FREEZE NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 9 0x09 FC FREEZE CLEAR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 10 0x0A FC FREEZE CLEAR NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 11 0x0B FC FREEZE AT TIME No Request 12 0x0C FC FREEZE AT TIME NR No Request 13 0 00 FC COLD RESTART Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses MicroLogix 1400 should not be in the Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 executing mode and any program and files should not be in open state 313 Appendix F Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series B Controllers MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Message Function Name MicroLogix Description Type Code 1400 Support Request 14 OxOE FC WARM RESTART No MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 15 OxOF FC INITIALIZE DATA No Obsolete Request 16 0x10 FC INITIALIZE APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Clears fault and changes the controller mode to Remote Program See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 294 Request 17 0x11 FC START APPL Yes M
189. Number 0 Critical FCs File Number 0 0 0x00 optional 1 0x01 optional 2 0x02 critical optional 3 0x04 critical optional 4 0x04 critical optional 5 0x05 critical optional 6 0x06 critical optional 7 0x07 optional 8 0x08 optional 9 0x09 optional 10 0x0A optional 11 0x0B 12 0x0C 13 0x0D critical optional 14 0 0 critical optional Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 219 Appendix F 220 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Function Code Critical FCs File Number 0 Critical FCs File Number 0 15 0 0 N A N A 16 0x10 critical optional 17 0x11 critical optional 18 0x12 critical optional 19 0x13 N A N A 20 0x14 critical optional 21 0x15 critical optional 22 0x16 23 0x17 optional 24 0x18 critical optional 25 0x19 optional 26 0 1 optional 21 0x1B optional 28 0x1C optional 29 0x1D critical optional 30 0 1 optional 31 0x1F critical optional 32 0x20 N A N A 33 0x21 N A N A 129 0x81 optional 130 0x82 optional 131 0x83 N A N A Expected Session Key Change Interval x1 s in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This parameter is used for configuring the expected session key change interval in seconds The valid range is 0 7200 2
190. OHH Cfg EHET Cfg IFENET Cfg is selected press the OK key Otherwise select ENET Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key The Ethernet Configuration screen is displayed Press the OK key on the LCD Status menu 000000 ENET Cfg Status IP Address Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 95 Chapterb Using the LCD 5 When an IP address is not yet assigned to your controller only the MAC address that is assigned to your controller represented as XXXXXXXXXXXX below is displayed MAC address is a 12 digit hexadecimal number Your controller ships with a unique MAC address assigned in the factory You can identify che MAC address of your controller by opening the expansion module cover on your controller 00000 HEHUTE Hode bootp tert tata tatatatatatate 6 When an IP address is assigned to your controller both the MAC and IP addresses of your controller are displayed as shown below In this example the MAC address is represented as XXXXXXXXXXXX The IP address is represented as xxx xxx xxx xxx where each xxx is a decimal number between 0 255 ENET Mode bootp HAC AARNA 7 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 2 Configuring the IP Address The IP Address screen of the LCD displays Etherne
191. OOTP request message containing its hardware address over the local network or subnet The BOOTP server compares the hardware address with the addresses in its look up table The BOOTP server sends a message back to the processor with the IP address and other network information that corresponds to the hardware address it received With all hardware and IP addresses in one location you can easily change IP addresses in the BOOTP configuration file if your network needs to be changed The BOOTP request can be disabled by clearing the Enable parameter in the channel configuration file When both BOOTP Enable and DHCP are cleared disabled the MicroLogix 1400 uses the existing channel configuration data IMPORTANT If BOOTP is disabled or no BOOTP server exists on the network you must use RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software to enter change the IP address for each processor or you must use DHCP instead of it Using the Rockwell Automation BOOTP DHCP Utility The Rockwell Automation BOOTP DHCP server utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BOOTP software with a user friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro installation CD Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 337 Appendix Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface The newest version of the utility can be downloaded from http w
192. Only 24V DC 1596 10 Class 2 On state voltage drop at max load current at max surge current Current rating per point 1V DC 2 5V DC Not Applicable Not Applicable max load See graphs above 100 mA min load 1 0 mA 20 mA max leakage 1 0 mA 1 0mA Surge current per point peak current 40A Not Applicable max surge duration 10 ms Not Applicable max rate of repetition at 30 86 F max rate of repetition at 60 C 140 F Once every second Once every 2 Not Applicable Not Applicable seconds Turn On Time maximum 11 us 28 ns Turn Off Time maximum 89 us 2 3 1 Output 2 3 and 4 are designed to provide increased functionality over the oth er FET outputs Output 2 3 and 4 may be used like the other FET transistor outputs but in addition within a limited current range they may be operated at a higher speed Output 2 3 and 4 also provide a pulse train outpu output PWM function Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 PTO or pulse width modulation 131 AppendixA Specifications AC Input Filter Settings Nominal Filter Setting ms ON Delay ms OFF Delay ms High Speed DC Input Filter Settings Inputs 0 to 11 Nominal Filter Setting ms ON Delay ms OFF Delay ms Maximum Counter Frequency Hz 50 Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum peers 0 005 0 001 0 005
193. P3 The maximum file size is 384 Kbytes The MicroLogix 1400 supports uploading of user programs up to 256Kbyte in size when Recipe is not configured When Recipe is configured Maximum file size is 384 Kbytes The first application segment of the ladder program should be larger than or equal to the size of System Exe File structure 64 bytes An application segment of the ladder program cannot be exceed 2048 bytes Rules for Initializing a User Program A DNP3 master should send the function code DELETE FILE 27 for initializing user programs When MicroLogix 1400 receives a request with the function code DELETE FILE 27 it clears the current user program which was downloaded into the controller and restores the default user program User programs cannot be initialized while the controller is in Executing mode Before initializing programs a mode change request should be sent with the function code STOP APPL 18 Rules for uploading Communication Status Files A DNP3 master should send the function code OPEN FILE 25 READ 1 and CLOSE FILE 26 for uploading Communication Status Files The function code WRITE 2 for downloading Communication Status Files is not supported The file name should be DIAG CH0 CSF DIAG CH1 ESF and DIAG CH2 CSF for Channel 0 Channel 1 and Channel 2 respectively Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network This section covers how to change the controller
194. P3 0 NO ERROR No error found in the Application Layer Slave 1 FC CANNOT BROADCAST Reserved 2 FC NOT SUPPORTED The received packet has unsupported Function Code 3 OBJ NOT SUPPORTED The received packet has unsupported object s 4 BAD REQUEST LENGTH Reserved 5 CONFIGURATION ERROR The error was caused by the invalid configuration during packet generating F g invalid Data Set Configuration 6 BAD PARAMETER The received packet has invalid parameters except Function Code and Object Codes E g invalid Qualifier codes 7 BAD FILE TYPE The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Type specified 8 BAD FILE NUMBER The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Number specified 9 BAD DNP3 ADDRESS The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Number specified 10 TABLE WRITE PROTECTED The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be written 11 TABLE ACCESS DENIED The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be read or written 12 TABLE OWNERSHIP ERROR The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be read or written If an error code is within 6 to 12 related file number and element number are shown in word 64 and 65 61 Application Layer Error Count 62 Function Code that ca
195. P3 protocol Any changes in the DNP3 Slave configuration tab will affect all channels Channel 0 and Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration Parameters Driver This selection should be set to DNP3 Slave to communicate with DNP3 protocol 204 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Node Address This value is a node address of this DNP3 Slave The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 1 Baud The selections can be 38 4 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 and 300 Default selection is 19200 Parity The selections be EVEN and ODD Default selection is NONE Stop Bits The selections can be 1 1 5 and 2 Default selection is 1 Enable Master Address Validation Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests from any DNP3 Master When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests only from the DNP3 Master which is configured in the Master 4 0 to Master Node4 The maximum number of Master Node Addresses for the Master Address Validation is 5 Enable Self Address Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When this bit is Disabled Unchecked any packe
196. Point Analog Output Object are configured the index numbers will be 16 bit Analog Output Object From 0 to 9 32 bit Analog Output Object From 10 to 19 Short Hoating Point Analog Output Object From 20 to 29 As an example 16 bit 32 bit and Short Floating Point Analog Output Object Files are configured as below Data File N17 has 10 elements L18 has 10 elements and F19 has 10 elements accordingly A total of 30 Analog Output Object index are configured Index 0 of the Analog Output Object is N17 0 Index 10 is L18 0 Index 20 is F19 0 and Index 29 is F19 9 Radix Decimal m Symbol Columns 10 i Properties Usage Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F 3 Data File L18 dec 32bits Analog Output Object File x Symbol Columns 5 Hn s rn Desc m Properties Usage Help Symbol Columns 5 X Desc pre ae F19 Properties Usage Help Analog Output Command Control analog output block AOB When the controller is in Non Executing mode the MicroLogix 1400 will not accept an Analog Output Command The MicroLogix 1400 returns a Control Status Code 7 in the response To access the objects 41 AOB the controller mode should be in Executing mode Note that Executing mode includes Run R
197. RELEASE Firmware use only 19 29 Reserved 30 ERR CONN REJECTED Incoming Connection is rejected by the IP address validation 31 ERR INVALID HEADER CRC Received packet header has invalid CRC 32 ERR INVALID HEADER Received packet header has invalid packet format 33 ERR INVALID PACKET CRC Received packet has invalid CRC 34 ERR BAD PACKET RECEIVED Received packet is unknown 35 ERR PACKET REJECTED Received packet is rejected 36 ERR CONNECTION BROKEN The connection has been broken for some reason 37 49 Reserved 50 ERR_INVALID_IP_ADDRESS Target IP Address is invalid 51 ERR_INVALID_PORT Target Port Number is invalid 52 Reserved For the elements of the DNP3 Slave Application Layer diagnostic counter element offset 60 to 74 the counter values available with the structured display in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software as below 3 Channel Status E 10 x Status 101 Channel 0 Channel 1 Application Layer Error Code I Application Layer Error Count FClasterror 0 Last Trans lINinresponse 0 Data file Num last error request Data element Num last error request Transport Layer Error Code 0 Transport Layer Error Count Clear Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Res Response 3 Channel 2 DNP3 Slave Application Layer Received Confirm FC Counter 0 1 Received Read FC I Received Writ
198. S 485 built in AIC SLC 5 04 DH 485 Network B icroLogix 1000 icroLogix 1400 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix SLC 5 04 DH Network Personal Computer SLC 5 04 PLC 5 44608 Example DH 485 Connections The following network diagrams provide examples of how to connect MicroLogix controllers to the DH 485 network You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your DH 485 network directly without using a RS 232 to RS 485 converter and optical isolator such as the Advanced Interface Converter AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown in the illustrations below because Channel 0 has isolation and RS 485 built in However you may need to use an AIC to connect Channel 2 of the MicroLogix 1400 controller to a DH 485 network For more information on the AIC see the Advanced Interface Converter and DeviceNet Interface Installation Instructions Publication 1761 5 11 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 193 Appendix Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface DH 485 Network with wea Controller AIC AIC fie E PanelView zd 3 LJ SLC 5 04 DH 485 Network AIC AIC
199. See the table below to configure the subnet mask and gateway address fields for each controller via your programming software This field Specifies Configure by doing the following Subnet Mask The controllers subnet mask Enter an address of the following form The subnet mask is used to interpret IP a b c d Where a b c d are between 0 255 decimal addresses when the internet is divided into If your network is not divided into subnets then leave the subnet mask field at the subnets default If you change the default and need to reset it type 0 0 0 0 Gateway Address The IP address of the gateway that provides a Enter an address of the following form connection to another IP network a b c d Where a b c d are between 0 255 decimal This field is required when you communicate The default address is No Gateway with other devices not on a local subnet Micro Log ix 1400 Embedded MicroLogix 1400 controllers include not only the embedded web server which allows viewing of module information TCP IP configuration and diagnostic Web Server Capab i ity information but the capabilities that also allow viewing of the data file via Ethernet using a standard web browser Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 341 Appendix Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface For more information on MicroLogix 1400 embedded web server capability refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Embedded Web Serve
200. Short Floating Point Analog Input Object File Analog Output Object 16bit and 32bit Analog Output Object File and Short Floating Point Analog Output Object File Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 233 AppendixF MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 For the MicroLogix 1400 Series A controllers Channel Configur ation Eg Generel CharrelC Channe 1 Channel Data Link Laver Channel for Unsolciled Response chano Ma Acelication Laver z Eneble Unsolicited On Stait Up Sendiritial U nsoicited Start Up Eneble Unsolciled Fer Class pant Enable Unsolciled Fer Clare2 i T Eneble Unsolciled Fer Class3 T 55 Max Responce Size 745 rime Synchronization Interval fel mins 0 Corfrmetion Timeout x1 ma 10000 Number of Ratiiee Number o Class Events 0 Held Time alter Dassi Everts xi s 5 Number 2 Events fi o Hold Time alte Class2 Events x1 5 Number Class3 Events 1 0 Hald Time aite Class3 Events x1 s Selec Timeout x1 s in GROUPS DMP3 Obiect Dita File Number ect Corfia File Number Binary Inot fio Binsy nput 32 Binary Quat n Courter 12 Courter 32615 13 Analog 16615 Binary Output Frozen Counter 16bts 3 Frozen Counter 32605 5 Analog 1 bits Analog Inout 32bts 37 Analog Input 32615 15 Analog Input Shor
201. TE All dimensions are in mm A 404 inches Hole spacing tolerance 165 mm 6 497 in 153 44568 0 4 mm 0 016 in Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 25 Chapter2 Install Your Controller Connecting Expansion 0 The expansion I O module is attached to the controller or another I O module y means of a flat ribbon cable after mounting as shown below Jy 4 Use the pull loop on the connector to disconnect modules Do not pull on the ribbon cable 44975 TIP Up to seven expansion 1 0 modules can be connected to a controller ATTENTION Remove power before removing or inserting an 1 0 module When you remove or insert a module with power applied an electrical arc may occur An electrical arc can cause personal injury or property damage by e sending an erroneous signal to your system s field devices causing the controller to fault e causing an explosion in a hazardous environment Electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance reducing product reliability WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD A In Class Division 2 applications the bus connector must be fully seated and the bus connector cover must be snapped in place In Class Division 2 applications all modules must be mounted in direct contact with each other as shown on page 26 If DIN rail mounting is used a
202. TION Always connect the CHS GND chassis ground A terminal to the nearest earth ground This connection must be made whether or not an external 24V DC supply is used Power Options Below are two options for powering the AIC Use the 24V DC user power supply built into the MicroLogix 1000 1200 or 1500 controller The AIC is powered through a hard wired connection using a communication cable 1761 CBL HM02 or equivalent connected to port 2 e Use an external DC power supply with the following specifications operating voltage 24V DC 15 20 output current 150 m minimum Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Communication Connections Chapter 4 rated NEC Class 2 Make a hard wired connection from the external supply to the screw terminals on the bottom of the AIC ATTENTION If you use an external power supply it must be 24V A DC 15 20 Permanent damage results if miswired with the wrong power source Connecting to DeviceNet You can connect MicroLogix 1400 as a slave to a DeviceNet network using the DeviceNet Interface DNI catalog number 1761 NET DNI For additional information on using the DNI refer to the DeviceNet Interface User Manual publication 1761 UM005 The following figure shows the external wiring connections of the DNI DeviceNet Node Port 1 zd Es Replacement connector gt 2 part no 1761 RPL RTOO 9 A DANGER Use
203. Type Point NONE v FileNumber D Point Index File Element MicroLogix Data File File Sub Element o Cancel Descriptor Code NONE NAME DAEL PTYP Data Type Code NONE VSTR UINT INT FLT OSTR BSTR TIME Max Data Length bytes 0 255 Ancillary Value Any string This can be a binary array or ASCII string up to 16 words Point Addressing under Descriptor Element Configuration Data Set value for each Data Set element is configured by Point Address Type Point Type Point Index 268 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F File Number File Element File Sub Element When these values are configured properly according to the supported data files the MicroLogix 1400 responds with a g87v1 object filled with the value in the data file The following table shows the supported data files for the Point Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point Addressing Data Type Maximum Data Point Type Point Index Low Byte Point Index High Byte Code Length bytes NONE 0 0 NONE 0 0 No point type is associated NONE 0 0 BI 1 Binary input 0 to Maximum 4095 UINT 2 0 1 2 or 4 When the Data Types other than OSTR and BSTR are used the INT 3 0 1 2 or 4 Point Index must be set to a point offset that is divisib
204. UM001H EN P May 2014 29 Chapter3 X Wire Your Controller used See for recommended suppressors As shown below these surge suppression circuits connect directly across the load device 24V DC VAC DC u Ro Relay or Solid State DC Outputs A IN4004 Diode A surge suppressor 24V DC common can also be used C E co Du N E Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive AC load devices include a varistor an RC network or an Allen Bradley surge suppressor all shown below These components must be appropriately rated to suppress the switching transient characteristic of the particular inductive device See Recommended Surge Suppressors on page 30 for recommended suppressors Surge Suppression tor Inductive AC Load Devices o Output Device Output Device Output Device Surge Suppressor Varistor RC Network Recommended Surge Suppressors Use the Allen Bradley surge suppressors shown in the following table for use with relays contactors and starters Recommended Surge Suppressors Device Coil Voltage Suppressor Catalog Number Type Bulletin 100 104K 700K 24 48V AC 100 KFSC50 RC 10 220 AC 10050 380 480V AC 100 KFSC480 12 55 VAC 12 77V DC 100 KFSV55 MOV 56 136 VAC 78 180VDC 100KFSVIS8 137 277V AC 181 250 V DC 100 KFSV277 12 250V DC 100 KFSD250 Diode
205. Up eer ERRAT 360 Duplicate IP address 361 Configuring the Ethernet Channel on the MicroLogix 1400 362 Configuration Using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Programming Saltwater guo uet a cias eu AL E ol oT all ci M 364 Configuration Via DOO EP 364 Using the Rockwell Automation BOOTP DHCP Utility 365 Using a DHCP Server To Configure Your 367 Using Subnet Masks and Gateways 368 Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Controllers on Re OU OU RON AME wen ea eeu 369 MicroLogix 1400 Embedded Web Server Capability 369 Appendix H System Loading Calculations even ee ther Tora rrr Rev EE 371 System Loading Example Calculations 372 System Loading ELSE 373 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN E May 2014 xi Table of Contents Current Loading ss veces vex ocurre a Tm uel nce erg nts 373 Calculating Heat 1 5 tona epe 375 Glossary Index xii Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN E May 2014 Who Should Use this Manual Purpose of this Manual Preface Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual It provides information concerning who should use this manual the purpose of this manual related documentation
206. User Info Config File Number 0 Diagnostic File Number 0 Analog Input 226 T5 pisces 15 2000 s Analog Output Short Fling fs Small BCD n a T D Threshold Deadband OL OnLine OffLine lo fo Cancel vp Hep Each of the data files fora DNP3 Object will have a file number in the user memory as shown below You can configure the Data file number for each DNP3 Object in the DNP3 Slave tab of the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration File types for this object file can be Binary Integer Long or Float data files The file numbers for each DNP3 Object cannot be in conflict with each other Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 235 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Data Files Relationship between DNP3 object database and MicroLogix data files DNP Objects Micrologix Data Files Object Name Related Maximum File name for Data File Type File Maximum Groups Configurable Number Configurable Index Elements Binary Input Object 1 2 4096 Binary Input Object File Only B file 3 910255 256 Bit Binary Input 3 4 2048 Double Bit Binary Input Object File Only B file 3 9 255 256 Binary Output Object 10 12 4096 Binary Input Object File Only B file 3 9to255 256 Counter Object 20 22 256 16 bit Counter Object File Only N file
207. User Manual Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Bulletin 1766 Controllers 1762 Expansion 1 0 Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or
208. a User Program via DNP3 317 Default Directories and Files 318 Generating IMG files using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro 318 Rules for File Authentication eese 320 Rules for Downloading a User Program 321 Rules for Uploading a User Program 322 Rules for Initializing a User 1 324 Rules for uploading Communication Status Files 324 Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 NOE d tco re xu tot adult eod run deut 324 Initialize User Program 325 Start User Programi 325 Stop User Program isss heses e aa 325 Diagnostics TID 326 Diagnostics for Ethernet Channel Channel 1 332 Diagnostics for Secure Authentication 339 D ncHomCOdesoss vod oit ois oca eds teat bae 341 Implementation Table CCo du haod ce uec oet dc LM 344 Appendix G MicroLogix 1400 Controllers and Ethernet Communication 355 MicroLogix 1400 Performance 356 MicroLogix 1400 and PC Connections to the Ethernet Network 357 Ethernet Network Topology iei 357 Connecting an Ethernet switch on the Ethernet Network 357 A ee eat oh te ned ee ate Mer oe 358 Ethernet Cohtie C ODSc ecce e Da
209. able Time Synchronization On Start Up Only Only valid when Enable Time Synchronization On Start Up Only is Disabled Unchecked The valid range is 0 32767 Default value is 0 As longas it is set for greater than 0 the NEED_TIME Internal Indication IIN1 4 bit will be set at startup and then after every Time Synchronization Interval minutes When the parameter Enable Time Synchronization On Start Up Only is Disabled Unchecked and the parameter Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins is configured to 0 IIN 1 4 bit is never turned on Max Response Size The MicroLogix 1400 sends Application Layer frame to fit in Max Response Size If the Response packet size is larger than this value the MicroLogix 1400 fragments the Response packet The valid range is 27 2048 in bytes Default value is 2048 Confirmation Timeout x7 ms When Enable Confirmation is enabled the MicroLogix 1400 waits for Application Layer Confirmation until the Confirmation Timeout x1 ms has expired The valid range is 100 65535 in 1 ms increments Default value is 10000 Number of Retries This parameter is only for Unsolicited Response If this value has the maximum which is 65535 it means infinite retries of the Unsolicited Response Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 215 Appendix F 216 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 Number of Class1 Events If
210. acceptable empty rectangle on Battery low solid rectangle U DISP of Default display mode 158 empty rectangle on solid rectangle Customized display mode Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Troubleshooting Your System Appendix C When using a MicroLogix 1400 controller the DCOMM LED applies only to Channel 0 1 0 Status Indicators on the LCD Figure 5 1 0 Status Indicators on the LCD 1 0 LED screen on the LCD 000000 RU I Sala ces ses Input status indicators 20 Output status indicators 12 Indicator Color Indicates INPUTS of Input is not energized empty rectangle on Input is energized terminal status solid rectangle OUTPUTS of Output is not energized empty rectangle on Output is engerized logic status solid rectangle 1 To view the status inputs and outputs on the LCD you need to enter the I O LED mode screen using the LCD menu See 1 0 Status on page 5 67 for more information Normal Operation The POWER and RUN LEDs are On If forcing is enabled and forces are installed in I O force files the FORCE LED turns on and remains on until all forces are removed And if forcing is disabled and forces are installed in I O force files the FORCE LED flashes and remains flashing until forces are removed from I O force files Error Conditions Ifan error exists within the controller the controller LEDs
211. age 100 240 AC 15 10 at 47 63 Hz 24V DC 15 10 Class 2 SELV Heat dissipation See System Loading and Heat Dissipation on page 343 Power supply inrush current 120V AC 25 A for 8 ms 24V DC 240V AC 40 A for 4 ms 15 A for 20 ms Power consumption 100 VA 120 VA 7 5 53W 24V DC sensor power none 24V DC at 250 mA none 400 uF max Input circuit type Digital 120V AC Digital 24V DC sink source Digital 24V DC Analog 0 10V DC standard and high speed Analog 0 0V DC sink source standard and high speed Analog 0 10V DC Output circuit type Relay Relay FET Relay life Electrical 2 x 10 operations min 2 5 A 250V AC 30V DC Enclosure type rating Terminal screw torque None open style 0 791 Nm 7 0 Ib in rated Specifications for Inputs Description 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BWA A 1766 L32BXB A Inputs 0 through 11 Inputs 12 and higher 12 high speed DC inputs 8 standard DC inputs On state voltage range 79 132 VAC 4 5 24V DC 10 24V DC 4 5 26 4V DC 10 at 60 C 140 F 10 26 4V 10 at 60 C 140 F 4 5 30V DC 42596 at 30 C 86 F 10 30V DC 42596 at 30 C 86 F Off state voltage range 0 20V AC 0 1 5V DC 0 5V DC Operating frequency 47 63 Hz 0 Hz 100 kHz 0 Hz 1 kHz scan time dependent On state current Mininum 9 0 mA Q 79 V AC 7 0 mA 4 5V DC 3 0 mA Q 10V DC ominal 12 mA Q 120 V
212. ailure The time value in the embedded RTC module of the MicroLogix 1400 controller is updated by an RTC Function file every 2 seconds This resolution is insufficient to log DNP3 events in a DNP3 subsystem Another timer incremented by 1 millisecond in the DNP3 Slave subsystem serves to provide appropriate resolution These two timers are synchronized by the following conditions e power up arequest for time synchronization from DNP3 Master At power up the DNP3 subsystem gets the time from an RTC function file in the MicroLogix 1400 For the RTC function file to acquire the correct time the RTC module should be enabled before a power cycle to acquire the correct time from the RTC function file In this example RTC function file the RTC module is disabled To enable it click Set Date amp Time while it is online 3 Function Files DE x HSC PTOX PwMx sti Jen ATC ico ww cso cle Dayo Week Dec DD MM vvvv 0080 REX YR Y Date 0 6 Me H MON Month HH 55 Day Time 0 0 H HR Hour MIN Minute SEC Second H DOW Day Of The Week DS Disabled L BL ATC Battery is Low Disable Clock When there is a write request for time synchronization from a DNP3 Master DNP3 subsystem synchronizes its timer with the time from DNP3 Master and the time in RTC module is synchronized with the time
213. alid Qualifier codes 7 BAD_FILE_TYPE The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Type specified 8 BAD_FILE_NUMBER The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Number specified 9 BAD_DNP3_ADDRESS The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Number specified 10 TABLE_WRITE_PROTECTED The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be written 11 TABLE_ACCESS_DENIED The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be read or written 12 TABLE_OWNERSHIP_ERROR The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be read or written If an error code is within 6 to 12 related file number and element number are shown in word 59 and 60 56 CS0 56 CS2 56 Application Layer Error Count 57 CS0 57 CS2 57 Function Code that caused the last error 58 CS0 58 CS2 58 Last Transmitted in the response 59 CS0 59 CS2 59 Data file number of last error request 60 CS0 60 CS2 60 Data element number of last error request 61 CS0 61 CS2 61 Received Confirm Function Code Counter 62 CS0 62 CS2 62 Received Read Function Code Counter 63 CS0 63 CS2 63 Received Write Function Code Counter 64 CS0 64 CS2 64 Received Etc Function Code Counter 65 CS0 65 CS2 65 Transmitted Solicited Response Function Code Counter 66 CS0 66 CS2 66 Transmitted Unsolicited Response Function Code Counter 67 CS0 67 CS2 6
214. alog Input 16 bit without 1 read 00 01 start stop 29 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 30 5 Analog Input Single prec flt pt 1 read 00 01 start stop 29 response 00 01 start stop with flag 06 no range or all 32 0 Analog Input Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 32 1 Analog Input Event 32 bi 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 17 28 index without time 07 08 limited qty 30 unsol resp 32 2 Analog Input Event 16 bi 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 17 28 index without time 07 08 limited qty 30 unsol resp 32 3 Analog Input Event 32 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 17 28 index ime 07 08 limited qty 30 unsol resp 32 4 Analog Input Event 16 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 17 28 index ime 07 08 limited qty 30 unsol resp 32 5 Analog Input Event Single prec 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 17 28 index It pt without time 07 08 limited qty 30 unsol resp 32 7 Analog Input Event Single prec 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 17 28 index It pt with time 07 08 limited qty 30 unsol resp 40 0 Analog Output Status Any 1 read 00 01 start stop Variation 06 no range or all 40 1 Analog Output Status 32 bit 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag 06 no range or all 40 2 Analog Output Status
215. an still perform the IP configuration using Static BOOTP or DHCP settings Once the IP configuration is done it is used throughout the firmware upgrade process Ifthe IP configuration has been done the IP address may be read from the processor when online with RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro In the Channel Configuration dialog box select the Chan 1 System tab or use the LCD IFBOOTP DHCP Enable is selected and if the IP Address is 0 0 0 0 then note the Ethernet Hardware Address which begins with 00 00 BC 3 The controller should be in Program mode before you start the firmware upgrade access the Mode Switch from the LCD See Using the Mode Switch on page 86 for information about controller modes and how to use the Mode Switch See Viewing Ethernet Status on page 94 to find how to browse for the controller s IP address Using ControlFLASH for Firmwar r Un ee Upg ade ATTENTION Do not interrupt the flash procedure once you have A begun to download the firmware If the flash procedure is interrupted the controller will be in a Missing or Corrupt OS state on the next power up To recover the controller from a missing corrupt OS state see Missing or Corrupt OS state on page 181 1 Launch the ControlFLASH application under Programs Flash Programming Tools If the Ethernet connection IP configuration has not been established attach an Ethernet cable to the controller from your computer or a hub and ensure that the
216. and close the file without saving Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC ACTIVATE CONFIG FC Byte Ox1F 31 Activate Config This function code is used to begin using the configuration or executable code specified by the objects included in the request This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC AUTHENTICATION REQUEST FC Byte 0x20 32 Authentication Request The master uses this function code when sending authentication messages to the MicroLogix 1400 that require a response This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC AUTHENTICATION REQUEST NR FC Byte 0x21 33 Authentication Request No Resp This function code is used by the master to send authentication messages when no return response is required This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC RESPONSE FC Byte 0x81 129 Response responses except for Unsolicited Response messages use this function code FC UNSOLICITED RESPONSE FC Byte 0x82 130 Unsolicited Response Unsolicited Responses always use this function code regardless of which DNP3 objects are included FC_AUTHENTICATION_RESPONSE FC Byte 0x83 131 Authentication Response This function code is used to issue authentication messages to the master This applies only to MicroLogix 140
217. and has appropriate message Up date Status Catalog Number Senal Number N A Current Revision N A New Revision N A B If the following dialog box appears it indicates that the controller ended up in a Missing Corrupt OS state The current revision number reflects the version of Boot Firmware To recover the controller from this state see Recovering from Missing or Corrupt OS State on page 182 Update Status Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Current Revision 4 1 1 New Revision 4 20 d 178 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Appendix D 18 Click the OK button You are returned to the Welcome to ControlFLASH dialog box Welcome to ControlFi ASH Welcome to ControFLASH the firmware update tool ContioFLASH needs the following information from you betore it can begn updating a device Control 1 The Catalog Number of the taiget device Z The Network Confiquration parameters optional 3 The Network Path to the larget device A The Firmware Revision lor this update one 19 You can continue to upgrade additional controllers by clicking the Next button or exit the program by clicking the Cancel button If you click cancel you are asked to verify that you want to end the update session ControlFLASH Are you sure you want to end this ControlFLASH session 9 C
218. apter 3 Wire Types and Sizes Solid wire Cu 90 C 194 F 14 22 AWG Stranded wire Cu 90 C 194 F 16 22 AWG Wiring torque 0 791Nm 7 in Ib rated Output Terminal Grouping Outputs Output Terminal Controllers Output Group Description Voltage Terminal 1766 L32BWA Group 0 Isolated relay output VAC DCO OUT 0 1766 L32BWAA Group 1 Isolated relay output VAC DC1 OUT 1 Group 2 Isolated relay output VAC DC2 OUT 2 Group 3 Isolated relay output VAC DC3 OUT 3 Group 4 Isolated relay output VAC DC4 OUT 4 OUT5 Group 5 Isolated relay output VAC DC5 OUT 6 OUT 7 Group 6 Isolated relay output VAC DC6 OUT 8 11 1766 L32AWA Group 0 Isolated relay output VAC DCO OUT 0 1766 L32AWAA Group 1 Isolated relay output VAC DC1 OUT 1 Group 2 Isolated relay output VAC DC2 OUT 2 Group 3 Isolated relay output VAC DC3 OUT 3 Group 4 Isolated relay output VAC DC4 OUT 4 OUT5 Group 5 Isolated relay output VAC DC5 OUT 6 OUT 7 Group 6 Isolated relay output VAC DC6 OUT 8 11 1766 L32BXB Group 0 Isolated relay output VAC DCO OUT 0 1766 L32BXBA Group 1 Isolated relay output VAC DC1 OUT 1 Group 2 FET output VDC2 COM 2 OUT 2 7 Group 3 Isolated relay output VAC DC3 OUT 8 Group 4 Isolated relay output VAC DC4 OUT 9 Group 5 Isolated relay output VAC DC5 OUT 10 OUT 11 WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause
219. ar until a reply has been received BOOTP lets you dynamically assign IP Addresses to processors on the Ethernet Link To use BOOTP a BOOTP Server must exist on the local Ethernet subnet The server is a computer that has BOOTP Server software installed and reads a text file containing network information for individual nodes on the network Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Appendix The host systems BOOTP configuration file must be updated to service requests from MicroLogix 1400 controllers The following parameters must be configured Configuration Parameters Parameter Description IP Address A unique IP Address for the MicroLogix 1400 controller Subnet Mask Specifies the net and local subnet mask as per the standard on subnetting RFC 950 Internet Standard Subnetting Procedure Gateway Specifies the IP address of a gateway on the same subnet as the MicroLogix 1400 that provides connections to another IP network TIP You can use any commercially available BOOTP server If you do not have BOOTP Server capabilities on your network and you want to dynamically configure Channel 1 you can download the free Rockwell Automation BOOTP server from the Rockwell Automation website Go to http Avww ab com networks ethernet bootp html When is enabled the following events occur at power up The processor broadcasts a B
220. are closed when the relay is energized or the switch is activated In ladder programming a symbol that allows logic continuity flow if the referenced input is logic 1 when evaluated off delay time The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the input terminal of the controller The time is determined by circuit component delays and by any filter adjustment applied offline Describes devices not under direct communication offset The steady state deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point off state leakage current When an ideal mechanical switch is opened off state no current flows through the switch Practical semiconductor switches and the transient suppression components which are sometimes used to protect switches allow a small current to flow when the switch is in the off state This current is referred to as the off state leakage current To ensure reliable operation the off state leakage current rating of a switch should be less than the minimum operating current rating of the load that is connected to the switch on delay time The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been presented at the input terminal of the controller one shot A programming technique that sets a bit for only one program scan Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 20
221. are ignored When this bit is Enabled Checked any packets which contain the destination address 65532 FFFCh are accepted and processed Enable Access Control The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests from any DNP3 Master When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests only from the DNP3 Master IP Address which is configured in the parameters Master IP Address0 to Master IP Address The maximum number of Master IP Address for the Access Control is 5 End Point Type The valid selections are Listening Dual and Datagram Only Default is Listening End Point Type Master Node0 This value is used to validate Master node address when the Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked send Unsolicited Response when Unsolicited Response functionality is enabled An Unsolicited Response is sent out to the DNP3 Master having this address The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Master Node1 Master Node2 Master Node3 Master Node4 This value is used for validation of the Master node address when the Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked This value is only valid when the Enable Master Add
222. are used throughout this manual Refer to the Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary publication AG 7 1 for a complete guide to Allen Bradley technical terms address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location For example I 1 0 is the memory address for the data located in the Input file location word bit 0 AIC Advanced Interface Converter A device that provides a communication link between various networked devices Catalog Number 1761 NET AIC application 1 A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller 2 The use of computer or processor based routines for specific purposes baud rate The speed of communication between devices All devices must communicate at the same baud rate on a network bit The smallest storage location in memory that contains either a 1 ON ora 0 block diagrams A schematic drawing Boolean operators Logical operators such as AND OR NAND NOR NOT and Exclusive OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic statements or circuits Can have an output response of T or F branch A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program communication scan A part of the controller operating cycle Communication with other devices such as software running on a personal computer takes place Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 349 Glossary 350 controller A device such as a
223. ariation returns the Company name the Company name Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation for DNP3 253 Read Only Reserved for future assignment 254 Read Only Non specific all attributes This variable returns all of the variations in request this group except this variation 255 Read Only List of attribute variations This variation returns the R W property for each variation From g0v211 to g0v253 0 for Read Only 1 for Read or Write Event Reporting This section covers how to generate DNP3 events from DNP3 Data Objects and how to report the generated events by polled response or unsolicited response Generating Events The MicroLogix 1400 has a separate buffer area that you can use to log DNP3 events internally Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 271 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 The maximum number of the Events that can be logged is 6013 regardless of the Event data type With Series B controllers a Data Set event can consume multiple numbers of the event buffers If the number of the generated events reaches this value the MicroLogix 1400 sets IIN2 3 EVENT OVERFLOY Further events are not logged until the logged events are reported to DNP3 Master and the buffer is available The elements 0 67 or CS2 67 in the Communication status file show how many events are logged to the event buffer The logged events are not remove
224. ary Value Binary Array in hexadecimal for element 1 ASCII strings for element 2 or higher Maximum 32 bytes Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 265 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Data Set Descriptors Configuration Parameters These parameters are used to construct Data Set Descriptors objects DNP3 Data Set Descriptor 0 General 266 Number of Descriptor Elements 0 Event Occurence Condiiore fase _ Point Address Type PT FN 0 Standard DNP3 Point NONE 1 Standard DNP3 Point Trigger Event Disable Change of State Even 2 Standard DNP3 Point Standard DNP3 Point PT Point Type PI Point Index Descriptor Elemen Index f Descriptor Code DataType Code Mas Data Length butes Ancillary Value Length bytes Ancillary Value 0 NONE NONE FN File Number FE File Element FSE File Sub Element Cancel Number of Descriptor Elements 0 10 This must be the same as the number of the Descriptor elements that are configured Characteristics Used to assign characteristics to this Descriptor e RD set if data set is readable e ST set if outstation maintains static data set EV set if outstation generates data set event Event Class Used to assign Event Class to this Descriptor e 0 None e Class1 2 Class2 e 3 Class 3 Tri
225. ation 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 7 To change the HTTP setting press the Up or Down key and press the OK key to apply the change REMOTE Enabled HITP Enabled SHMP Enabled HTTP Disabl Power cyclexxx TIP To exit the Protocol Setup Menu press the ESC key on the LCD keypad at any time Using Trim Pots Trim Pot Operation The MicroLogix 1400 controller provides two trimming potentiometers trim pots POTO and POT1 which allow modification of integer data within the controller The data value of each trim pot can be used throughout the control program for timers counters analog presets depending upon the requirements of the application You can change the data value of each trim pot using the trim pot screens provided by the LCD To access to the Trim Pot Set screen which is the top screen for the trim pot functionality select trim pot Set on the LCD default menu screen as shown below and press the OK key on the LCD keypad O00000 RU bTrimPot Set System Info Fault Code Trim pot data is updated continuously whenever the controller is powered up Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 105 Chapterb Using the LCD Changing Data Value of a Trim Pot Follow these steps to change the data value of a trim pot either or POTI 1 On the Main Menu screen select trim pot Set by using
226. ation 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 71 Chapter4 Communication Connections TE 761 CBL AMOQ 1761 CBL HM02 44601 Cable Length Connections from to AIC External Power Power Selection Supply Switch Setting Required 1761 CBL AMO0 45 cm 17 7 in MicroLogix 1000 1200 or 1500 ch 0 port2 no cable CBL 2 Mei ESE to port 2 on another AIC port 2 yes external External power supply required unless the is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable V Series C or later cables are required 2 8 Dmg 1761 CBL AC00 1747 CP3 8 ue Cable Length Connections from to AIC External Power Power Supply Selection Required Switch Setting 1747 CP3 7 3 9 8 ft SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processor channel 0 port 1 yes external CBL 1 i 1761 CBL ACOO 45 cm 17 7 in PC COM port port 1 ves S PanelView 550 through NULL modem adapter port 1 yes external DTAM Plus DTAM Micro port 1 yes external Port 1 on another AIC port 1 yes external MicroLogix 1400 ch 2 port 2 yes external External power supply required unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable
227. ation of the system When these types of errors occur the system leaves the run mode of operation Critical module errors are indicated in Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF2OF2 on page 164 Module Error Definition Table Analog module errors are expressed in two fields as four digit Hex format with the most significant digit as don t care and irrelevant The two fields are Module Error and Extended Error Information The structure of the module error data is shown below Don t Care Bits Module Error Extended Error Information 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Hex Digit 4 Hex Digit 3 Hex Digit 2 Hex Digit 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 163 C Troubleshooting Your System Module Error Field The purpose of the module error field is to classify module errors into three distinct groups as described in the table below The type of error determines what kind of information exists in the extended error information field These types of module errors are typically reported in the controller s I O status file Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 for more information Module Error Types Error Type Module Error Field Value Description Bits 11 through 09 Binary No Errors 000 No error is present The extend
228. ay month Writing Data to the Real Time Clock When valid data is sent to the real time clock from the programming device or another controller the new values take effect immediately The real time clock does not allow you to load or store invalid date or time data Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 119 Chapter6 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Memory Module Operation 120 RTC Battery Operation The real time clock uses the same replaceable battery that the controller uses The RTC Function File features a battery low indicator bit RTC 0 BL which shows the status of the replacement battery When the battery is low the indicator bit is set 1 This means that the battery wire connector could be disconnected or if the battery is connected the battery may be ready to fail in the next two weeks In the latter case the replacement battery needs to be replaced with a new one When the battery low indicator bit is clear 0 the battery level is acceptable The Battery Low BAT LO indicator on the LCD display of the controller also shows the status of the replaceable battery When the battery is low the indicator is displayed as a solid rectangle When the battery level is acceptable the indicator is displayed as an empty rectangle 1 as shown below PMO RRS 000000 RU I BBOQOOOOOO0000 00020000 6123456789612 4567389 aO LIP p pb ima If the RTC batte
229. bit LSB 380 LED Light Emitting Diode 380 LIFO Last In First Out 381 link layer configuration parameters 232 lithium battery 1747 BA disposing 183 handling 181 installing 179 manufacturer 183 storing 181 transporting 181 loading communication EEPROM 138 logic 381 low byte 381 manually configuring channel 1 for controllers on subnets 369 manuals related 18 master control relay 13 emergency stop switches 14 using ANSI CSA symbols schematic 16 using IEC symbols schematic 15 Master Control Relay MCR 381 master control relay circuit periodic tests 11 memory module 2 data file protection 149 information file 150 operation 148 program and data download 150 program and data upload 150 program compare 149 program data recipe backup 149 removal installation under power 150 write protection 149 menu structure 88 menu structure tree 88 390 minimizing electrical noise 38 minimizing electrical noise on analog channels 41 mnemonic 381 Modbus communication protocol 223 mode switch 114 modem 381 modem cable constructing your own 66 modems using with MicroLogix controllers 214 modes 381 module error field 192 monitoring user defined target files 97 motor starters bulletin 509 surge suppressors 30 negative logic 381 network 381 nominal input current 381 normally closed 382 normally open 382 null modem cable 67 0 object quality flags 299 oerformance considerations 356 offline 382 offset 382 off state
230. bled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 sends Unsolicited NULL Response with RESTART IIN bit on startup Enable Confirmation Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 sends Response packets with CON bit set in its header under the following conditions only When the response has Event data When the response is multi fragment response When the Unsolicited Response is sent When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 always sends Response packets with the CON bit set in its header which causes the DNP3 Master to send replies confirming that it received each Response packet without error Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Enable Time Synchronization On Start Up Only Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked This parameter used with Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 sets IIN1 4 bit on power up and every interval configured in Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 only sets the NEED TIME Internal Indication bit IIN1 4 upon startup Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins This parameter used with En
231. blication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Specifications Appendix A Input Specifications Specification 1762 IF20F2 1762 IF4 1762 IR4 1762 IT4 Common mode rejection gt 55 dB at 50 and 60 Hz gt 55 dB at 50 and 60 Hz gt 110 dB at 50 Hz with 10 or gt 110 dB at 50 Hz with 10 or 50 Hz filter 50 Hz filter gt 110 dB at 60 Hz with 10 or gt 110 dB at 60 Hz with 10 or 60 Hz filter 60 Hz filter Non linearity in percent full 0 12 a 0 12 0 05 NA scale Typical overall accuracy 0 55 full scale at 0 32 full 30 5 C for Pt 385 NA 20 65 C 20 65 C 4 0 3 full scale at 25 C 0 24 full scale at 25 C Input impedance Voltage Terminal 200 KQ Voltage Terminal 200 KQ gt 10 MQ gt 10 MQ Current Terminal 250 Q Current Terminal 275 Current input protection 32 mA 32 mA NA NA Voltage input protection 30V 30V NA NA Channel diagnostics Over or under range or open Over or under range or open Over or under range or open Over or under range or open circuit condition by bit circuit condition by bit circuit condition by bit circuit condition by bit reporting for analog inputs reporting for analog inputs reporting for analog inputs reporting for analog inputs 1 For proper operation both the plus and minus input terminals must be within 27V 10V for 1762 IT4 of analog common Q Vom 1 Vpkpk AC 3 Vom 0 includes offset gain non lineari
232. buted Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Table 2 1 Word Offset Default Variation for the following Objects Group and Standard Alternate Default Default Variation Variations 0 Binary Input Static Object 01 1 v2 1 Binary Input Change Object g2v3 vi v2 2 Binary Output Static Object g10v2 none 3 Reserved 4 Double Bit Binary Input Static Object g3v1 v2 5 Double Bit Binary Input Change Object g4v3 v1 v2 6 16 bit Counter Static Object g20v6 v2 7 32 bit Counter Static Object g20v5 vi 8 Frozen 16 bit Counter Static Object g21v10 v2 v6 9 Frozen 32 bit Counter Static Object g21v9 v1 0 16 bit Counter Change Object g22v2 none 1 32 bit Counter Change Object g22v1 none 2 Frozen 16 bit Counter Change Object g23v2 v6 3 Frozen 32 bit Counter Change Object g23v1 v5 4 16 bit Analog Input Static Object g30v4 v2 5 32 bit Analog Input Static Object g30v3 vi 6 Short Floating Point Analog Input Static Object g30v5 none 7 16 bit Analog Input Change Object g32v2 v4 8 32 bit Analog Input Change Object g32v1 v3 9 Short Floating Point Analog Input Change Object g32v5 v7 20 16 bit Analog Output Static Object g40v2 none 21 32 bit Analog Output Static Object g40v1 none 22 Short Floating Point Analog Output Static Object g40v3 none 23 Reserved 24 Reserved 25 Reserved 26 Small BCD Object g101v1 none 27 Reserved 28 Reserved 29 Reserved 30 Reserved 31 Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 225 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Net
233. cation 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 16 1762 108 Wiring Diagram DC sinking DC sourcing A IN 0 T mast NA IN 2 3 24V DC wes IN 4 r IN 5 Lu IN 6 SACS 7 DC ea a n COM Common connected DC sinking y internally DC sourcing DC em COM SS 44571 Figure 17 1762 1016 Wiring Diagram DC Sinking oe DC Sourcing INO IN 2 Ho rs INS 240 t M gt 5 IN 6 Hos ot A IN 7 DC DC Sinking COM 0 DC Sourcing DC Sinking DC Sourcing A To SET 7 o DC Sinking DC Sourcing 44572 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 43 Chapter3 Wire Your Controller Figure 18 1762 1032T Wiring Diagram DC DC DC sourcing COM 1 DC sourcing COM 3 DC sinking DC DC sinking DC COM 1 COM 3 N16 IN 1 9 7 IN 17 u um IN2 7 1 N18 7 3 7 7 1 24avDC 19 2 7 N4 re N20 5 Na re N22 22 DC sourcing V IN DC sourcing V N23 Lm DC sinking DC sinking DC sinking DC sinking
234. cations with the processor and try the program download again The only other way to remove program ownership is to cycle power on the processor Using Modems with MicroLogix Programmable Controllers The types of modems you can use with MicroLogix controllers include the following dial up phone modems A MicroLogix controller on the receiving end of the dial up connection can be configured for DF1 Full Duplex protocol with or without handshaking The modem connected to the MicroLogix controller should support auto answer The MicroLogix 1400 supports ASCII out communications Therefore it can cause a modem to initiate or disconnect a phone call e leased line modems Leased line modems are used with dedicated phone lines that are typically leased from the local phone company The dedicated lines may be in a point to point topology supporting Full Duplex communications between two modems or in a multi drop topology supporting Half Duplex communications between three or more modems radio modems Radio modems may be implemented in a point to point topology supporting either Half Duplex or Full Duplex communications or in a multi drop topology supporting Half Duplex communications between three or more modems MicroLogix 1400 also supports DF1 Radio Modem protocol Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 DH 485 Communication Protocol Connecting to Networks RS 232 RS 485 Interface Appendix E line d
235. ckwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 Using Menus to Choose Values Press To Go to next menu level Store your entry Apply the changes 44614 Go to previous menu level Cancel your entry since the last Ok Press repeatedly to go to the main menu 44615 Change menu item Change value Change position Selecting Between Menu Items Cursor up or down Apply or Enter Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 LILIEIEIEIE RU I O Status Hon itor ing Hode Switch The symbol le is used as the cursor 65 Chapter5 Using the LCD Cursor Display HU 000000 I O Status bHonitoring Mode Switch There are two different cursor types Selection cursor the symbol je is displayed left to the selected item e Move cursor with the up down arrows Full block navigation is shown as a flashing block Change position with left right arrows Change values with up down arrows Kris HE 83 0 0 Radix Binary Symbol Columns zl Desc B3 Properties Usage Help 66 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 Setting Values Data File bin BINARY se TEE epee Se ee 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 Change value up down arrows
236. configuring channel 1 and e be sure the BOOTP enable field is disabled have a network with subnets use your programming software to enter the subnet mask and gateway address using BOOTP to configure channel 1 e be sure BOOTP is enabled and have a network with subnets e include the subnet mask s and gateway address es Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Appendix Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Controllers on Subnets If you are manually configuring channel 1 for a MicroLogix 1400 controller located on a subnet deselect both of the BOOTP Enable and DHCP Enable options by clicking on the checked box as shown in the figure below Channel Configuration General Channel Channel 1 Channel 2 Driver Hardware Address 929293953 Network Link ID 0 IP ddress 192 168 0 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address User Provided Web Pages Starting Data File Number 0 Number of Pages 1 Default Domain Name Primary Name Server Secondary Name Server Protocol Control BOOTP Enable DHCP Enable Msg Connection Timeout 1ms 15000 SNMP Server Enable SMTP Client Enable Msg Reply Timeout x 1mS 2000 HTTP Server Enable Inactivity Timeout Min 30 Auto Negotiate Port Setting 1071 00 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex Contact Location
237. controller 3 Start the Firmware upgrade as explained in Using ControlFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 169 182 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 RS 232 Communication Interface RS 485 Communication Interface DF1 Full Duplex Protocol Appendix E Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface The following protocols are supported from the RS 232 485 combo communication channel Channel 0 and the RS 232 communication channel Channel 2 e DFI1 Full Duplex Half Duplex Master Slave DFI Radio Modem DH 485 Modbus RTU Master Slave e ASCII e Slave The communications port on Channel 0 of the MicroLogix 1400 controller utilizes a combined isolated RS 232 485 interface RS 232 and RS 485 are Electronics Industries Association EIA standards that specify the electrical and mechanical characteristics for serial binary communication They provide a variety of system configuration possibilities RS 232 and RS 485 define electrical connection characteristics 707 protocols The MicroLogix 1400 controller supports an additional non isolated RS 232 interface on Channel 2 One of the biggest benefits of an RS 232 interface is that it lets you integrate telephone and radio modems into your control system using the appropriate DF1 protocol only not DH 485 protocol but it is for point to point connections only between two devices The RS 485 interface supports connection of dev
238. current and voltage sag on the MicroLogix 1400 is that the power supply capacitors charge more slowly However the effect ofa voltage sagon other equipment should be considered For example a deep voltage sag may reset a computer connected to the same power source The following considerations determine whether the power source must be required to supply high inrush current Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 11 Chapter2 Install Your Controller Preventing Excessive Heat 12 The power up sequence of devices in a system e The amount ofthe power source voltage sag if the inrush current cannot be supplied The effect of voltage sag on other equipment in the system If the entire system is powered up at the same time a brief sag in the power source voltage typically will not affect any equipment Loss of Power Source The power supply is designed to withstand brief power losses without affecting the operation of the system The time the system is operational during power loss is called program scan hold up time after loss of power The duration of the power supply hold up time depends on the type and state of the I O but is typically between 10 milliseconds and 3 seconds When the duration of power loss reaches this limit the power supply signals the processor that it can no longer provide adequate DC power to the system This is referred to as a power supply shutdown The processor then performs an
239. d follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret 5 Kar Plaza Ig Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Supersedes Publication 1766 UM001G EN P May 2012 Copyright 2014 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
240. d until they are reported to DNP3 Master successfully Logged event can also be cleared when one of the following events occur New OS firmware upgrade New user program download The example below shows how to generate events for a Binary Input Object and a 16 bit Analog Input Object In the DNP3 Slave configuration Binary Input Object Data File Number was configured to 10 and its Configuration File Number was configured to 30 16 bit Analog Input Object Data File Number was configured to 14 and its Configuration File Number was configured to 36 Channel Configuration General Channel Chonnci2 DNP3 Slave r Data Link Layer Channel fur Urwah Respurse ER INE r Application Layer EnableUnsolicited On Stat Up Send Initial Unsolicited On Start Up Enable Unsolicited Fer Class1 Enable Unsolicited Fer Class2 m Sone Fhahlel Insolinited Fer lass r ipe er alah Response Ske 2049 Synchrongation Interval X1 mins U Confirmation Timeout x1 ms 0000 Number of Retre 0 Number of Class vonta fi 000 Hold Time after Classi Events 1 s 5 Number of Class2 vents fi 000 Hold Time after Clas 2 Events x1 3 5 of Class3 E vents fi 000 Hold Time after Clas 3 Events 3 5 Select Timeout 1 s io DNF3 Objet Data File DNP3 Object Config File Binay Irput 10 Bnayinpu 30 Dinary Ouput fo Dinary Output 0 Coate iBbk
241. d LCD screen refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RMO01 By using the User Display menu item you can change from the default built in screens to a user defined screen and back on the LCD Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 89 Chapterb Using the LCD User Defined LCD Screen Follow these steps to display the user defined screen implemented in your application program 1 On the Main Menu screen select User Display by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 bUser Display Advanced Set RU 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad If no user defined screen is used in your application program the screen is displayed as shown below SHS SS PHP 000000 HU Note that the U DISP indicator on the top of the LCD is displayed in solid rectangle It means the LCD is in User Defined LCD mode 90 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 If a user defined screen is used in your application program the LCD screen is displayed as shown below according to the specific instructions used in your program 000000 speed 1HBHB Select what SLOW FA 3 Hold down the ESC key more than
242. d Response will not be sent When the parameter Enable Unsolicited On Start Up is unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 does not trigger the Unsolicited Response until a request with the function code ENABLE_UNSOLICITED 20 from the DNP3 Master is received Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F The example below shows how to initiate and send the Unsolicited Response Master Node0 in Channel 0 Configuration tab indicates that the Unsolicited Response is reported to the Master with the node address 3 Channel Configuration General Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 DNP3 Slave Driver DNP3 Slave j Address 1 Baud 19200 Parity NONE Stop Bits z Enable Master Address Validation Enable Self Address DNP3 Master Node Address Master Node2 o Master NodeU 3 aster Node Master Node4 0 Master Nodel o Master Nade3 o Protocol Control Control Line No Handshaking Confirmation Timeout 20 ms Request LL Confirmation Send LL Confirmation Message Retiies 0 Max Random Delay 1 ms 0 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 DK Cancel Apply Help EUM The parameter Channel for Unsolicited Response in the DNP3 Slave Configuration tab indicates that the Unsolicited Response is reported via Channel 0 only In this example Initial Unsolicited Response is sent on startup Rockw
243. d range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 5 The value of 0 indicates that responses are not delayed due to this parameter Note that parameters Number of Class3 Events and Hold Time after Class3 Events x1 s are used together so that if either one of the criteria are met an Unsolicited Response is transmitted Select Timeout 1 s The valid range is 1 65535 Default value is 10 This parameter is used for controlling CROB Control Relay Output Block and AOB Analog Output Block After receiving the request with the function code FC SELECT 3 DNP3 Master should send the request with the function code FC OPERATE 4 within this configured time DNP3 Object Data File Number The DNP3 Object Data File Numbers define the mapping of the listed DNP3 objects to MicroLogix 1400 data table files The number of elements defined for each of those data table files also defines the number of corresponding DNP3 objects Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 217 Appendix F 218 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 See DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data Files on page 232 for more details DNP3 Object Config File Number The DNP3 Object Config File Numbers define the mapping of the listed DNP3 object properties class number online offline status object quality flags deadbands and or thresholds to MicroLogix 1400 data table files See DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data Files on page 232 fo
244. d range is 1 4 Default value is 2 User Info Config File Number in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This file number is used to define user information Secure Authentication The value of this parameter is N file only Valid range is 0 7 9 255 Default value is 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 221 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 In RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software when this parameter is configured properly you can see a DNP3 Auth User Info Config File tree in Channel Configuration ML1400B UM RSS iol x Eg Project Help 1 H 8 Controller i Controller Properties D Processor Status D Function Files RI IO Configuration E Bis Channel Configuration his Channel Status E DNP3 Auth User Info Config File 3 6 Program Files 50 SYS1 Lap2 DNP3 Authentication User Info Config File User Number Dec Update Key Hex SS SSS 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 Help The following table shows the s
245. ded slave The master does this automatically you do not need to program the master to move data between slave nodes This slave to slave transfer can also be used by programming software to allow slave to slave upload and download of programs to processors including the master on the DF1 Half Duplex link MicroLogix 1400 can act as the master or as a slave on a Half Duplex network When the MicroLogix 1400 is a slave device a master device is required to run the network Several other Allen Bradley products support DF1 Half Duplex master protocol They include the SLC 5 03 and higher processors enhanced PLC 5 processors MicroLogix 1200 1500 and Rockwell Software RSLinx version 2 x and higher Half Duplex supports up to 255 devices address 0 to 254 with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts As a DF1 Half Duplex slave device the MicroLogix supports broadcast reception As a DF1 Half Duplex master the MicroLogix 1400 supports both the reception and initiation of broadcast write commands via the MSG instruction The MicroLogix also supports Half Duplex modems using RTS CTS hardware handshaking Example DF1 Half Duplex Connections RS 232 later SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC DF1 Half Duplex Protocol 5 05 PLC 5 MicroLogix 1400 or 44998 MicroLogix 1000 1200 1500 processors configured for DF1 Half Duplex Master Modem Fa 0
246. ds Received with Error 22 Counter for Replies Sent 23 Reserved 24 Reserved 25 Reserved 26 Error Count in sessions 2 Error Code in sessions 28 Number of Sockets in use 29 Maximum Sockets Allowed 30 Reserved 31 Reserved 32 Counter for Replies Received 33 Reserved 34 Reserved 35 Reserved 36 Reserved 37 Reserved 38 Reserved 39 Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 305 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Data File for Troubleshooting Word Offset Description Category 40 Counter for Commands Sent TCP Client Link Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 TCP 41 Reserved 42 Counter for Replies Received 43 Counter for Replies Received with Error 44 Counter for Replies Timed Out 45 Reserved 46 Error Count in sessions 47 Error Code in sessions 48 Outgoing Message Connections 4g Maximum Connections Allowed 50 Counter for Commands Received 51 Reserved 52 Counter for Replies Transmitted 53 Reserved 54 Reserved 55 Reserved 56 Reserved 57 Reserved Firmware use only 58 Reserved Firmware use only 59 Reserved Firmware use only 306 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Data File for Troubleshooting Word Offset Description Category 60 Application Layer Error Codes DNP3 Slave Application Layer Diagnostics for DN
247. dvanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad Ifthe menu items shown are not displayed on the Main Menu screen scroll down by pressing the Down key LIBET ETE User Display b dvanced Set Press the OK key on the LCD keypad Select LCD Setup using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad When the LCD Setup menu screen is displayed press the OK key REMOTE Comms EEPROM Setup Select Back Light to adjust backlighting options for the LCD LED Setup Contrast Back Light The default value for the backlight is 30 seconds You can adjust backlight time using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad LIBET ETE REMOTE LED Setup BackL ight 1 3Hsec on Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 115 Chapterb Using the LCD Protocol Configuration 116 The following section provides a step by step guide on how to change the Modbus Node address Modbus RTU Slave Node Address The user can set the Modbus RTU Slave Node address for Channel 0 or 2 TIP The node address change will only be applicable after a power cycle Changing the Modbus RTU Slave Node address 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up or Down arrow key on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown in the figure are not displayed on the Main Menu screen below you need to scroll down the screen by pressing
248. dy DSR 7 clear to send CTS termination 7 request to send RTS transmitted data TxD not applicable 8 clear to send CTS ground GND not applicable 9 notapplicable not applicable not applicable 9 port 1 pin 4 is electronically jumpered to pin 6 Whenever the AIC is powered on pin 4 will match the state of pin 6 2 An 8 pin mini DIN connector is used for making connections to port 2 This connector is not commercially available If you are making a cable to connect to port 2 you must configure your cable to connect to the Allen Bradley cable shown above B In the 1761 cable pins 4 and 6 are jumpered together within the DB 9 connector Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Communication Connections Chapter 4 Safety Considerations This equipment is suitable for use in Class 1 Division 2 Groups A B C D or non hazardous locations only WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD N AIC must be operated from an external power source This product must be installed in an enclosure cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means See Safety Considerations on page 9 for additional information Install and Attach the AlC 1 Take care when installing che AIC in an enclosure so that the cable connecting the MicroLogix controller to the AIC does not interfere with the enclosure door 2 Carefully plug the termi
249. e Program Files ee syso Master Password SYS1 New Confirm 1 2 ey Hoare 5 8 Data Files Cross Reference Subroutine Protection Password 4 E oo oureur New D n meurt 52 5 eed EU D me _ Once the DNP3 Master receives a proper Authentication Key Non zero value from the MicroLogix 1400 the Authentication Key must be used for sending the request with the function code OPEN_FILE 25 or DELETE_FILE 27 Rules for Downloading a User Program DNP3 master should send the function code OPEN FILE 25 WRITE 2 and CLOSE FILE 26 for downloading user programs When a master sends the function code OPEN FILE 25 with the file command object the file name string in File command object must be in this directory and file name format e EXE processorName IMG The directory and file name extension string must all be in capital letters and the string size cannot be exceed 64 bytes The file name processorName is from the Processor Name in the Controller Properties dialog in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro This ladder program processorName IMG is generated from RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro DNP3 Master should send the processorName IMG file without any modification When the MicroLogix 1400 Series A controller receives a request with the function code WRITE 2 for User Program download the MicroLogix 1400 activates all configuration
250. e shipped together within the United States without restriction Regulations governing shipment to or within other countries may differ Three or More Batteries Procedures for the transportation of three or more batteries shipped together within the United States are specified by the Department of Transportation DOT in the Code of Federal Regulations 49 Transportation An exemption to these regulations DOT E7052 covers the transport of certain hazardous materials classified as flammable solids This exemption authorizes transport of lithium batteries by motor vehicle rail freight cargo vessel and Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 153 Appendix 154 Replacement Parts cargo only aircraft providing certain conditions are met Transport by passenger aircraft is not permitted A special provision of DOT E7052 11th Rev October 21 1982 par 8 provides that Persons that receive cell and batteries covered by this exemption may reship them pursuant to the provisions of 49 CFR 173 22a in any of these packages authorized in this exemption including those in which they were received The Code of Federal Regulations 49 CFR 173 22a relates to the use of packaging authorized under exemptions In part it requires that you must maintain a copy of the exemption at each facility where the packaging is being used in connection with shipment under the exemption Shipment of depleted bat
251. e 1 read 00 start stop 129 response 00 start stop 245 247 2 write 00 start stop 0 254 Device Attribute 1 read 00 01 start stop Non specific all attributes 06 range or all request 0 255 Device Attributes Listof 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 start stop attribute variations 06 no range or all 1 0 Binary Input Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 1 1 Binary Input Packed 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 00 01 start stop format 1 2 Binary Input With flags 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 00 01 start stop 2 0 Binary Input Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 2 1 Binary Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 17 28 index Without time 07 08 limited qty 30 unsol resp 2 2 Binary Input Event With 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 17 28 index absolute time 07 08 limited qty 30 unsol resp 2 3 Binary Input Event With 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 17 28 index relative time 07 08 limited qty 30 unsol resp 3 0 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 3 1 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop Packed format 3 2 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop With flags 4 0 Double bit Binary Inpu 1 read 06 no range or all Event Any Va
252. e FC Counter 0 Received Etc FC Counter I Trans Solicited Res FC Counterz 0 Trans Unsolicited Res FC Counterz 0 Number of events to be reported 0 FC Function Code Trans Transmitted 309 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 If the data file is not configured in the parameter Diagnostic File Number of the Chan 1 DNP3 configuration the Channel 1 Ext dialog box will be shown as below LITTERE RM Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 No Diagnostic File Defined for this channel Diagnostics for Secure Authentication This feature is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Counters in DNP3 Slave Secure Authentication subsystem are logged in the Data File The data file is configured in the parameter Diagnostic File Number in Secure Authentication The following table shows the 150 words of the data file for the troubleshooting The 50 words are used to log the counters for each channel Word offset 0 to 49 is for Channel 0 word offset 50 to 99 is for Channel 1 and word offset 100 to 149 is for Channel 2 Words 6 to 49 56 to 99 and 106 to 149 are the event counter for Challenger State Machine which is stated in the DNP3 Specification Supplement to Volume 2 Secure Authentication Version 2 00 Word Offset Current State Description CHO CH1 CH2 0 50 100 Security Idle Wait for Reply Authentication Error Counter 1 51 10
253. e Starting Data File Number is non zero The 1 read write range is 1 8 DNP3 over IP When DNP3 over IP is enabled checked the MicroLogix 1400 enables DNP3 over IP feature on 0 disable read write Enable Ethernet channel Power cycle is required for changes to take effect Modbus TCP When Modbus TCP is enabled checked the MicroLogix 1400 enables Modbus TCP feature on 0 disable read write Enable Ethernet channel Power cycle is required for changes to take effect Disable When EtherNet IP Incoming Connections is disabled checked the MicroLogix 1400 does not allow 0 disable read write EtherNet IP the incoming EtherNet IP connection However MicroLogix 1400 can send the outgoing EtherNet IP Incoming commands to other EtherNet IP devices Power cycle is required for changes to take effect Connections Disable When Duplicate IP Address Detection is disabled checked the MicroLogix 1400 does not send any 0 disable read write Duplicate packets to the network to detect Duplicate IP on the same network Address Detection Configuration Using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Programming Software Configuration Via BOOTP 336 Refer to the online documentation provided with your programming software BOOTP bootstrap protocol is a low level protocol that TCP IP nodes use to obtain start up information By default the MicroLogix 1400 broadcasts BOOTP requests at powerup The BOOTP Valid parameter remains cle
254. e controller may also be connected to serial devices such as bar code readers weigh scales serial printers and other intelligent devices using ASCII See Default Communication Configuration on page 60 for the configuration settings for Channel 0 MicroLogix 1400 can be connected directly to RS 485 network via channel 0 using ASCII The MicroLogix 1400 supports EtherNet IP communication via the Ethernet communication Channel 1 In addition either Modbus TCP or DNP3 over IP can be enabled for Channel 1 You can connect your controller to a local area network that provides communication between various devices at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps This port supports CIP explicit messaging message exchange only The controller cannot be used for CIP implicit messaging real time I O messaging The controller also includes an embedded web server which allows Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 5 Chapter 1 Hardware Overview viewing of not only module information TCP IP configuration and diagnostic information but also includes the data table memory map and data table monitor screen using a standard web browser See Chapter for more information on connecting to the available communication options Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Chapter 2 Install Your Controller This chapter shows you how to install your controller The only tools you require are a flat or Phillips head screwdr
255. e device Select Reuse Device or Write Only by pressing the Up or Down keys LIBET ETE REMOTE 1 Heuse Device 2 Write Only Select Num IMPORTANT Once set to Write Only mode write protection cannot be removed If a change is required use a different memory module For more information on this refer to the chapter of Memory Module operation Once Write Only is set write protection cannot be removed A change cannot be made to the control program stored in a write protected memory module If a change is required use a different memory module For more information on transferring data to and from memory modules see Memory Module Operation on page 120 7 This screen appears if the save is complete Press the OK key to go back to executing mode REMOTE Stored to HH PHOUG gt AUN mode Conf i rm 112 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 Loading communication EEPROM Follow these steps to load user programs and data from the memory module to the controller s memory 1 Select Load from MM to load user programs and data REMOTE Comms Store to HH from 2 Ifyour controller is in a non executing mode skip to the next step Otherwise switch your controller to a non executing mode REMOTE Mode remate RUH HUN gt PHOG mode Conf i rm 3 This screen appears if the load fro
256. e file ML1400A_DNP3S IMG This is the file to be used for download DNP3S Ele Edit Favorites Tools address File and Folder Tasks A L DNP35 IM Gi Rename this fie DNP3S PRF 1KB PICS Rules File 5 Move this IMPORTANT RSLogix500 RSLogix Micro v8 10 00 and the MicroLogix 1400 Series A controller do not support the opening of IMG files Be sure to store your ladder program in the RSLogix Files RSS format before generating RSLogix IMG Files IMG Otherwise you may lose the latest modifications to your ladder program 290 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F IMPORTANT RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro v8 30 00 and the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller support the opening of IMG files However some information is not stored into the IMG file for example rung comments Be sure to store your ladder program in the RSLogix Files RSS format before generating RSLogix IMG Files IMG Rules for File Authentication The File Authentication process is optional and unnecessary when the master password of the downloaded ladder program is not configured When the password in the ladder program is configured by RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro the DNP3 master sends a request with the function code AUTHENTICATE FILE 29 to authenticate permission before file operation The object g70v2 is used f
257. e maximum extension of the latch is 14 mm 0 55 in in the open position A flat blade screwdriver is required for removal of the controller The controller can be mounted to EN50022 35x7 5 or EN50022 35x15 DIN rails DIN mounting dimensions are shown below P amp gt i 44518 Dimension Height A 90 mm 3 5 in B 27 5 mm 1 08 in C 27 5 mm 1 08 in Follow this procedure to install your controller on the DIN rail 1 Mount your DIN rail Make sure that the placement of the controller on the DIN rail meets the recommended spacing requirements see Controller and Expansion I O Spacing on page 20 Refer to the mounting template inside the back cover of this document 2 Close the DIN latch if it is open 3 Hook the top slot over the DIN rail While pressing the controller down against the top of the rail snap the bottom of the controller into position 5 Leave the protective debris shield attached until you are finished wiring the controller and any other devices To remove your controller from the DIN rail 1 Place a flat blade screwdriver in the DIN rail latch at the bottom ofthe controller 2 Holding the controller pry downward on the latch until the latch locks in the open position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second DIN rail latch Unhook the top of the DIN rail slot from the rail Rockwell Automation
258. e to service BOOTP request from 00 0 73 00 78 E 256 338 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Appendix 3 Double click on the hardware address of the device you want to configure You will see the New Entry pop up window with the device s Ethernet Address MAC New Entry Ethernet 00 900 0 73 00 78 Addres 192 168 1 11 Hostnam Description Device No 1 OK Cancel 4 Enter the IP Address and Description you want to assign to the device and click OK Leave Hostname blank The device will be added to the Relation List displaying the Ethernet Address MAC and corresponding IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway if applicable fd BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 lg xl File Tools Help Request History Clear History Add to Relation List Ethernet Address MAC Hostname P Address Thu QO 0F T3 FF 00 78 0 0 1 20 8 38 x r Relation List New Delete Enable BOOTE Enable DACP Disable BOOTP DHCP Ethernet Address MAC Type Address 0 0F 73 FF 00 78 BOO 192 168 1 11 ML1100 Device No r Status Entries Sent 192 168 1 11 to Ethernet address 00 0F 73 FF 00 76 of 256 Using a DHCP Server To A DHCP server automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP IP network DH
259. e to the data value position 10 Hold down the Up key until the target bit becomes 255 15 as shown below The maximum range of bits you can monitor with the LCD is 256 words of specified target bit file B B3 255 15 NH Protected 11 Ifyou have finished monitoring the bit file B3 press the ESC key to return to the Bit Integer File Select screen as shown in step 2 Monitoring Integer Files The LCD allows you to view and change the data value of an integer file You can access to this functionality via the Monitoring screen of the LCD To monitor an integer file on the LCD you have to specify its file number in the Target User Defined File Number TUF element ofthe LCD Function File and download your application program to the controller The TUF element can only be changed by a program download The value stored in the TUF element identifies the integer file with which the LCD will interface Valid integer files are N7 and N10 through N255 When the LCD reads a valid integer file number it can access up to 256 bits 0 255 on the LCD screen The protection bit LCD edit disable in the data file properties of the target integer file are used to define the read only or read write privileges for its file Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 Valid file type include Bit Integer Double integer or Float as specified in the TUF element IMPORT
260. ec dec hex 0 255 Device Attributes List of 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 start stop attribute variations 06 no range or all 1 0 Binary Input Any Variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 1 1 Binary Input Packed format 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 1 2 Binary Input With flags 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 2 0 Binary Input Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 2 1 Binary Input Event Without 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 2 2 Binary Input Event With 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index absolute time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 2 3 Binary Input Event With 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index relative time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 3 0 Double bit Binary Input Any 1 read 00 01 start stop Variation 06 no range or all 3 1 Double bit Binary Input Packed 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop ormat 06 no range or all 3 2 Double bit Binary Input With 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop lags 06 no range or all 4 0 Double bit Binary Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 07 08 limited qty 4 1 Double bit Binary Input Eve
261. ed by the input filters Several specific steps can be taken to help reduce the effects of environmental noise on analog signals install the MicroLogix 1400 system in a properly rated enclosure for example NEMA Make sure that the MicroLogix 1400 system is properly grounded use Belden cable 48761 for wiring the analog channels making sure that the drain wire and foil shield are properly earth grounded route the Belden cable separately from any AC wiring Additional noise immunity can be obtained by routing the cables in grounded conduit Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 2 Chapter3 Wire Your Controller Grounding Your Analog Cable Use shielded communication cable Belden 48761 The Belden cable has two signal wires black and clear one drain wire and a foil shield The drain wire and foil shield must be grounded at one end of the cable Insulation Clear Wire Foil Shield E Drain Wire 44531 IMPORTANT Do not ground the drain wire and foil shield at both ends of the cable Expansion 1 0 Wiring Digital Wiring Diagrams The following illustrations show the digital expansion I O wiring diagrams Figure 15 1762 IA8 Wiring Diagram L1 INO es IN 1 IN2 eal IN3 100 120V AC IN4 IN 5 IN 6 909 AC COM 12 Y AD po s COM 42 iu Common connected internally 44570 Rockwell Automation Publi
262. ed error field holds no additional information Hardware Errors 001 General and specific hardware error codes are specified in the extended error information field Configuration Errors 010 Module specific error codes are indicated in the extended error field These error codes correspond to options that you can change directly For example the input range or input filter selection Extended Error Information Field Check the extended error information field when a non zero value is present in the module error field See Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF2OF2 on page 164 TIP If no errors are present in the module error field the extended error information field is set to zero Hardware Errors General or module specific hardware errors are indicated by module error code 2 Configuration Errors If you set the fields in the configuration file to invalid or unsupported values the module ignores the invalid configuration generates a non critical error and keeps operating with the previous configuration The table below lists the configuration error codes defined for the module Error Codes Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF20F2 ErorType Hex Equivalent ModuleError ExtendedError ErorDescripion Code Information Code Binary Binary No Error X000 000 0 0000 0000 No error General Common X200 001 0 0000 0000 General hardware error no additional information Hardware Error Den 001 0 0000 0001 Power up reset state
263. ell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 285 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Collision Avoidance 286 and all events of class 1 2 and 3 are reported Since Hold Times are configured to 5 seconds generated events will be reported after 5 seconds Channel Configuration Eg General Channel D Channel 1 Channel2 DNP3 Slave Data Link Layer Channel for Unsolicited Response Chan Application Layer Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Iv Send Initial Unsolicited On Start Up Enable Unsolicited For Class1 Enable Unsolicited For Class2 a EE robe izali Enable Unsolicited For Class3 LI Da Stat Up Ory ja Max Response Size 2048 Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins 0 Confirmation Timeout 1 ms 10000 Number of 0 Number of Class E vents fi 000 Hold Time after Class Events st s 5 Number of Class2 E vents fi 000 Hold Time after Class2 Events 1 s 5 Number of Class3 E vents fi 000 Hold Time after Class3 Events x1 5 Select T imeout x1 s fi DNP3 Object Data File Number Binary Input Binary Output Counter 166 Counter 32bits Analog Input 1 6bits Analog Input 32bits Analog Input Short Floating Analog Output 16bits Analog Output 32bits Analog Output Short Floating Double Bit Input DNP3 Object Config File Number Binary Input jo Binary Output Counter 16bits 0 Counter 32bits
264. em Appendix D 15 After the flashing is complete the following dialog box prompts you to wait for the controller to reset verify that the POWER LED is solid GREEN and verify the FAULT LED is turned OFF EN 1 wait until the controller reset 2 verify the POWER LED is cold GREEN 3 verify the FAULT LED is turned OFF 16 Click che OK button 17 Enter the hardware address if prompted Otherwise the AB SNMP BOOTP Server Running dialog box may appear AB_SNMP BOOTP Server Could not find the hast on the network This machine wil now attempt to act at a BOOTP server for this IP address Enter the hardware address ol the module below or cancel to re enter the address 02008 334 89 Help AD SNMP BOOTP Server Running X Wating for BOOTP request from hardware address o Be 7 Providing IP address 10 116 38 203 Ifthe AB_SNMP BOOTP Server Running dialog box appears and if there is no response from the controller for more than 30 seconds click Cancel Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 177 Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The Update Status dialog box is displayed If the update was successful the status text box is green and has an appropriate message Update Status Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Current Revision 2 0 New Revision A720 E If the update was not successful the status text box is red
265. emote Run Test Continuous Scan and Test Single Scan modes Any other modes are Non Executing modes DNP3 BCD Object The supported object group and variations are as below Numeric Static Objects e 0101 1 Binary Coded Decimal Integer Small Related Object File Number Small BCD Object File Number Related Configuration File Number Small BCD Config File Number Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 259 Appendix F 260 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 To generate a Small BCD Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure the Small BCD Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When a Small BCD Object File is configured the Index number starts from 0 1 word is used for 1 Index of Small BCD Object As an example a Small BCD Object File is configured as shown below Data File N21 has 10 elements Index 0 of the Small BCD Object is N21 0 Index 1 is N21 1 and Index 9 is N21 9 Data File N21 dec Small BCD Object File Padin Decimal Desc PV MJ N21 Properties Usage Help As an example a Small BCD Config File is configured as shown below The file has 10 elements B40 0 0 and B40 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 of the Small BCD Object File B40 1 0 and B40 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for
266. en Node Address 0 254 decimal Control Line no handshaking half duplex modem RTS CTS handshaking no handshaking 485 network Error Detection CRC BCC EOT Suppression enabled disabled When EOT Suppression is enabled the slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued This saves modem transmission power and time when there is no message to transmit Duplicate Packet Message Detect enabled disabled Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions if the sender s Message Retries are not set to 0 Poll Timeout x20 ms 0 65 535 can be set in 20 ms increments Poll Timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction It is the amount of time that the slave device waits for a poll from the master device If the slave device does not receive a poll within the Poll Timeout a MSG instruction error is generated and the ladder program needs to requeue the MSG instruction If you are using a MSG instruction it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero not be used Poll Timeout is disabled when set to zero RTS Off Delay x20 ms 0 65 535 can be set in 20 ms increments Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 65
267. er 2 node Ethernet network Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second SingleTypedRead 20 Single Typed Reads 20 20 400 Single Typed Reads 100 20 2000 Optimal Performance MicroLogix 1400 controller to RSLinx Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second SingeTypedRead s 7 Single Typed Reads 20 25 500 Single Typed Reads 100 25 2 500 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Appendix Optimal Performance MicroLogix 1400 to MicroLogix 1400 controller Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second Single o Single Typed Reads 20 20 400 Single Typed Reads 100 20 2 000 MicroLogix 1400 and PC The MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet connector conforms to ISO IEC 8802 3 STD C onne cti ons to th e 802 3 and utilizes 10 100Base T media Connections are made directly from the MicroLogix 1400 to an Ethernet hub or switch The network setup is simple and Ethern et Network cost effective Typical network topology is pictured below Ethernet Network Topology Ethernet Hub or Switch RJ45 connectors on both ends of cable 10 100Base T to MicroLogix 1400 to PC Ethernet Card Channel 1 IMPORTANT The MicroLogix 1400 controller contains a 10 100Base T RJ45 Ethernet connector which connects to standard Ethernet hubs or switchs via 8 wire
268. erb Using the LCD Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the bit file B3 1 On the Main Menu screen select Monitoring by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad 00000 REMOTE 10 Status bHonitoring Mode Switch 2 Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The File Number prompt is displayed B II File Num 9683 Data B Press UK to edi 3 If number 3 is selected as shown in step 2 press the OK key If not selected press the Up or Down key to select it and then press the OK key Thecurrent data value ON of the B3 0 0 bit is displayed as shown below Note that 0 0 is flashing which means the cursor is at the target bit position 5 We will change the data value of the B3 0 0 bit to OFF 0 First press OK to select the displayed address and move the cursor to the data value position Then will flash which means the cursor is at the data value position 6 Press the Down key Then the data value will be represented as OFF Note that OFF is still flashing which means the cursor is still at the data value position 72 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 7 Press OK to apply the changes Then the new value OFF 0 is applied Note that the target bit 0 0 in this example is flashing The cursor is moved automatically to the target bit position B I REMOTE B H OF
269. erence You can use aluminum conduit in non critical areas Use plastic connectors to couple between aluminum and ferromagnetic conduit Make an electrical connection around the plastic connector use pipe clamps and the heavy gauge wire or wire braid to hold both sections at the same potential Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the building earth ground Do notlet the conduit touch the plug on the cable Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit The conduit should contain only serial communication cables Install the conduit so that it meets all applicable codes and environmental specifications For more information on planning cable routes see Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Connecting to Networks RS 232 RS 485 Interface Appendix E Software Considerations Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on network performance number of nodes on the network addresses of those nodes baud rate The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to select parameters for optimum network performance speed See your programming software s user manual for more information
270. eserved 76 Reserved 77 Reserved 78 Reserved 79 Reserved 80 Reserved Word offset 7 27 and 47 reflect the Error Codes that have been caused in the sessions for DNP3 TCP Server UDP and TCP Client respectively The following table lists the possible ranges of the Error Code Any others are reserved Error Codes Value DEC Mnemonic Description 0 NO ERROR No error found 1 ERR SOCKET CREATE Socket error during Create operation 2 ERR SOCKET LISTEN Socket error during Listen operation 3 ERR SOCKET BIND Socket error during Bind operation 4 ERR SOCKET ACCEPT Socket error during Accept operation 5 ERR SOCKET CONNECT Socket error during Connect operation 6 ERR SOCKET SEND Socket error during Send operation 7 ERR SOCKET RECEIVE Socket error during Receive operation 8 ERR SOCKET UNLISTEN Socket error during Unlisten operation 9 ERR SOCKET UNBIND Socket error during Unbind operation 10 ERR SOCKET UNACCEPT Socket error during Unaccept operation 11 ERR SOCKET DISCONNECT Socket error during Disconnect operation 12 ERR SOCKET DELETE Socket error during Delete operation 13 14 Reserved 15 ERR QUE FULL Firmware use only 16 ERR BUFFER ALLOC Firmware use only 17 ERR PACKET ALLOC Firmware use only 308 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Error Codes MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Value DEC Mnemonic Description 18 ERR PACKET
271. et port configuration using trim pots viewing system information viewing fault code using communication EEPROM configuring LCD Setup viewing changing protocol configuration The LCD and keypad are shown below N eee Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Sie 44580 59 Chapterb Using the LCD Operating Principles 60 LCD and Keypad Feature Description 10 LCD 5 LCD Screen Keypad ESC OK Up Down Left and Right Buttons MicroLogix 1400 LCD Menu Structure Tree Startup Screen User defined o y 110 Status gt Long Integer REMOTE Mode Switch gt _ gt User Display Lo y Advanced Set User Defined Menu LCD Instruction Interface Startup Screen The Startup screen is displayed whenever the controller is powered up Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 LCD Default Startup Screen MicroLogix 1400 You can customize this Startup screen in your application program by defininga ASCII data file that contains the bitmap format image to display on the Startup screen and specifying the CBL element of the LCD Function File to the address of t
272. etwork Protocol Specifications available from http www dnp org Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 195 AppendixE Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Notes 196 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Channel Configuration for DNP3 Slave Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 This appendix e describes the MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 describes the procedures used to program and troubleshoot DNP3 protocol in the controller givesan overview of the DNP3 implementation in the controller e shows application examples of DNP3 applications The default communication protocol for the serial ports Channel 0 and Channel 2 in the MicroLogix 1400 is DF1 Full Duplex To communicate with DNP3 protocol the channel must be configured to DNP3 protocol The default communication protocol for the Ethernet Channel 1 in the MicroLogix 1400 is Ethernet IP To communicate with DNP3 over IP protocol in the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller the channel must be configured to use the DNP3 protocol The MicroLogix 1400 Series A controller supports DNP3 protocol via Channel 0 and or Channel 2 Serial ports The MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller also supports DNP3 over IP protocol via Channel 1 Ethernet port To program the MicroLogix 1400 controller use RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software version 8 10 00 or later for Ser
273. extend the DH 485 network to 2438 m 8000 ft For additional information on connections using the AIC refer to the Advanced Interface Converter AIC User Manual publication 1761 6 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 73 Chapter 4 74 Communication Connections When cutting cable segments make them long enough to route them from one AIC to the next with sufficient slack to prevent strain on the connector Allow enough extra cable to prevent chafing and kinking in the cable Use these instructions for wiring the Belden 3106 or 9842 cable See Cable Selection Guide on page 77 if you are using standard Allen Bradley cables Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH 485 Connector TIP A daisy chained network is recommended Do not make the incorrect connection shown below Belden Z3106A Belden 3106A or Belden 3106 or or 9842 9842 9842 A 2 Connector Connector Connector Incorrect Single Cable Connection When connecting a single cable to the DH 485 connector use the following diagram 6 Termination 5A 4B 3 Common 2 Shield 1 Chassis Ground Orange with White Stripes White with Orange Stripes Y Shrink Tubing Recommended Blue 3106A or Blue with White Drain Wire Stripes 79842 SSSSSE 27 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Communication Connections Chapter 4 Multip
274. f Duplex network 68 connecting to networks via Ethernet interface 555 connecting to networks via RS 232 RS 485 interface 211 connections to the Ethernet network 557 control profile 378 ControlFLASH error messages 207 firmware upgrade 197 missing or corrupt OS state 209 using 195 controller 378 grounding 31 1 0 wiring 38 installation 7 LED status error conditions 187 LED status normal operation 187 minimizing electrical noise 38 mounting 20 mounting dimensions 20 mounting on DIN rail 22 mounting on panel 23 preventing excessive heat 12 status indicators 185 controller modes 115 controller overhead 378 controller spacing 20 counter 378 CPU Central Processing Unit 378 cursor display 94 D data table 378 388 default communication configuration 60 DeviceNet Communications 83 84 DeviceNet network connecting 83 84 selecting cable 83 DF1 Full Duplex protocol connecting 63 64 description 211 example system configuration 212 using a modem 65 214 DF1 Half Duplex protocol description 212 DH485 communication protocol configuration parameters 71 216 DH485 network configuration parameters 218 connecting 70 devices that use the network 216 example system configuration 221 installation 73 planning considerations 217 DIN rail 378 disconnecting main power 10 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 223 DNP3 analog input object 281 analog output object 285 BCD object 287 binary input object 269 binary output object 271 counter
275. from DNP3 Master Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 287 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Download a User Program via DNP3 Network 288 This table shows RTC Accuracy Configure the NEED TIME bit according to this table so that a DNP3 Master can send the time synchronization request for more accurate times in the controller RTC Accuracy Ambient Temperature RTC Accuracy 0 C 32 F 13 121 seconds month 25 C 77 F 54 5 seconds month 40 C 104 F 29 78 seconds month 55 C 131 F 43 150 seconds month f These numbers are maximum worst case values over 31 day month Using File Control Status of Requested Operation objects a user program can be downloaded uploaded initialized via DNP3 communication Also Serial Channel 0 Status File Ethernet Channel 1 Status File and Serial Channel 2 Status File can be uploaded from the MicroLogix 1400 All File Control Status of Requested Operation objects and supported File Control Status of Requested Operation objects are listed in this section Unsolicited Response for File Control Status of Requested Operation objects is not supported All the responses are sent to DNP3 Master with Function Code 129 81h e g70vl File Control File identifier superseded not supported e g70v2 File Control Authentication supported e g70v3 File Control File command supported e g 0v File Co
276. g a data transaction If the memory module is removed during a data transaction data corruption can occur Ifa memory module is installed while the MicroLogix 1400 is executing the memory module is not recognized until either a power cycle occurs or until the controller is placed in a non executing mode program mode suspend mode or fault condition Memory Module Information File The controller has a Memory Module Information MMI File which provides status from the attached memory module At power up or on detection of a memory module being inserted the catalog number series revision and type are identified and written to the MMI file Ifa memory module is not attached zeros are written to the MMI file Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RMO001 for more information Program Data Download To download the program and data from a memory module to the controller s memory on the Comms menu in your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software point EEPROM and then click Load from EEPROM TIP With MicroLogix 1400 you can also use the LCD and the LCD buttons on the module to transfer applications to or from the controller For more information on program data download refer to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software documentation Program Data Upload To upload the program and data from the controller s memory to a memory module on the Comms
277. g software to ensure that the bit file you specify in the TUF element as well as the appropriate number of elements exist in the MicroLogix 1400 user program The data protection for a file depends on the LCD edit disable setting When LCD Edit Disable is set 1 Checked in file properties the corresponding data file is considered read only by and the Protected message is displayed When Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 69 Chapter5 Using the LCD LCD Edit Disable is clear 0 Unchecked the UnProtected message is displayed and the corresponding data file is editable from the LCD keypad IMPORTANT Although you cannot change protected data from the LCD keypad the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data The Protection bit LCD Edit Disable only provides write protection from the LCD keypad This does not provide any overwrite protection from ladder logic HMI or programming software It is the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten TIP The LCD always starts at bit 0 of a data file It cannot start at any other address within the file Monitoring a Bit File For explanations in this section we assume the following in the application program Abitfile B3 which is 256 elements long 256 words 4096 bits is defined with the preset data as shown in the screen capture below
278. ge 1 1 C F for Cu Accuracy drift at 0 55 C 32 131 F 0 026 C C 0 026 for Pt 385 0 007 Q C 0 012 Q F for 150 Q range 0 023 C C 0 023 F F for Pt 3916 0 023 Q C 0 041 Q F for 500 Q range 0 012 C C 0 012 F F for Ni 0 043 0 077 Q F for 1 000 Q range 0 015 C C 0 015 for NiFe 0 07 20 0 130 Q F for 3 000 Q range 0 032 C C 0 032 F F for Cu Excitation current source 0 5 mA and 1 0 mA selectable per channel Open circuit detection time 6 1212 ms Input channel configuration Calibration 144 Via configuration software screen or the user program by writing a unique bit pattern into the module s configuration file Refer to your controller s user manual to determine if user program configuration is supported The module performs autocalibration on channel enable and on a configuration change between channels You can also program the module to calibrate every five minutes Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Specifications Appendix A Input Specifications 1762 IR4 Specification Maximum overload at input terminals 1762 IR4 35V DC continuous Cable impedance max 25 Q Operating with gt 25 Q will reduce accuracy Channel to channel isolation 10V DC 1 Accuracy is dependent upon the Analog Digital converter filter rate selection excitation current se
279. ge select Channel 1 X403 010 0 0000 0011 nvalid range select Channel 2 X404 010 0 0000 0100 nvalid range select Channel 3 X405 010 0 0000 0101 Invalid filter select Channel 0 1762 IF4 only X406 010 0 0000 0110 Invalid filter select Channel 1 1762 IF4 only X407 010 0 0000 0111 Invalid filter select Channel 2 1762 IF4 only X408 010 0 0000 1000 Invalid filter select Channel 3 1762 IF4 only X409 010 0 0000 1001 Invalid format select Channel 0 X40A 010 0 0000 1010 Invalid format select Channel 1 X40B 010 0 0000 1011 Invalid format select Channel 2 X40C 010 0 0000 1400 Invalid format select Channel 3 1 X represents Don t Care Calling Rockwell If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for assistance it Automation for Assistance is helpful to obtain the following prior to calling controller type series letter revision letter and firmware FRN number of the controller controller indicator status Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 165 C Troubleshooting Your System controller error codes Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual Publication 1766 RM001 for error code information 166 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Preparing for Firmware Upgrade Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The operating system OS can be upg
280. get integer file are used to define the read only or read write privileges for its file Valid file type include Bit Integer Double integer or Float as specified in the TUF element The data protection for its file depends on the setting for LCD Edit Disable If LCD Edit Disable is set to 1 in file properties the corresponding data file is considered read only by the LCD and the Protected message is displayed IMPORTANT Although you cannot change protected data from the LCD keypad the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data The Protection bit LCD Edit Disable only provides write protection from the LCD keypad This does not provide any overwrite protection from ladder logic HMI or programming software It is the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten For explanations in this section we assume the following in the application program A bit file L9 which is 256 elements long 256 words is defined with the preset data as shown in the screen capture below Z Data File 19 dec Radix Decimal Symbal s s Desc E Properties Usage Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Using the LCD Chapter 5 LCD Edit Disable is set to unchecked disable x General File 9 Type L Name Desc f Elements 255 Last L9 255 Attributes Debug Skip When
281. gger Event Set this parameter to generate an event unconditionally This bit can also be set by the ladder logic to generate timed events Once this parameter is set by the ladder logic or communications the MicroLogix 1400 clears it automatically after generating an event at the end of scan This parameter is stored as a bit in the relevant Data Set Descriptor Config file and the bit can be accessed by Nx 2 4 where x is the relevant Data Set Descriptor Config file number Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Disable Change of State Event Setting this parameter suppresses the events generated by any Event Occurrence Condition Event Occurrence Condition The conditions of Data Set Event for each Data Set Descriptor can be configured by Data Set Event Occurrence Condition 0 1 2 3 in the DNP3 Data Set Descriptors Object File When one of the values that are pointing to the Event Occurrence Condition 0 1 2 3 are changed or the criteria are met the MicroLogix 1400 generates a Data Set Event retrievable using the object g88v1 This table shows the supported conditions for Point Addressing Double click each case element to edit it Event Occurrence Condition O O O Case ID 0 Point Address Standard DNP3 Poit v Point Type NONE Point Index o Cancel Point Addressing under Event Conditions Valid
282. gix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Master may issue Response Appendix F DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Codes Qualifier Codes Num dec hex dec hex 70 2 File Control 29 authenticate 5B free format 129 response 5B free format authentication file 70 3 File Control file 25 open file 5B free format command 70 3 File Control file 27 delete file 5B free format command 70 4 File Control file 26 close file 5B free format 129 response 5B free format command status 70 5 File Control file transport 1 read file 5B free format 70 5 File Control file transport 2 write file 5B free format 70 6 File Control file transport 129 response 5B free format status 70 7 File Control file 129 response 5B free format descriptor 80 1 Internal Indications 1 read file 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop Packed forma 2 write file 00 start stop index 7 90 1 Application Identifier 16 init appl 5B free format 17 start appl 06 no range or all 18 stop appl 101 1 Binary Coded Decimal 1 read file 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop Integers small 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 101 2 Binary Coded Decimal Integers medium
283. gramming software Possible Controller Modes by Mode Switch Position When the Mode Switch Possible Controller Modes are Positions at PROGRAM download in progress program mode suspend mode operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction REMOTE remote download in progress remote program mode remote suspend mode operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction remote run mode remote test continuous mode remote test single scan mode RUN run mode Changing Mode Switch Position Mode Switch position can be changed at two different times using LCD keypad One is when the controller is powered up and the other is while the controller is powered on Mode Switch position can be set to either PROG or RUN when the controller is powered up This allows the controller operation which is different from the previous mode that is any program under RUN before can be stopped or any new program can be run when the controller is powered up How to forcibly set Mode Switch to RUN when the controller is powered up Press OK key for 5 seconds when the controller is powered up The following LCD screen appears if it s successfully done Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 87 Chapterb Using the LCD 000000 RU CPU Booted RUH Hode Howto forcibly set Mode Switch to PROG when the controller is powered up Press ESC key for 5 seconds when the
284. guration files are the configuration of Class information to the relevant objects PO bit in the first element is for excluding Small BCD Data from Class 0 poll responses Other bits are reserved Related Configuration File Numbers Small BCD Config File Number Bit Offset 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Element 0 r r r r r r r r PO r r r CO Element 1 r r r r r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 2 r r r r r r r r r r r r 1 CO Element 3 r r r r r r r r r r r r CO Element 4 r r r r r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 5 r r r r r r r r r r r r 1 CO C CO r reserved C1 CO Class leve 0103 For Small BCD Element 0 for data index 0 PO 0 for including Small BCD Data to Class 0 poll response DNP3 Binary Input Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with all variations Binary Input Static Objects glv0 Binary Input All Variations Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 241 Appendix F 242 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 glvl Binary Input Packed format default glv2 Binary Input With flags Binary Input Event Objects g2v0 Binary Input Event Variations g2vl Binary Input Event Without time g2v2
285. has 10 elements accordingly A total of 30 Analog Input Object Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F indexes are configured Index 0 of the Analog Input Object is N14 0 Index 10 is L15 0 Index 20 is F16 0 and Index 29 is F16 9 Data File N14 dec 161 Obj 151 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 HE Radix Decimal E 10 Y ix Radix Decimal hd Columns 5 Data File F16 AFI Obj E ini xl Radix 2 Columns As an example an Analog Input Config File is shown below These files have 10 elements each B36 0 0 and B36 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 of the 16 bits Analog Input Object File B36 1 0 and B36 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 1 of the Analog Input Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved In the example below for 16 bit Analog Input Config File Class Level of Index 0 is 1 B36 0 0 and B36 0 1 Class Level of Index 1 is 2 B36 1 0 and B36 1 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 255 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Class Level of Index 2 is 3 B36 2 0 and B36 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B36 bin 16bits Analog Input Config File ffset PS 14 13 12 11 10 e
286. help Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Troubleshooting Your System Appendix C Identify the error code and description Refer to page 206 for probable cause and recommended action Clear Fault Correct the condition causing the fault Return controller to RUN or any of the REM test modes Test and verify system operation Is the error hardware related Are the wire connections tight Yes No Is the Power LED on Yes No Is the RUN LED on Yes Is the Fault LED on Tighten wire connections Does the controller have power supplied No Yes Refer to page 206 for probable cause and recommended action status Yes Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Hefer to page 206 for probable cause and recommended action Check power Is an input LED accurately showing No Refer to page 206 for probably cause and recommended action 161 Troubleshooting Your System Analog Expansion 1 0 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 162 Module Operation and Channel Operation The module performs operations at two levels module level e channel level Module level operations include functions such as power up configuration and communication with the controller Internal
287. his ASCII file The screen shown below is an example ofa customized Startup screen LINE S Your imported Bitmap file format should meet the following criteria image resolution 128 x 64 pixels black white image e image size 1088 bytes consisting of image header 62 bytes raw image data size 1024 bytes padding data 2 bytes To load a customized boot logo image to your controller the CBL Customized Boot Logo ASCII File element in the LCD Function File should be configured properly If the CBL element is set to 0 default or if the indexed ASCII file does not exist the embedded default logo will be displayed Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 61 Chapter 5 62 igi xd HSC PWM sT El RTC LCD MM BH 630 sl j 4 EOUN ECB ustomized Boot Logo ASCII Fi SCD Start with Customized Display TO Data Input Timeout of LCD Instructic 0 LDN LCD Instruction Job Done 1 ERR LCD Display Operation Error Bit 1 ERN LCD Module Operation Error Num 2 TUF Target User Define File Number 7 JOG Jog data update Mode Set 1 H Trimpot Low Value 1 L Trimpot High Value 2 Trimpot 0 Data TMIN 1 Trimpot 1 Data TMIN TMAX 1 WND Instruction Display Window 0 EOK OK key in Customized Display TIP Once a valid bitmap file is imported successfully you should be able to see the data
288. ices in a multidrop hard wired configuration using DH 485 DF1 Half Duplex Modbus or DNP3 protocols Also the RS 485 interface supports connection in a multidrop hard wired configuration using ASCII protocols Full Duplex protocol provides a point to point connection between two devices DF1 Full Duplex protocol combines data transparency American National Standards Institute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory D1 and 2 way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses subcategory F1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 183 Appendix Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface DF1 Half Duplex Protocol 184 The MicroLogix controller supports the DF1 Full Duplex protocol via RS 232 connection to external devices such as computers or other controllers that support DF1 Full Duplex DF1 is an open protocol Refer to DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual publication 1770 6 5 16 for more information Full Duplex protocol also referred to as DF1 point to point protocol is useful where RS 232 point to point communication is required DF1 protocol controls message flow detects and signals errors and retries if errors are detected Example DF1 Full Duplex Connections For information about required network connecting equipment see Chapter 4 Communication Connections MicroLogix 1400 A Personal Computer Personal Computer j
289. icroLogix 1400 parses Clears fault and changes the controller mode to Remote Run See Starting and Stopping rd Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page Reques 18 0x12 FC STOP APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Changes the controller mode to Remote Program See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 294 Reques 19 0x13 FC SAVE CONFIG No Deprecated Reques 20 0x14 FC ENABLE UNSOLICITED Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 21 0x15 FC DISABLE UNSOLICITED Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 22 0x16 FC ASSIGN CLASS No Reques 23 0x17 FC DELAY MEASURE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Used for non LAN Reques 24 0x18 FC RECORD CURRENT TIME No MicroLogix 1400 parses Used for LAN Reques 25 0x19 FC OPEN FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 26 0x1A FC CLOSE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 27 0x1B FC DELETE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 28 0x1C FC GET FILE INFO No MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 29 0x1D FC AUTHENTICATE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 30 Ox1E FC ABORT FILE No MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 31 0 FC ACTIVATE CONFIG No MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 32 0x20 FC AUTHENTICATE REQ No MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 33 0x21 FC AUTHENTICATE ERR No MicroLogix 1400 parses 34 0x22 to 0 Reserved 128 0x80 Response 129 0x81 FC RESPONSE Yes MicroLogix 1400 sends Response 130 0x82 FC UNSOLICITED RESPONSE Yes MicroLogix 1400 sends Resp
290. ied by one of the following dielectric tests 1100V AC for 1 second or 1697V DC for 1 second nput Group to Input Group Isolation 75V DC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation FET Output Group to Backplane Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1100V AC for 1 second or 1697V DC for 1 second solation 75V DC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Relay Output Group to Backplane Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second solation 265V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Relay Output Group to Relay Output Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second Group and FET Output Group Isolation E 265V AC Working Voltage basic insulation 150V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Expansion 1 0 Specifications General Specifications Specification Dimensions Digital 1 0 Modules Value 90 mm height x 87 mm depth x 40 4 mm width height including mounting tabs is 110 mm 3 54 in height x 3 43 in depth x 1 59 in width height including mounting tabs is 4 33 in Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Temperature operating 20 65 4 149 F Operating humidity Operating altitude 5 95 non condensing 2000 m 6561 ft Vibration Operating 10 500 Hz 5 g 0 030 in max peak to
291. ies A controller and version 8 30 00 or later for Series B controller Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 197 Appendix F 198 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 In RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro open Channel Configuration in the MicroLogix 1400 project tree RSLogix 500 Pro UNTITLED gdt Yew Search Comme Tools Window amp WOO wm Driver ETHIP 1 12 Vusex Tmercourter B Proc 3 Cg e Controller amp Cortroter Properties Q Processor Status G Function Fies w 10 Configuration There are configurations related to DNP3 protocol in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software Channel 0 configuration e Channel 2 configuration Channel 1 configuration DNP3 Slave Application Layer configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Channel 0 and Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration Link Layer related configuration can be done in the Channel 0 and or Channel 2 tab Channel Contigur ation Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 199 Appendix F 200 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Channel Configur ation General CharrelO Channa Chennrl 35 mc n 1 Baud 19200 v NONE Stop Bis 1 x Enable Master Address Validat
292. ig File Tale Sala IE Dun nung nugunuunuaalnlhtn5 lu n n ga n gau do 08 8 oto ob oO e Oo oO 0 p JJ n n n H n n H d Dn H H 0 0 uu 8 80 lH H H H H fH f CoP oa 8 Do bot ooo oo Bb 8 Z0 0 0 oo OD g 8 Bb 020 ga Ju 8 8 bb oo O 0 0 U T anunuuguunuunuuugnn5m5muu0 tun z Sm Des u M M E34 Eicpentes Usage Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F For 32 bit Frozen Counter Config File Class Level of Index 10 is 1 B35 0 0 and B35 0 1 Class Level of Index 11 is 2 B35 1 0 and B35 1 1 Class Level of Index 12 is 3 B35 2 0 and B35 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B35 bin 32bits Frozen Counter Config File E ESE ee 3520 ocd 000000 i 5 1 B35 2 H15 3 00 0 00 0000 00 D 80 D BN D 35 4 Dg Jg e D 0 0 0 BD BO B Dn D D D 35 5 0 0 0 0D 0 00 0 00 D D D D U 235 6 Qg a 0000000000200 D 35 7 0000000000 080 0 0 0 0D B35 8 0 0 Dh D 0 d D na 335 9 n o Roo nh oo oo oo 8 EF HE Padi x ps Ercpertize Usage Help
293. ime 3 ms max Overall Accuracy 20 60 C 4 140 F Electrical isolation 1 0 of full scale Non isolated with internal logic Cable length 128 30 m 98 ft shielded cable Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Specifications Appendix A Specifications for Outputs in Hazardous Locations Class 1 Division 2 Groups A B C D Relay Outputs Description 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BXB A 1766 L32BWA A Maximum controlled load 1440 VA 1080 VA Maximum Continuous Current Current per channel and group 2 5 A per channel 2 5 A per channel common 8A max channel 8 11 common Current per at 150V max 28 A or total of per point controller loads whichever is less at 240V max 20 A or total of per point loads whichever is less Relay Outputs Description 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BWA A 1766 L32BXB A Turn On Time Turn Off Time 10 msec maximum Load current 10 mA minimum 1 Scan time dependent Maximum Volts Amperes Amperes Volt Amperes Continuous Make Break Make Break 240V AC 75A 0 75 2 5 1800 VA 180 VA 120 15 0 15 25 1800 VA 180 VA 250V DC 0 11A 1 0 A 28 VA 125V DC 0 22 A 1 0 A 28 VA Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 129 AppendixA Specifications Specifications for Outputs in Non Hazardous Locations only Relay Outputs Description 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BXB A 1766 L32
294. in ASCII data files Make sure that the second element file size in the first ASCII data file is 0x0440 1088 bytes in hexadecimal value After a power cycle you should be able to see the customized boot logo on your LCD display For more information on how to create and use a customized Startup screen refer to the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 After the default Startup screen or your customized Startup screen is displayed for 3 seconds either the default screen the I O Status screen is displayed by default or a user defined screen is displayed if your application uses a custom default screen Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 Main Menu and Default Screen The Main menu consists of five menu items I O Status Monitoring Mode Switch User Display and Advanced Set LCD Main Menu RU Monitoring Made Switch RU Acvanced Set Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 63 Chapter5 Using the LCD Main Menu Items Menu Item Description For details refer to 1 0 Status Displays the 1 0 Status screen which shows the 1 0 status of the 1 0 Status on page 67 embedded digital 1 0 Monitoring Allows you to view and change the data value of a bit and an Monitor User Defined Target Files on page 69 integer file Monitoring Integer Files
295. in any combination can be connected to a controller See Appendix H to determine how much heat a certain combination generates Figure 2 1762 Expansion 1 0 1762 Expansion 1 0 1762 Expansion 1 0 Connected to MicroLogix 1400 Controller 44563 Expansion 1 0 Catalog Number Description Digital 1762 1 8 8 Point 120V AC Input Module 1762 108 8 Point Sink Source 24V DC Input Module 1762 1016 16 Point Sink Source 24V DC Input Module 1762 1032T 32 Point Sink Source 24V DC Input Module 1762 048 8 Point 120 240V AC Triac Output Module 1762 0B8 8 Point Sourcing 24V DC Output Module Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 3 Chapter 1 Communication Cables Hardware Overview Programming Expansion 1 0 Catalog Number Description 1762 0B16 16 Point Sourcing 24V DC Output Module 1762 0B32T 32 Point Sourcing 24V DC Output Module 1762 0V32T 32 Point Sinking 24V DC Output Module 1762 0W8 8 Point AC DC Relay Output Module 1762 OW16 16 Point AC DC Relay Output Module 1762 0 6 6 Point Isolated AC DC Relay Output Module 1762 1080W6 8 Point Sink Source 24V DC Input and 6 Point AC DC Relay Output Module Analog 1762 IF4 4 Channel Voltage Current Analog Input Module 1762 0F4 4 Channel Voltage Current Analog Output Module 1762 IF20F2 Combination 2 Channel Input 2 Channel Output Voltage Current Analog Module Temperature 1762 IR4
296. ing Symbols iore ELE 15 Schematic Using ANSI CSA 16 Installing a Memory 16 Using the Battery esi vcre ee Sais aac aea 17 Connecting the Battery Wire 19 Controller Mounting Dimensions esee 20 Controller and Expansion I O 20 Mounting the EPOD Fes 20 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN E May 2014 v Table of Contents DIN Rail adest 22 Panel Mounting ie st rei eacus ental 23 1762 Expansion I O Dimensions SS 24 Mounting 1762 Expansion be eos PEE 24 DIN Rail Mounting eode edet 24 Panel Mounting cscs iis iad tesa ER EE e X ERR S EQABENE MD 25 Connecting Expansion O RR SCR 26 Chapter 3 Wire Your Controller Wiring elitso eese sies een 27 Wiring Recommendation 27 Wire without Spade Lugs 28 Wire with Spade utin io 28 Using Surge Suppressors 29s qo pO S e e Vae NI Ea ed esce 29 Recommended Surge 30 Grounding the Controller 4552 eani abs e OU RAE eleg 31 Wiring Diagrams inst taiwan he Corea 32 Terminal Block Layouts sc nares eta Ov leat oa eon 33 Sinking and Sourcing Wiring
297. ing on the instructions and each instructions status during the scan sinking term used to describe current flow between an I O device and controller I O circuit typically a sinking device or circuit provides a path to ground low or negative side of power supply sourcing term used to describe current flow between an I O device and controller I O circuit typically a sourcing device or circuit provides a path to the source high or positive side of power supply status The condition ofa circuit or system represented as logic 0 OFF or 1 ON terminal point on an I O module that external I O devices such as a push button or pilot light are wired to throughput The time between when an input turns on and the corresponding output turns on true The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung upload Data is transferred to a programming or storage device from another device watchdog timer A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle If the watchdog runs past its programmed time period it causes a fault Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 357 Glossary workspace The main storage available for programs and data and allocated for working storage wtite copy data to a storage device For example the processor WRITEs the information from the output data file to the output module
298. ion Enable Seltdtess DNF3 Node Address Master 2 0 Master N ode 0 aster Node Master Nodeg D Master N odet 0 Master Nade3 fo Piotocol Contiol Cortral Line Handshaking hd Conlimalion Timeout x20 EA Request LL Confirmation Seed LL Confirmation Mossaga Raines 0 Mex Rarcom Delay 1 c Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 Cms He Channel 1 Link Layer Configuration In RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro open Channel Configuration in the MicroLogix 1400 Series B project tree To enable DNP3 over IP protocol check DNP3 over IP Enable in the Channel 1 configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Unlike serial port configuration cycle power to the controller after downloading the Ethernet port configuration to enable the DNP3 over IP feature Channel Configuration 10 100 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 201 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Link Layer related configuration can also be done in the Chan 1 DNP3 tab Channel Configuration DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration Application Layer related configuration can be done in the DNP3 Slave tab 202 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UMO001H EN P May 2014 Micr
299. ironments EN 61000 6 2 EMC Part 6 2 Generic Standards Immunity for Industrial Environments This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Low Voltage Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 2006 95 ECLow Voltage by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Part 2 Equipment Requirements and Tests For specific information required by EN 61131 2 see the appropriate sections in this publication as well as the following Allen Bradley publications Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Noise Immunity publication 1770 4 1 Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 e Automation Systems Catalog publication B115 Most applications require installation in an industrial enclosure Pollution Degree 20 to reduce the effects of electrical interference Over Voltage Category and environmental exposure Locate your controller as far as possible from power lines load lines and other sources of electrical noise such as hard contact switches relays and AC motor drives For more information on proper grounding guidelines see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 ATTENTION Flectrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices inside the controller Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas ATTENTION Vertical mounting of the controller is not supported
300. it changes mode to Remote Program If the controller is in a fault mode the MicroLogix 1400 clears the fault before changing the mode to Remote Program Start User Program If MicroLogix 1400 receives the function code FC_START_APPL 17 with the object Application Identifier g90v1 it changes its mode to Remote Run If the controller is in a fault mode it sends the command with the function code FC_INITIALIZE_APPL 16 before the command with the function code FC_START_APPL 17 Stop User Program If MicroLogix 1400 receives the function code FC_STOP_APPL 18 with the object Application Identifier g90v1 it changes its mode to Remote Program If Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 295 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 the controller is in a fault mode it sends the command with the function code FC INITIALIZE APPL 16 before sending the command with the function code FC STOP APPLI 18 Diagnostics Errors in a DNP3 Slave subsystem are logged in the Communication Status File There are 71 words for the troubleshooting This section shows the 71 words of the communication status file for each Channel 0 or Channel 2 port Communication Status File Words Words Offset File Element File Element Description Description for Description for Channel 0 Channel 2 0 CS0 0 CS2 0 General Status Category Block ID 1 CS0 1 CS2 1
301. iver and drill Topics include Agency Certifications agency certifications compliance to European Union Directives installation considerations safety considerations power considerations preventing excessive heat master control relay installing a memory module using the battery controller mounting dimensions controller and expansion I O spacing mounting the controller mounting 1762 expansion I O connecting 1762 expansion I O UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations Groups A B C D CE marked for all applicable directives C Tick marked for all applicable acts C UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Canada Compliance to Europe an This product has the CE mark and is approved for installation within the Union Directives European Union and EEA regions It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives EMC Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC and the following standards in whole or in part documented in a technical construction file EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 7 Chapter2 Install Your Controller Installation Considerations EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 EN 61000 6 4 EMC Part 6 4 Generic Standards Emission Standard for Industrial Env
302. ix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Double Bit Binary Input Config File Number Class Information Configuration for Binary Input Double Bit Binary Input and Small BCD Bit Offset 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Element 0 r r r r r r r r r r C CO Element 1 r r r r r r r r r r C CO Element 2 r r r r r r r r r r r C CO Element 3 r r r r r r r r r r r C CO Element 4 r r r r r r r r r r r C CO Element 5 r r r r r r r r r r C CO r reserved C1 CO Class level 0 to 3 For Binary Input Element_0 or data index 0 to 15 For Double Bit Binary Input Element _0 for data index 0 to 7 For Binary Input and Binary Output type data you can configure Online information of the object flag in the Configuration file If this bit is set the Online bit bit 0 in the object flag for each point is set when you read Status type objects You can set this information using ladder logic Related Configuration File Binary Input Online Config File Number In Series B Binary Output Online Config File Number Binary Input and Binary Output Type Configuration Data File Bit Offset 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Element 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
303. k There must be a DHCP server on the network capable of allocating network addresses and configuring parameters to newly attached device When both BOOTP and DHCP are disabled the MicroLogix 1400 uses the locally configured network related parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Broadcast Address etc SNMP Server SNMP enable switch Check this to enable SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 1 enabled read write Enable SMTP Client The SMTP Client service enable switch When SMTP is enabled MicroLogix 1400 is capable of 0 disabled read write Enable transmitting e mail messages generated by a 485CIF write message with a string element There must be a SMTP server on the network capable of processing e mail service This provides an extremely versatile mechanism to report alarms status and other data related functions Auto Negotiate When Auto Negotiate is disabled unchecked the Ethernet speed duplex is forced to either 10 Auto read write and Port Setting Mbps Half duplex 10 Mbps Full duplex 100 Mbps Half duplex or 100 Mbps Full duplex as Negotiate selected in the Port Setting field enabled and When Auto Negotiate is enabled checked the Port Setting Field allows you to select the range of Port Setting speed duplex settings that the MicroLogix 1400 will negotiate Ah 00 Mbps u Duplex Half Duplex MSG Connection The amount of time in ms allowed for a MSG instruction to establish a connection with the 15 000 ms read write Timeou
304. l0 Frozen Counter 16 bit without flag default Frozen Change Event Objects e g23v0 Frozen Counter Event All Variations e g23vl Frozen Counter Event 32 bit with flag default e g23y2 Frozen Counter Event 16 bit with flag default g23v5 Frozen Counter Event 32 bit with flag and time e g23v6 Frozen Counter Event 16 bit with flag and time Related Object File Number 16 bit Counter Object File Number e 32 bit Counter Object File Number Related Configuration File Number 16 bit Frozen Counter Config File Number 32 bit Frozen Counter Config File Number To generate a Frozen Counter Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Counter Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file The number of elements for Frozen Counter Object is the same as the number of Counter Objects For example if 10 Counter elements were configured 10 Frozen Counter elements will be generated in the MicroLogix 1400 controllers internally You cannot access the Frozen Counter database directly There is one buffer for Frozen Counter Object Read the Frozen Counter Object before you send another request with Freeze function codes If two consecutive Freeze function codes are received without Read operation into them for Frozen Counter Object the values of Frozen Counter Objects are overwritten by the second Freeze operation Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P
305. lay Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and labeling of emergency stop switches Install emergency stop switches and the master control relay in your system Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient rating for your application Emergency stop switches must be easy to reach In the following illustration input and output circuits are shown with MCR protection However in most applications only output circuits require MCR protection The following illustrations show the Master Control Relay wired in a grounded system TIP In most applications input circuits do not require MCR protection however if you need to remove power from all field devices you must include MCR contacts in series with input power wiring Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Install Your Controller Chapter 2 Schematic Using IEC Symbols L1 12 230V AC lt Disconnect Fuse MCR e Hg 230V AC ji 0 e Circuits Isolation Operation of either of these contacts will um Vester Oni Raay MER x yo ene Cat No 700 PK400A1 on AC Stop Start Suppressor Use Overtravel Cat No 700 N24 rm Limit Switch rm m e 1 a MCR ur ba E 7 G MICR Suppr e MCR 115V AC or e 1 e e Circuits DC Power Supply Use
306. ld On e 0x01 Pulse On NUL Clear field Off Activation Model 0x21 Pulse On NUL Clear field On Activation Model 0x03 Latch On NUL Clear field Off Complementary latch model 0x23 Latch On NUL Clear field On Complementary latch model 0x04 Latch Off NUL Clear field Off Complementary latch model 0x24 Latch Off NUL Clear field On Complementary latch model 0x41 Pulse On Close Clear field Off Complementary two output model Ww wa Ww wa 0x61 Pulse On Close Clear field On Complementary two output model 0x81 Pulse On Trip Clear field Off Complementary two output model OxAI Pulse On Trip Clear field On Complementary two output model When the MicroLogix 1400 is in Non Executing mode the controller will not accept a Binary Command The MicroLogix 1400 returns a Control Status Code 7 in response To access objects 12 CROB the controller should be in Executing mode Note that Executing mode includes Run Remote Run Test Continuous Scan and Test Single Scan modes Any others are Non Executing modes DNP3 Double Bit Binary Input Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read an object with Any variation Double bit Binary Input Static Objects e g3v0 Double bit Binary Input All Variations e g3vl Double bit Binary Input Packed format default
307. le Cable Connection When connecting multiple cables to the DH 485 connector use the following diagram to Previous Device to Next Device Connections using Belden 3106A Cable For this Wire Pair Shield Drain Connect this Wire Non jacketed To this Terminal Terminal 2 Shield Blue Blue Terminal 3 Common White Orange White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 Data B Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A Connections using Belden 9842 Cable For this Wire Pair To this Terminal Shield Drain Non jacketed Terminal 2 Shield Blue White White with Blue Stripe Cut back no connection Blue with White Stripe Terminal 3 Common White Orange White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 Data B Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A f To prevent confusion when installing the communication cable cut back the white with blue stripe wire immediately after the insulation jacket is removed This wire is not used by DH 485 Grounding and Terminating the DH 485 Network Only one connector at the end of the link must have Terminals 1 and 2 jumpered together This provides an earth ground connection for the shield of the communication cable Both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and 6 jumpered together as shown below This connects the termination impedance of 120 ohm that is built into each AIC or the 1763 NCO1 cable as required by the DH
308. le by 16 OSTR 5 0 to 255 BSTR 6 0 to 255 B2l 3 0 to Maximum 2047 TIME 7 0 Double bit input When the Data Types other than OSTR and BSTR are used the Point Index must be set to a point offset that is divisible by 8 CI 20 0 to Maximum 511 Counter Al 30 0 to Maximum 767 Analog input BCD 101 0 to Maximum 255 BCD point Point Address Type MicroLogix Data File Point Address Data Type Maximum Data File Number File Element File Sub Element Type Code Length bytes MicroLogix Data NONE 0 0 0 0 0 File VSTR 1 0 82 9 255 ST 9 255 0 40 22 0 1 2 074 2 S 0 65 for S Ofor S N L 3 9 255 B 0 255 for B N L 0 15 for B 7 9 255 N 9 255 L INT 23 0 1 20r4 2 S 0 65 for S Ofor S N L 3 9 255 B 0 255 for B N L 0 15 for B 7 9 255 N 9 255 L FLT 4 0 or 4 8 9 255 0 255 0 OSTR 5 0 255 2 5 0 65 for S 0 for S N 3 9 255 B 0 255 for B N 0 15 for B 7 9 255 BSTR 6 0 255 2 5 0 65 for S for S 3 9 255 B 0 255 for B N 0 15 for B 7 9 255 TIME 7 0 6 2 0 65 for S 0 for S N L 3 9 255 B 0 255 for B N L 0 15 for B 7 9 255 9 255 L Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 269 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 When the Descriptor Code is selected as PT YP
309. leakage current 382 one shot 382 online 383 online editing 151 directions and cautions 151 edit functions in program online editing 153 edit functions in runtime online editing 153 types 152 operating buttons 93 operating voltage 383 output device 383 P performance Ethernet processor 356 planning considerations for a network 217 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 power considerations input states on power down 12 isolation transformers 11 loss of power source 12 other line conditions 12 overview 11 power supply inrush 11 power distribution 10 power source loss of 12 power supply inrush power considerations 11 preparing for upgrade 195 preventing excessive heat 12 processor 583 processor file 385 program file 383 program mode 383 program scan 383 programming 5 programming device 383 protocol 585 publications related 18 purpose of this manual 17 read 384 real time clock 2 battery operation 148 operation 147 removal installation under power 147 writing data 147 related documentation 18 related publications 18 relay 584 relay logic 384 remote packet support 220 replacement battery 179 disposing 183 handling 181 installing 179 storing 181 transporting 181 replacement kits 179 replacement parts 179 reporting event by polled response 312 reporting event by unsolicited response 313 reserved bit 384 restore 384 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014
310. lection data format and input noise 2 Open circuit detection time is equal to channel update time Input Specifications Specification Heat dissipation 1762 IT4 Value 1 5 Total Watts The Watts per point plus the minimum Watts with all points energized Response speed per channel Input filter and configuration dependent Rated working voltage 30V AC 30V DC Normal mode rejection ratio 85 dB minimum at 50 Hz with 10 Hz or 50 Hz filter 85 dB minimum at 60 Hz with 10 Hz or 60 Hz filter Cable impedance max Open circuit detection ti 25 Q for specified accuracy me 7 ms 1 515 502 Calibration The module performs autocalibration upon power up and whenever a channel is enabled You can also program the module to calibrate every five minutes CJC accuracy 1 3 C 22 34 F Maximum overload at in terminals Input channel configura 1 Rated working voltage i the input signal and the potential above ground 2 Open circuit detection t channels the filter freq 3 Maximum current input Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 put 35V DC continuous ion via configuration software screen or the user program by writing a unique bit pattern into the module s configuration file s the maximum continuous voltage that can be applied at the input terminal including value that floats above ground potential for example 30V DC input signal
311. lines Consider the following when wiring your analog channels The analog common COM is connected to earth ground inside the module These terminals are not electrically isolated from the system They are connected to chassis ground Analog channels are not isolated from each other Use Belden 8761 or equivalent shielded wire Under normal conditions the drain wire shield should be connected to the metal mounting panel earth ground Keep the shield connection to earth ground as short as possible e To ensure optimum accuracy for voltage type inputs limit overall cable impedance by keeping all analog cables as short as possible Locate the I O system as close to your voltage type sensors or actuators as possible Thecontroller does not provide loop power for analog inputs Use a power supply that matches the transmitter specifications as shown below 40 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 Figure 14 Analog Input Transmitter Specifications Controller Power O Supply O 44530 Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Channels Inputs on analog channels employ digital high frequency filters that significantly reduce the effects of electrical noise on input signals However because of the variety of applications and environments where analog controllers are installed and operated it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise will be remov
312. ll Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Using the Battery Install Your Controller Chapter 2 2 Align the connector on the memory module with the connector pins on the controller 44535 3 Firmly seat the memory module into the controller 44536 4 Usea screwdriver as in step 1 to remove the memory module in the future The MicroLogix 1400 controller is equipped with a replaceable battery catalog number 1747 BA The Battery Low indicator on the LCD display of the controller shows the status of the replaceable battery When the battery is low the indicator is set displayed as a solid rectangle This means that either the battery wire connector is disconnected or the battery may fail within 2 weeks if it is connected IMPORTANT The MicroLogix 1400 controller ships with the battery wire connector Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 connected Ensure that the battery wire connector is inserted into the connector port if your application needs battery power For example when using a real time clock RTC Replacing the battery when the controller is powered down will lose all user application memory Replace the battery when the controller is powered on Refer to the SLC 500 Lithium Battery Installation Instructions publication 1747 IN515 for more information on installation handling usage storage and disposal of the battery See RTC Battery Operation on page 120
313. located as 1234 QJ 000000 EHET Setup Master Password After entering the Master password press the OK key on the LCD keypad Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 101 Chapterb Using the LCD 6 If the Master password is correct the last configuration is displayed In this example the auto negotiation function is enabled and the 10 100Mbps link configuration is shown 00000 REMOTE Auto Enable 16 166H F H 7 Press Up and Down key to select auto disable menu then press the OK key The fourth line on the LCD flashes Press the Up and Down keys to configure the Ethernet port to 100Mbps Full duplex forced Auto Disable Power cyclexxx 1HBM Full force TIP Any change to this feature s configuration does not take effect until after the next power cycle Configuring Ethernet Protocol Setup The Ethernet Protocol Setup screen of the LCD displays Ethernet Protocol settings assigned to the controller Follow these steps to edit the Ethernet Protocol settings for your controller 102 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 1 Onthe Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by
314. ly broadcast packets when DNP3 destination node is one of OxFFFD OxFFFE and OxFFFF in the request Dual End Point A single TCP Server connection Any of the requests are accepted and the responses are transmitted via this connection The unsolicited responses are transmitted via this connection when this connection is available This connection has higher priority than the Client connection A single TCP Client connection Any of the requests are accepted and the responses are transmitted via this connection The unsolicited responses are transmitted via this connection when this connection is available The MicroLogix 1400 does not request TCP client connection to DNP3 Master until an unsolicited response is generated Accepts only broadcast packets when DNP3 destination node is one of OxFFFD OxFFFE and OxFFFF in the request Datagram End Point UDP Datagram only Any of the requests are accepted and the responses are transmitted via this connection All responses can be transmitted to the different DNP3 Master port according to the configuration of the parameters Remote UDP Port Number and Master IP AddressQ If this parameter is not set to 0 the solicited responses are sent to the DNP3 Master port that is configured If this parameter is set to 0 the solicited responses are sent to the DNP3 Master port that sent the request TCP connection is not available in this configuration The parameter
315. m Loading 152W 04x 766 L32BWA 15 7 W 0 4 x System Loading 157W 04x W 766 L32BXB 17 0 W 0 3 x System Loading 170W 0 3x_ W W 762 1 8 2 0 W x number of modules 20Wx 762 IFA 2 0 W x number of modules 20Wx 762 IF20F2 2 6 W x number of modules 2 6 W x W 762 108 3 7 W x number of modules 3 7 W x 762 1016 5 4 x number of modules 54 WU x 762 1032T 6 8 W x number of modules 30 0V DC 68Wx 30 0V DC W 5 4 W x number of modules 26 4V DC 54Wx 26 4V DC 762 IRA 1 5 W x number of modules 15Wx 762 174 1 5 W x number of modules 15Wx 1762 0 8 2 9 W x number of modules 29Wx Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UMO001H EN P May 2014 347 Appendix System Loading and Heat Dissipation Heat Dissipation 1762 0B8 1 6 W x number of modules 1 6 W x W 1762 0B16 2 9 W x number of modules 2 9Wx 1762 0B32T 3 4 W x number of modules 3 4W x W 1762 0F4 3 8 W x number of modules 3 8 W x 1762 0V32T 2 7 W x number of modules 2 7 1762 0W8 2 9 W x number of modules 29Wx W 1762 0W16 6 1 W x number of modules 6 1 W x W 1762 0 6 2 8 W x number of modules 28Wx 1762 1080W6 4 4 W x number of modules 4 4 Wx W Add Sub Totals to determine Heat Dissipation 1 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules 348 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Glossary The following terms
316. m the memory module is complete Press the OK key to go back to executing mode LIBET ETE HEHUTE Loaded from HH PHOUG gt AUN mode Conf i rm TIP For more information on transferring data to and from memory modules see Memory Module Operation on page 159 LCD setup 5 the LCD Setup screen you can configure the contrast value and backlight for the LCD Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 113 Chapterb Using the LCD Configuring contrast value 1 Onthe Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown are not displayed on the Main Menu screen scroll down by pressing the Down key REMOTE User Display bAcvanced Set Press the OK key on the LCD keypad Select LCD Setup using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad When the LCD Setup menu screen is displayed press the OK key Comms 1 Setup QJ P Select Contrast to adjust the contrast of LCD LIICTETETE REMOTE LED Setup Contrast Back Light Adjust the contrast value using the Left and Right keys on the LCD keypad 080000 REHOTE LCD Contrast Bright Dark mm 58 114 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 Configuring the backlight 1 Q N ba On the Main Menu screen select A
317. n em cable 1761 CBL PM02 TR modem 9 Mj BN unum id n Modem 1761 CBL PM02 44608 Half Duplex protocol is multi drop single master multiple slave network Half Duplex protocol supports data transparency American National Standards Institute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory D1 In contrast to DF1 Full Duplex communication takes place in one direction at a time You can use the RS 232 485 port on the MicroLogix as both a Half Duplex programming port and a Half Duplex peer to peer messaging port DF1 Half Duplex Operation A DF1 Half Duplex master device initiates all communication by polling each slave device The slave device may only transmit when it is polled by the master It Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Rockwell Software RSLinx 2 0 or Connecting to Networks RS 232 RS 485 Interface Appendix E is the master s responsibility to poll each slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slave devices an opportunity to communicate An additional feature of the DF1 Half Duplex protocol is that it is possible for a slave device to enable a MSG write or read to from another slave When the initiating slave is polled the MSG is sent to the master The master recognizes that the message is not intended for it but for another slave so the master immediately forwards the message to the inten
318. n end stop must be installed ahead of the controller and after the last 1762 1 0 module 26 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Chapter J Wire Your Controller This chapter describes how to wire your controller and expansion I O Topics include wire requirements using surge suppressors grounding the controller wiring diagrams sinkingand sourcing wiring diagrams controller I O wiring wiring your analog channels expansion I O wiring Wiring Requirements Wiring Recommendation ATTENTION Before you install and wire any device disconnect power to the controller system ATTENTION Calculate the maximum possible current in each N power and common wire Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire size Current above the maximum ratings may cause wiring to overheat which can cause damage United States Only If the controller is installed within a potentially hazardous environment all wiring must comply with the requirements stated in the National Electrical Code 501 10 b Allow for atleast 50 mm 2 in between I O wiring ducts or terminal strips and the controller e Route incoming power to the controller by a path separate from the device wiring Where paths must cross their intersection should be perpendicular TIP Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same conduit Wires with different signal characte
319. n on a specific fault code refer to the Online Help of your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software 5 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in At the communication EEPROM screen you can load save user programs and data to from the Memory module Saving Communication EEPROM Follow these steps to save user program and data from controller s memory to memory module 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown are not displayed on the Main Menu screen scroll down by pressing the Down key User Display b dvanced Set 2 Press the OK key on the LCD keypad Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 3 Select Comms EEPROM using the Down key and then press the OK key LIBI TETTE REMOTE Comms LED Setup Select Store to MM to save user program and data and then press the OK key A REMOTE Comms EEPROH bStore to HH Load from HH 5 If your controller is in a non executing mode skip to the next step Otherwise switch your controller to a non executing mode REMOTE Mode remate RUH HUN gt PROG mode Conf i rm Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 111 Chapterb Using the LCD 6 The usual method for using a memory module is to reuse th
320. n or test mode To enable this feature set the 2 9 bit in the system status file See Status System File in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual Publication 1766 RM001 for more information Data File Download Protection The memory module supports data file download protection This allows user data to be saved not overwritten during a download TIP Data file download protection is only functional if the processor does not have a fault size of all protected data files in the memory module exactly match the size of protected data files within the controller and all protected data files are of the same type See Protecting Data Files During Download in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual Publication 1766 01 Memory Module Write Protection The memory module supports write once read many behavior Write protection is enabled using your programming software IMPORTANT Once set write protection cannot be removed A change cannot be made to the control program stored in a write protected memory module If a change is required use a different memory module Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 121 Chapter 6 122 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Removal Insertion Under Power The memory module can be installed or removed without risk of damage to either the memory module or the controller except durin
321. n you change the IP address or connect one of the MicroLogix to an EtherNet IP network the MicroLogix 1400 controller checks to make sure that the IP address assigned to this device does not match the address of any other network device The MicroLogix 1400 will check every 2 minutes for a duplicate IP address on the network If the MicroLogix 1400 determines that there is a conflict another device on the network with a matching IP address the following message gets posted on the LCD display 090000 RU IP CONFLICT HAC ADDR 123456 289812 To correct this conflict use the instructions in this chapter to change the IP address of the Ethernet IP device Then cycle power to the device or reset the device such as disconnecting the ethernet cable and reconnecting the cable There is also the possibility that two Ethernet IP device can detect a conflict simultaneously If this occurs remove the device with the incorrect IP address correct its conflict To get the second device out of conflict mode cycle power to the module or disconnect its ethernet cable and reconnect the cable Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 333 Appendix Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Configuring the Ethernet Channel on the MicroLogix 1400 334 The MicroLogix 1400 will check every 2 minutes fot a duplicate IP address on the network There are three ways to configure the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet channel 1
322. nal block into the RS 485 port on the AIC you are putting on the network Allow enough cable slack to prevent stress on the plug 3 Provide strain relief for the Belden cable after it is wired to the terminal block This guards against breakage of the Belden cable wires Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 81 Chapter 4 82 Communication Connections Powering the AIC MicroLogix 1000 1200 and 1500 programmable controllers support 24 DC communication power on Channel 0 When connected to the 8 pin mini DIN connector on the 1761 NET AIC 1761 NET ENL and the 1761 NET ENIW these controllers provide the power for the interface converter modules The MicroLogix 1400 does not provide 24V DC communication power through communication ports Instead these pins are used to provide RS 485 communications directly Any AIC ENI or ENIW not connected to a MicroLogix 1000 1200 or 1500 controller requires a 24V DC power supply If both the controller and external power are connected to the AIC the power selection switch determines what device powers the AIC 4 ATTENTION If you use an external power supply it must be A 24V DC 15 20 Permanent damage results if a higher voltage supply is used Set the DC Power Source selector switch to EXTERNAL before connecting the power supply to the AIC The following illustration shows where to connect external power for the Bottom View ATTEN
323. nded unipolar 4 single 1762 0F4 ended unipolar Update time typical D A converter type 4 5 ms Resistor string R 2R Ladder Voltage Switching Resistive load on current output 0 500 Q includes wire resistance 0 500 Q includes wire resistance Load range on voltage output gt gt 1KQ Reactive load current output 0 1 mH 0 1 mH Reactive load voltage output lt 1 pF lt 1 pF Typical overall accuracy 1 17 full scale at 20 65 C 2 1 17 full scale at 20 65 C 7 0 5 full scale at 25 C 0 5 full scale at 25 C Output ripple lt 0 1 lt 0 1 range 0 500 Hz referred to output range Non linearity in percent full scale 10 599 2 0 59 2 Open and short circuit protection Continuous Continuous Output protection 32 mA 32 mA 1 Includes offset gain non linearity and repeatability error terms 2 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules Valid Input Output Data Word Formats Ranges for 1762 IF20F2 Normal Operating Range 0 10V DC 32760 Full Scale Range RAW Proportional Data Scaled for PID 16380 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 0 147 AppendixA Specifications Valid Input Output Data Word Formats Ranges for 1762 IF20F2 Normal Operating Range Full Scale Range RAW Proportional Data Scaled for PID 4 20 mA 21 0 mA 32760 16380 20 0 mA 31200 15600 40 m
324. nel Configuration Diiver Hardware Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Defaut Domain Nome Panay Name Server Secondary Name Server Protocol Control HTTP Server Enable Auto Negotiate BOOTP Enable DHCP Enable v SNMP Server Enable SMTP ClientEnable General Channel Channel 1 Channel 2 Network Link 10 0 39 4 Bo 10 116 38 202 255 239 255 0 0 0 0 User Provided Web Pages P Suxing Data Fie Number 0 0 0 0 des Number of Pages fi Msg Connection Timeout x 1ms 5000 Msg Reply Timeout 1m5 250 Inactiviy Timeout x Min 30 Setting 10 Mbps Half Duplex Forced x Contact Locahon Cance IMPORTANT The user program is cleared as part of the operating system upgrade process You must restore your program after successfully loading the operating system upgrade The Ethernet communication configuration parameters are retained and the SNMP is enabled by default after a successful firmware upgrade IMPORTANT A power cycle is needed in order for the changes in the Channel Configuration page to be applied Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Appendix D 2 Ensure that you complete the IP configuration for the OS firmware upgrade Note the assigned IP address of the controller If the IP address is not configured you c
325. nfig File Number To generate an Analog Input Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Analog Input Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When only one Analog Input Object File is configured the Index number starts from 0 for the configured object 1 word is used for 1 Index of 16 bit Analog Input Object 1 double word is used for 1 Index of 32 bit Analog Input Object and 1 short float is used for 1 Index of Short Floating Point Analog Input Object If 16 bit Analog Input Object File Number 32 bit Analog Input Object File Number and Short Floating Point Analog Input Object File Number were configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file the starting index number of 16 bit Analog Input Object is 0 and the starting index number of 32 bit Analog Input Object starts from the ending index number of 16 bit Analog Input Object For example if 10 elements of 16 bit Analog Input Object were configured 10 elements of 32 bit Analog Input Object and 10 elements of Short Floating Point Analog Input Object were configured the index numbers will be 16 bit Analog Input Object From 0 to 9 32 bit Analog Input Object From 10 to 19 Short Floating Point Analog Input Object From 20 to 29 Asan example a configuration of 16 bit 32 bit and Short Floating Point Analog Input Object Files is shown below Data File N14 has 10 elements L15 has 10 elements and F16
326. ng Controller Device 9 Pin D Shell 8 Pin Mini Din 9 RI 1 CIS 2 7 RTS RTS 3 6 058 j gt 4 5 GND r 9 DCD 5 4 DTR CTS 6 3 TXD TXD 7 2 RD 8 1 DCD Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 79 Communication Connections Recommended User Supplied Components These components can be purchased from your local electronics supplier User Supplied Components Component external power supply and chassis ground Recommended Model power supply rated for 20 4 28 8V dc NULL modem adapter standard AT straight 9 25 pin RS 232 cable own cables see table below for port information if making 1761 or 1761 CBL PM02 Port 1 Port 3 Port 2 RS 485 connector DB 9 RS 232 6 1 cable straight D connector 6 ERAS d 6 7 8 5 mem 9 e 3 4 mi Lo 66 a B 8 sj 4 3 5 3 COM g Q 5 4 a sHLD 1 9 2 4 CHS GND 1 Pin Port 1 DB 9 RS 232 Port 2 1761 CBL PM02 Port 3 RS 485 cable Connector 1 received line signal detector 24V dc chassis ground DCD 2 received data RxD ground GND cable shield 3 transmitted data TxD request to send RTS signal ground 4 ready DTRJ7 received data RxD DH 485 data B 5 signal common GND received line signal detector DH 485 data A DCD 6 rea
327. ng used IMPORTANT devices should be set to the same maximum node address MicroLogix Remote Packet Support MicroLogix controllers can respond and initiate with communications or commands that do not originate on the local DH 485 network This is useful in installations where communication is needed between DH 485 and DH networks The example below shows how to send messages from a device on the DH network to a MicroLogix controller on the DH 485 network This method uses an SLC 5 04 processor as the bridge connection When using this method as shown in the illustration below PLC 5 devices can send read and write commands to MicroLogix controllers MicroLogix controllers can respond to MSG instructions received The MicroLogix controllers can initiate MSG instructions to devices on the DH network can send read and write commands to MicroLogix controllers PCcan do remote programming of MicroLogix controllers Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Appendix E TIP Use a 1763 NCO01 Series A or later cable to connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to a DH 485 network You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your DH 485 network directly without using a RS 232 to RS 485 converter and optical isolator such as the AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown in the illustration below because Channel 0 has isolation and R
328. nputs 8 Normal 24V DC Inputs 12 Relay Outputs 1766 L32BXBA 24V DC Isolated RS 232 RS 485 combo port None 20 120V AC Inputs 12 Relay Outputs 12 Fast 24V DC Inputs 8 Normal 24V DC Inputs 6 Relay Outputs 3 Fast DC Outputs 3 Normal DC Outputs 4 Voltage Inputs 2 Voltage Outputs Comm Ports 1 RS232 RS485 1 Etherngt 1 RS2324 U Non isolated RS 232 Standard D sub connector Component Descriptions MicroLogix 1400 Memory Module and Built in Real Time Clock The controller has a built in real time clock to provide a reference for applications that need time based control The controller is shipped with a memory module port cover in place You can order a memory module 1766 MM I as an accessory The memory module provides optional backup of your user program and data and is a means to transport your programs between controllers The program and data in your MicroLogix 1400 is non volatile and is stored when the power is lost to the controller The memory module provides additional backup that can be stored separately The memory module does not increase the available memory of the controller Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Hardware Overview Chapter 1 Figure 1 1766 MM1 Memory Module 44536 1762 Expansion 1 0 1762 expansion I O can be connected to the MicroLogix 1400 controller as shown below TIP A maximum of seven 1 0 modules
329. nstallation Instructions for Current Req 2 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules 346 irements not listed in this table Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Validating Systems using 1766 L32AWA or 1766 L32BXB Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values System Loading and Heat Dissipation Appendix H Current Current Subtotal from Table 1225 mA at 5V DC 1155 mA at 24V DC mA 5V DC mA Q 24V DC System Loading System Loading al mA x 5V mA x 24V mW mW mW 33 845 W Validating Systems using 1766 L32BWA Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values Current for Devices Connected to the 24V DC Sensor Sum of all sensor currents Supply 250 mA Q 24V DC mA Q 24V DC Current for MicroLogix Accessories and Expansion 1 0 Current Subtotal from Table 1225 mA 5V DC 1155 mA Q 24V DC mA Q 5 V DC mA Q 24V DC System Loading System Loading mA x 24V mA x 5V mA x 24V mW mW mW mW 39 845 W Calculating Heat Dissipation Heat Dissipation Catalog Number Use the following table when you need to determine the heat dissipation of your system for installation in an enclosure For System Loading take the value from the appropriate system loading worksheets on pages 345 or 347 Heat Dissipation Equation or Constant Calculation Sub Total 766 L32AWA 15 2 W 0 4 x Syste
330. nt 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 4 2 Double bit Binary Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index With absolute time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 4 3 Double bit Binary Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index With relative time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 10 0 Binary Output Any Variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 10 2 Binary Output Output status 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop with flags 06 no range or all 12 1 Binary Command Control relay 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request output block CROB 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 20 0 Counter Any Variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 20 1 Counter 32 bit with flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 320 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes hex Function Codes Qualifier Codes Num dec dec hex
331. ntrol File command status supported e g70v5 File Control File transport supported e g70v6 File Control File transport status supported g70v7 File Control File descriptor supported e g70v8 File Control File specification string not supported by Series A controllers supported by Series B controllers e g9lvl Status of Requested Operation Activate configuration not supported by Series A controllers supported by Series B controllers Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Default Directories and Files The MicroLogix 1400 has default directories and files for file handling in a DNP3 subsystem The default directories and files can be read from the controller using the function code OPEN FILE 25 Read 1 and CLOSE FILE 26 Currently supported directories and DIAG Supported files are listed in this section These directories files cannot be removed and cannot be created using DNP3 requests Supported Files and Directories Root Directory File Level Full name string to access Level Level y 7 EXE EXE processorName IMG EXE processorName IMG CHO CSF DIAG CHO CSF CH1 ESF DIAG CH1 ESF 7 The directory file names must all be in capital letters e Root level can only be a directory marker The directo
332. o For instance if Prototype 0 includes a Namespace at Index 2 and Name at Index 3 then the first DAEL in the Prototype 0 is at Index 4 The Prototype DAEL at Index 4 matches Point Address 4 in the PTYP element configuration Because of 270 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F this Point Address 4 in the PTYP element configuration of the Descriptor should be configured properly DNP3 Data Set Prototype 0 Number of Prototype Elements g Prototype Element Configuration 2 0 Application Name 3 0 Fault Name 4 UINT 2 27 Fault Code in System Status 5 NONE NONE 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 Cancel Help Descriptor Element Configuration Index 2 Point Address 1 Point Address Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point z Point Addre Point Type NONE x Descriptor Code z Point Index 0 Poi Data Type Code NONE 5 m Point Address 2 m Point Address Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point Point Addre Max Data Length bytes 0 Point Type NONE Po Point Index 0 Po Ancillary Value 222222222222222222222222222222 Point Address 3 m Point Address Point Address Standard DNP3 Point Point Addre Point Ty
333. oLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F For the MicroLogix 1400 Series A controllers you can see the following tabs Channel Contigur ation Eg General CharrelO Channel 1 Channel DNP3 Slave Data Link Laver Channel fcr Unsotciled Response fino Ma Acglication Laver Enable Unsolicited On Stait Up Eneble Unsolciled Fer Class Enable Unsolcited Fer Clare2 Enable Unsotcited For Clazs3 Max Responce Siza Time Synchicnization Interea lat Corfrmetion Timeout 1 ma fi Number 5 Class Events fi 0 Number n Claes Events Humber Cla 3 Events Select Timeout 1 s TH Serd Unsolicited On Start Up Enable Confirmation Eneble Time Synchronization On Stait Up Only 8 Number of Retiiee Held Time afte Classi Events 1 s Hold Time afte Class2 Events 1 5 Hold Time after Clase3 Events x1 s 1 1 DMP3 Obiect Data File Number Binary Inout Binary Quiet Courter Courter 32bils Analog 166115 Analog Input 32611 Analog Inpul Short Floating Analog 1661 Analog Ov put 92615 Analog Outpul Shot Fleeting Doubt 5mal BCD DNF3 Object Cortig Fie Number BireryInout fO Binay Output p Counter 18Lils p Counter 32Lits Frozen Counter 1665 Frozen Counter 3251 Anabg Input 0 Analy Input tits 0 Andog Short Floating p Double B t Inp
334. ode 7 Product code 120 121 124 98 1 Only applicable to Series B 1 0 modules Relay Contact Ratings 1762 OW8 1762 OW16 and 1762 I080W6 Maximum Volts Amperes Amperes Volt Amperes Continuous Make Break Make Break 240V AC 2 75 0 75 1800VA 180 VA 120V AC 2 540 15A 1 5A 1800VA 180 VA 125V DC 1 0A 0 2247 28 VA 24V DC 2 0A 1 2A 1 1 5A above 40 C 104 F 2 For DC voltage applications the make break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by the applied DC voltage For example 28 VA 48V DC 0 58A For DC voltage applications less than 14V the make break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A Relay Contact Ratings 1762 0X6l 3 Volts max Continuous Amperes Voltamperes Amps per Point Make Break Make Break 240V AC 50 15A 15A 3600 VA 360 VA 20V AC 7 0 AP 30A 30A 25V DC 25A 04 50 24V DC 7 0 AP 70A 168 VA The continuous current per module must be limited so the module power does not exceed 1440VA 2 6 A in ambient temperatures above 40 C 104 F 3 Surge Suppression Connecting surge suppressors across your external inductive load will extend the life of the relay contacts For additional details refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 4 DC Make Break Voltamperes must be limited to 50 VA for DC
335. of the event buffer DNP3 Master should poll for Class 1 events When the selection is Enabled Checked Unsolicited Response is enabled for Class 1 events Enable Unsolicited For Class2 Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 213 Appendix F 214 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 When the selection is Disabled Unchecked Unsolicited Response is disabled for Class 2 events To prevent overflowing of the event buffer DNP3 Master should poll for Class 2 events When the selection is Enabled Checked Unsolicited Response is enabled for Class 2 events Enable Unsolicited For Class3 Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked Unsolicited Response is disabled for Class 3 events To prevent overflowing of the event buffer DNP3 Master should poll for Class 3 events When the selection is Enabled Checked Unsolicited Response is enabled for Class 3 events Send Initial Unsolicited Null Response On Start Up Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 does not send Unsolicited NULL Response with RESTART IIN bit on startup When the selection is Ena
336. ogress the RUN LED FAULT LED and FORCE LED display a Walking Pattern First RUN LED ON then FAULT LED ON and then FORCE LED ON in sequence When the flashing starts the POWER LED and the FORCE LED stay solid ON The concurrent ControlFLASH and LCD displays during the Firmware download are shown here Stage 1 Progress Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Current Revision A 2 0 New Revision A 20 Starting update Please Wait m The LCD displays this screen 1 66 LEC BOOT FAN 01 BH ready Stage 2 Progress Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Current Revision A 2 0 New Revision A 20 Transmitting Chunk 1934 of 3072 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 175 Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The LCD displays this screen 1 66 LEC BOOT FAN 1 BH ready The Run Fault and Force LEDs display a walking Pattern Stage 3 The LCD displays this screen Progress Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Current Revision A 2 0 New Revision A 20 Waiting while module burns flash 1 66 LEC BOOT FAN B1 BB flashing At this stage the Power and Force LEDs are solid ON After flashing of the controller the LCD shows this screen 1765 LEC BOOT FAN B1 reset 176 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating Syst
337. olation N E C Class 2 required working voltage working voltage working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation IEC Class 2 reinforced type test 500V AC or qualification test 720V type test 500V AC or 707V DC for 1 minute insulation 707V DC for 1 minute DC for 1 minute type test 500V AC or 707V DC for 1 minute Vendor D code 1 1 1 1 1 Product type code 10 10 10 10 10 Product code 1 The over or under range flag comes on when the normal operating range over under is exceeded The module continues to convert the ana full scale range 75 67 66 65 2 Repeatability is the ability of the module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the same signal 3 Rated working voltage is the maximum continuous voltage that can be applied at the terminals with respect to earth ground 4 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modeles Input Specifications 64 og input up to the maximum Specification 1762 IF20F2 1762 IF4 1762 IR4 1762 IT4 Number of inputs 2 differential unipolar 4 differential bipolar 4 4 input channels plus 1 CJC sensor Update time typical 2 5 ms 130 250 290 450 530 ms Input filter and cofiguration NA selectable dependent A D converter type Successive approximation Successive approximation Delta Sigma Delta Sigma Common mode voltage 27V 27V NA 10V range 142 Rockwell Automation Pu
338. oller s Ethernet port directly to the computer s Ethernet port using a crossover cable and then repeat from step 2 Missing or Corrupt OS state The Boot Firmware runs the controller in this state ATTENTION Do not interrupt the flash procedure once you have A begun to download the firmware If the flash procedure Is interrupted the controller will be in a Missing or Corrupt OS state on the next power up When the controller is in this state the controller shows either one of the following Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 181 Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The POWER LED is solid ON and the RUN FAULT and FORCE LEDs are blinking simultaneously The LCD shows this information 1 bb LEE BOOT FAN H1 BH ready The POWER and FAULT LED are solid ON and the LCD shows this information 1 66 LEC BOOT FAN B1 BH Fpga Corrupt When the LCD displays the Fpga Corrupt information the LEDs do not show the Walking pattern during the firmware upgrade process Recovering from Missing or Corrupt OS State In order to recover from this controller state you need to restart the operating system firmware upgrade as described here Ensure that the Ethernet connections are intact SNMP is enabled by default in the controller 2 Ifthe IP Address was configured during the Preparing for firmware upgrade stage the same IP configuration is retained in the
339. on Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not May bs 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 2 COMM LOST ee the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not 3 REMOTE FORCED May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 4 LOCAL_FORCED 5 OVER_RANGE 6 REFERENCE_ERR 7 reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 273 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Object Flags for Analog Output Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE FORCED Always 0 Not used 4 LOCAL FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 eserved Always 0 Not used 6 eserved Always 0 Not used 7 eserved Always 0 Not used Object Flags for Analog Output for Series A controllers Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE FORCED Always 0 Not
340. on page 74 Mode Switch Allows you to change the mode switch selection Using the Mode Switch on page 86 User Display Displays the user defined LCD screen Using a User Defined LCD Screen on page 89 Advanced Set Allows you to configure or view the following e Change the key in mode for value entry for a trim pot Use the communica ions toggle functionality View and change the Ethernet network configuration Change the data val ue of trim pots View system information such as OS series and firmware version User communication EEPROM functionality Change LCD contras t and backlight option Modbus RTU Slave Node Address Changing Key In Mode on page 92 e Using Communications Toggle Functionality on page 94 e Viewing Ethernet Status on page 94 e Using Trim Pots on page 105 e 0 Status on page 67 e Saving Loading Communication EEPROM on page 110 e LCD setup on page 113 See Protocol Configuration on page 116 64 LCD Default Screen 1 0 Status Screen This is the default screen of the display allowing you to monitor controller and I O Status For more information on the I O Status screen see I O Status on page 67 Operating Buttons Function Button Cursor Buttons Move cursor Select menu item Choose file numbers values etc OK Next menu level store your entry apply the changes Previous menu level cancel your entry SC 44612 Ro
341. once every second at 30 86 F for a duration of 10 ms 2 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s at 55 C 131 F once every second at 30 86 F for a duration of 10 ms 2 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s at 60 C 140 F for 10 ms 2 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s at 60 C 140 F for 10 ms Isolated groups Output group to backplane isolation Output group to output group isolation Group 1 Outputs 0 to 3 Group 2 Outputs 4 to 7 Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s 265V AC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 s or 2596V DC for 1 s 265V AC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Group 1 Outputs 0 to 7 Verified by one of the fo Group 1 Outputs 0 to 15 lowing dielectric tests 1200V AC for 1 s or 1697V DC for 1 s 75V DC working voltage insulation Not applicable Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 IEC Class 2 reinforced Group 1 Outputs 0 15 Group 2 Outputs 16 31 internally connected to common Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V AC for 2 s or 1697V DC for 2 s 75V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V AC for 2 s or 1697V DC fo
342. only 50 events can be fit in an application layer fragment The first 50 events are sent to Master A and the next 50 events may be sent to Master B instead Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 283 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Reporting Event By Unsolicited Response To initiate and send Unsolicited Responses to a DNP3 Master the parameters below should be configured correctly For more details see DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration Parameters on page 213 Master NodeO Channel for Unsolicited Response Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Enable Unsolicited For Class1 Enable Unsolicited For Class2 Enable Unsolicited For Class3 Send Initial Unsolicited On Start Up Number of Class1 Events Hold Time after Class1 Events x1s Number of Class2 Events Hold Time after Class2 Events x1s Number of Class3 Events Hold Time after Class3 Events x1s DNP3 Object Data File Number DNP3 Object Config File Number content of the Config File In some cases MicroLogix 1400 may not send an Unsolicited Response even though the parameters are configured properly 284 Normally when the parameter Enable Unsolicited On Start Up is checked the MicroLogix 1400 initiates an Unsolicited Response with the function code ENABLE UNSOLICITED 20 if there are any events logged into the event buffer However when a request with the function code DISABLE UNSOLICITED 21 is received an Unsolicite
343. onse 131 0x83 FC AUTHENTICATE RESP No MicroLogix 1400 sends 132 0x84 to No Reserved 255 OxFF Implementation Table MicroLogix 1400 supports DNP3 Certification Subset Level 2 The implementation table in this section identifies which object groups and variations function codes and qualifiers the device supports in both requests and responses The Request and Response columns identify all requests and responses 314 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F that may be sent parsed by a DNP3 Master or must be parsed sent by the MicroLogix 1400 The implementation table lists all functionality required by either DNP3 Master or MicroLogix 1400 as defined within the DNP3 IED Conformance Test Procedures Any functionality beyond the highest subset level supported is indicated by grayed table cells Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Codes Qualifier Codes Num dec hex dec hex 0 211 239 Device Attribute 1 read 00 start stop 129 response 00 start stop 241 243 248 250 252 0 240 Device Attribut
344. onsiderations describes Ethernet network connections and media explains how the MicroLogix 1400 establishes node connections lists Ethernet configuration parameters and procedures describes configuration for subnet masks and gateways M icroLogix 1400 Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication between various devices 2 10 100 Mbps The physical communication media options for the Controllers and Ethernet MicroLogix 1400 are Communication Lea twisted pair 10 100Base T with media converters or hubs fiber optic broadband thick wire coaxial cable 10Base 5 thin wire coaxial cable 10Base 2 See the following page for more information on Ethernet physical media Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 327 Appendix Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface The MicroLogix 1400 supports Ethernet communication via the Ethernet communication channel 1 shown in the drawing below 44606 Channel 0 Channel 1 RS 232 485 Ethernet DH485 DF1 or ASCII 10 100Base T MicroLogix 1400 Actual performance of an MicroLogix 1400 controller varies according to size of Ethernet messages erformance 8 Considerations frequency of Ethernet messages 328 network loading theimplementation ofand performance of your processor application program Optimal Performance Micrologix 1400 controller to Micrologix 1100 Series B OS FRN 4 controll
345. ontrolFLASH Error The following are error messages you can receive Messages Invalid Catalog Number Target Module Not in Proper State for Programming Failed to Receive Initial TFTP Request from Target Communication error during TFTP transfer Invalid Catalog Number Invalid Catalog flumber The catalog number of the selected device does not match the catalog number selected in the Catalog Number dalog Press F1 For more information Lx Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 179 Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System This error message is displayed if the ControlFLASH tool is unable to match the processor to the catalog number that was selected in the Catalog Number dialog box To clear this error 1 Click the OK button to go to the Catalog Number dialog box 2 Select the correct catalog number in the dialog box and proceed with the update 3 Restart the firmware upgrade procedure as described in the section Using ControlFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 169 Target Module Not in Proper State for Programming oJ Target module not in proper state for programming OK This error message is displayed when the target module is not in a proper state for programming To clear this error 1 Put the controller in the PROGRAM mode 2 Restart the firmware upgrade procedure as described in the section Using ControlFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 169
346. ontroller and at least one unconfirmed event is lost IIN2 amp ALREADY EXECUTING Not supported IIN2 5 CONFIG_CORRUPT This bit is set when a bad file type and bad file number are detected IIN2 6 Reserved IIN2 7 Reserved You can access the last transmitted IIN bits in the response through accessing the element of Communication Status file C 0 58 CS2 58 For more details see Diagnostics All ofthe DNP3 Objects which are supported in the MicroLogix 1400 are summarized in Implementation Table on page 314 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Data file types used in DNP3 Objects are not the same as that used in the MicroLogix controller but are similar Mapping is required between DNP3 data files and MicroLogix 1400 data files Overview DNP3 Data objects that are implemented in the MicroLogix 1400 controller are listed below DNP3 Binary Input Object DNP3 Double Bit Binary Input Object DNP3 Binary Output Object DNP3 Counter Object DNP3 Frozen Counter Object DNP3 Analog Input Object DNP3 Analog Output Object DNP3 BCD Object DNP3 Data Set Object Series B controllers only Some of objects are divided into several Object files to map data files in the MicroLogix 1400 controller Counter Object 16bit and 32bit Counter Object File Analog Input Object 16bit and 32bit Analog Input Object File and
347. ontroller is or was in Non Execting mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode In Series B controllers 0 when the controller is or was in Non Execting mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM_LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE_FORCED Always 0 Not used 4 LOCAL_FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 CHATTER_FILTER Always 0 Not used 6 reserved Always 0 Not used 7 STATE Reflects point state of Binary Input point Object Flags for Double Binary Input Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE In Series A controllers 0 when the controller is or was in Non Execting mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode In Series B controllers 0 when the controller is or was in Non Execting mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM_LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE_FORCED Always 0 Not used 4 LOCAL_FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 CHATTER_FILTER Always 0 Not used 6 STATE Reflects point state of Double Bit Binary Input point Double bit LSB 7 STATE Reflects point state of Double Bit Binary Input point Double bit MSB 272 Rockwell Au
348. operate as described in the following table Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 159 Appendix Troubleshooting Your System If the LEDS The Following Error Probable Cause Recommended Action indicate Exists All LEDs off No input power or No line Power Verify proper line voltage and connections to the controller power supply error Power Supply This problem can occur intermittently if power supply is overloaded when Overloaded output loading and temperature varies Power and FAULT Hardware faulted Processor Hardware Cycle power Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error LEDs on solid Error persists Loose Wiring Verify connections to the controller Power LED on and Application fault Hardware Software For error codes and Status File information see MicroLogix 1400 FAULT LED flashing Major Fault Detected Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual Publication 1766 001 RUN Operating system fault Missing or Corrupt See Recovering from Missing or Corrupt OS State on page D 182 FORCE Operating System FAULT LEDs all flashing Controller Error Recovery Model 160 Use the following error recovery model to help you diagnose software and hardware problems in the micro controller The model provides common questions you might ask to help troubleshoot your system Refer to the recommended pages within the model for further
349. or File Authentication with two parameters Username from the Processor Name in the Controller Properties dialog in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Password from the Master Password in the Controller Properties dialog in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro In the example below Username is DNP3_A and Password is 12345 EENTXIXUXM 109 M M Project Help ER Properties Lx m Es Controller General Compiler Passwords Controller Communications 4 Controller Properties Processor Status Processor Type Function Files Bul 1766 Micrologix 1400 Series A bd IO Configuration amp Processor Name DNP3_4 Program Files Program Checksum 9897 svso Program Files 3 DataFiles 32 4f 1 2 C Data Files Memory Used 144 Instruction Words Used 335 Data Table Words Cross Reference Memory Left 12290 Instruction Words Left 3 00 output D n meut D s2 status D 63 sinary 14 timer Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 291 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 ML1400A_DNP3S_CFG_A x ao 2 E 5 Project 9 4 Proj Controller Properties x H E eG Controlar General Compiler Passwords Controler Communications 4 Controller Properties Processor Status Function Files Password Configuration E be Channel Contigur ati New Remov
350. orderly shutdown of the controller Input States on Power Down The power supply hold up time as described above is generally longer than the turn on and turn off times of the inputs Because of this the input state change from to Off that occurs when power is removed may be recorded by the processor before the power supply shuts down the system Understanding this concept is important The user program should be written to take this effect into account Other Types of Line Conditions Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily interrupted It is also possible that the voltage level may drop substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of time Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power for the system For most applications normal convective cooling keeps the controller within the specified operating range Ensure that the specified temperature range is maintained Proper spacing of components within an enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation In some applications a substantial amount of heat is produced by other equipment inside or outside the enclosure In this case place blower fans inside Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Install Your Controller Chapter 2 Master Control Relay the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to reduce hot spots near the controller Additional cooling provisions might be nece
351. ort to the same setting Cables Shielded and non shielded twisted pair 10 100Base T cables with RJ45 connectors are supported The maximum cable length between an MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port and a 10 100Base T port on an Ethernet hub or switch without repeaters or fiber is 100 m 323 ft However in an industrial application cable length should be kept to a minimum TIP The Ethernet cabling with straight through method is recommended as below Do not make the incorrect connection Straight through cabling 330 Pin Pin Name Cable color 1 Orange White 2 Tx Orange 3 Green White 4 No used by 10 100Base T Blue 5 No used by 10 100Base T Blue White 6 Rx Green 7 No used by 10 100Base T Brown White 8 No used by 10 100Base T Brown The standard Ethernet cable is terminated in accordance with EIA TIA 568B on both ends The crossover cable is terminated to 568B at one end and EIA TIA 568A at the other exactly as shown in the two color coded plugs below The following figures show how the TIA EIA 568A and 568B are to be terminated There are four pairs of wires contained in CAT S UTP cable These pairs of cables are color coded white blue blue white orange orange white Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Appendix G green green white brown brown they are also numbered one to four in the order
352. our MicroLogix 1400 controller to an Ethernet network For additional information on connecting to an Ethernet network see Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface on page 327 44606 RS 232 485 Port Channel 0 Ethernet Port Channel 1 84 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Ethernet Connections Communication Connections Chapter 4 The Ethernet connector Channel 1 is an RJ S 10 100Base T connector The pin out for the connector is shown below Pin Pin Name Te Tx not used by 10 100Base T not used by 10 100Base T not used by 10 100Base T co NW MD oy BY wy N not used by 10 100Base T End view of RJ 45 Plug 12345678 gua 87654321 Looking into a RJ45 Jack For more information on using ethernet cables with MicroLogix 1400 See Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 85 Chapter4 Communication Connections Notes 86 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Using the LCD Chapter 5 This chapter describes how to use the LCD and keypad on the MicroLogix 1400 controller Topics include operating principles I O status display monitoring user defined target files using the mode switch using a user defined LCD screen changing key in mode using communications toggle functionality configuring Ethern
353. ower or power error condition green Power on RUN off Not executing the user program green Executing the user program in run mode green flashing Memory module transfer occurring Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 157 Appendix Troubleshooting Your System Controller LED Indicators LED Color Indicates FAULT off No fault detected red flashing Application fault detected red Controller hardware faulted FORCE off No forces installed amber Forces installed amber flashing Forces installed in force files but forcing is disabled Status Indicators on the LCD Figure 4 Status Indicators on the LCD Xo SANs GS S Status Indicators the LCD 000000 I BBOOOOOO0O0000 RU 01020002 6123456789612 456789 0 00000000902 Indicator Color Indicates COMM 0 off Not transmitting via RS 232 485 port Channel 0 empty rectangle on Transmitting via RS 232 485 port Channel 0 solid rectangle COMM 1 off Not transmitting via Ethernet port Channel 1 empty rectangle on Transmitting via Ethernet port Channel 1 solid rectangle COMM 2 off Not transmitting via RS 232 port Channel 2 empty rectangle on Transmitting via RS 232 port Channel 2 solid rectangle off Configured communications Channel 0 empty rectangle on Default communications Channel 0 solid rectangle BAT LO of Battery level is
354. pe NONE Po PointIndex 0 Po Point Address 4 Point Addres 3 n Point Add T i i i z Point Addre DAEL configuration Tor oin dd Data File E relevant Prototype 0 File Number Index 4 File Element 6 Po File Sub Element Pc Point Address 5 Point Address Point Address Standard DNP3 Point z Point Addre Point Type NONE Cancel Point Index 0 Po Object Quality Flags The object flag is composed of an 8 bit string for some DNP3 objects The tables below show Flag Descriptions for each object The ONLINE RESTART COMM LOST REMOTE FORCED and LOCAL FORCED flags are common to all object group types that contain flags Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 271 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 There are some rules for the Object flag set or clear for each bit by the controller The rules below are also applied to Event data When the controller is in Non Executing mode the object flag is always all 0 When the controller is in Executing mode and there is no configuration file only the Online flag in the object flag is set When the controller is in Executing mode and there is a configuration file the flags in the object flag are set according to the upper byte of the configuration files Object Flags for Binary Input Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE In Series A controllers 0 when the c
355. peak 2 hours per axis Relay Operation 1 5 g Shock Agency Certification 134 Operating 30G panel mounted 3 pulses per axis Relay Operation 7 g Non Operating 50 g panel mounted 3 pulses per axis 40G DIN Rail mounted C UL certified under CSA C22 2 No 142 UL 508 listed CE compliant for all applicable directives C Tick marked for all applicable acts Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 General Specifications Specification Hazardous environment class Value For 1762 10327 1762 2 and 1762 0V32T modules Hazardo ANSI ISA 12 12 01 For all o her modules Specifications Appendix A us Location Class 1 Division 2 Groups A B C D UL 1604 C UL under CSA C22 2 No 213 Hazardous Location Class Division 2 Groups A B C D UL 1604 C UL under CSA C22 2 No 213 for all modules Radiated and conducted emissions EN5008 2 Class A Electrical EMC The mod ule has passed testing at the following levels ESD immunity IEC61 For all other modules IEC1000 4 2 4 kV contact 8 kV air 4 kV indirect For 1762 1032T 1762 0B32T and 1762 OV32T modules 000 4 2 4 kV contact 8 kV air 4 kV indirect Radiated RF immunity For 1762 Q32T 1762 0B32T and 1762 0V32T modules IEC61000 4 3 10V m 80 2700 MHz 8096 amplitude modulation For all other modules IEC1000 4 3 10 V m 80 1000 MHz 80 amplitude modula
356. press the Up and Down keys When set to Discrete the changes are applied only when you press the OK key after you have changed the value using the Up and Down keys By using the Key In Mode screen as shown below you can change the Key In mode to use 000006 keyin Mode gt Continuous Discrete RU Changing Key In Mode Follow these steps to change the current Key In mode Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advance Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 User Display bAcvanced Set RU 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed 000000 bKeyIn DCDHM Cfg ENET Cfg Select KeyIn Mode using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key HU QJ A The Key In Mode screen is displayed The current mode Continuous in this example is selected marked up with the symbol p KevIn Hode Continuous Discrete Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 93 Chapterb Using the LCD 5 Press the Up or Down key to select the different mode Discrete in this example Press the OK key 000000 KevIn Continuous Di
357. pter 5 The Fault Code screen of the LCD displays the fault code when a fault occurs When a fault occurs the Fault Code screen is not displayed automatically Only the FAULT LED on the controller flashes in red light Therefore you need to navigate into the Fault Code screen to identify the fault code on the LCD Follow these steps to view the fault code when a fault occurs 1 Onthe Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key User Display bAcvanced Set RU 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Set Menu screen is displayed as shown below TrimPot Set System Info bFault Code 3 If Fault Code is selected press the OK key HU If not select Fault Code using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 4 The Fault Code screen is displayed If no fault occurred 0000h is displayed as shown below 000000 Major Error ode BBBBh Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 109 Chapterb Using the LCD Saving Loading Communication EEPROM 110 Ifa fault is occurred its fault code is displayed as shown below 000006 Major ode BB298h RU For more informatio
358. put and output instructions The input instructions are evaluated by the controller as being true or false In turn the controller sets the output instructions to true or false instruction set The set of general purpose instructions available with a given controller I O Inputs and Outputs Consists of input and output devices that provide and or receive data from the controller jump Change in normal sequence of program execution by executing an instruction that alters the program counter sometimes called a branch In ladder programs a JUMP JMP instruction causes execution to jump to a labeled rung ladder logic A program written in a format resembling a ladder like diagram The program is used by a programmable controller to control devices least significant bit LSB The digit or bit in a binary word code that carries the smallest value of weight LED Light Emitting Diode Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and outputs Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Glossary LIFO Last In First Out The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file low byte Bits 0 to 7 of a word logic A process of solving complex problems through the repeated use of simple functions that can be either true or false General term for digital circuits and programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational functions Master Control Relay M
359. r B5A1 K9A2 Terminals T9A2 K9A5 T9A5 K9A1 and T9A1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Important DH 485 Network Planning Considerations Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any hardware Some of the factors that can affect system performance are amount of electrical noise temperature and humidity in the network environment number of devices on the network connection and grounding quality in installation amount of communication traffic on the network type of process being controlled network configuration The major hardware and software issues you need to resolve before installing a network are discussed in the following sections Hardware Considerations You need to decide the length of the communication cable where you route it and how to protect it from the environment where it will be installed When the communication cable is installed you need to know how many devices are to be connected during installation and how many devices will be added in the future The following sections help you understand and plan the network Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219 m 4000 ft This is the total cable distance from the first node to the last node in a segment However two segments can be used to extend the DH 485 network to 2438 m 189 Appendix E 19
360. r 2 s 75V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation 137 AppendixA Specifications Output Specifications Specification 1762 0A8 1762 0B8 1762 0B16 1762 0B32T 1762 0V32T Vendor I D code 1 Product type code 7 Product code 119 101 103 100 102 Output Specifications Specification 1762 0W8 1762 0W16 1762 OX6l 1762 1080W6 Shipping weight approx 228 g 0 50 Ibs 285 g 0 63 Ibs 220 g 0 485 Ibs 280 g 0 62 Ibs with carton Voltage category AC DC normally open AC DC normally open AC DC Type C Relay AC DC normally open relay relay relay Operating voltage range 5 265V AC 5 265V AC 5 265V AC 5 265V AC 5 125V DC 5 125V DC 5 125V DC 5 125V DC Number of outputs 8 16 6 6 Bus current draw max 80 mA at 5V DC 140 mA at 5V DC 110 mA at 5V DC 110 mA at 5V DC 0 40W 0 70W 0 55W 80 mA at 24V DC 90 mA at 24V DC 180 mA at 24V DC 110 mA at 24V DC 2 16W 4 32W 2 64W Heat dissipation max 29W e1w 28W 5 0 W at 30V DC 4 4 W at 26 4V DC The Watts per point plus the minimum W with all points energized Signal delay max On Delay 10 ms On Delay 10 ms On Delay 10 ms max On delay 10 ms max resistive load Off Delay 10 ms Off Delay 10 ms 6 ms typical Off delay 10 ms max Off Delay 20 ms max 12 ms typical Off state leakage max 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA On state current min 10 mA 10 mA 100 mA 10 mA On state voltage drop
361. r Attribute Set 0 Variation Read Attribute Length in Max Length Description Value Series A Value Series B ANrite Data Type Bytes in Bytes Series A Series B 246 Read VSTR length of the length of the User assigned ID Non NULL terminated Write string value string value code number max 255 max 255 bytes bytes 247 Read VSTR length of the length ofthe User assigned device name Non NULL terminated Write string value string value max 255 max 255 bytes bytes 248 Read Only 12 12 Device serial number This variation returns Ethernet MAC ID 0000BCxxxxxx 249 Read Only VSTR 6 6 DNP subset and This variation returns This variation returns conformance Subset level and Test Subset level and Test procedure version procedure version 2 2008 2 2009 250 Read Only length of the length ofthe Device manufacturer s This variation returns This variation returns string value string value product name and model Catalog Number and Catalog Number and OS Series of the OS Series of the controller controller 1766 L32BWA SER 1766 L32BWA SER Supported ranges 1766 L32xxxa SER where xxxa is BWA AWA BXB BWAA AWAA or BXBA and y is A F For example 1766 L32BWA SER 1766 L32AWA SER B 1766 132 SER C or 1766 L32BWAA SER 251 Reserved for future assignment 252 Read Only 13 19 Device manufacturer s name This variation returns This v
362. r Operating System The Summary dialog box is displayed DANGER The target module is about to be update with new frmware During the update the module will be unable to perform its normal contro 1 function Please make sure that al processes Contr 0l affected by this equipment have been suspended and that all safety critical functions are not affected To abort this firmware update press Cancel now To begin the update now press Finish Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Curent Revision 4 2 0 New Revision 4 2 0 More Info lt Back Cancel 11 Click the Finish button The ControlFLASH dialog box is displayed ControlFLASH p Are you sure you want to begin 5 updating the target device _ _ 12 Click the Yes button If your computer has more than one Ethernet interface installed the following dialog box displays the assigned IP addresses of each of the listed Ethernet interfaces Otherwise go to step 16 Select IP address af Ethernet interface to use far fx 10 116 24 94 10 116 38 204 13 Highlight the IP address of the PC Fthernet interface that connects to the Fthernet network hosting the target processor and click the OK button 174 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Appendix D 14 You may need to wait several seconds before the Progress dialog box is displayed A typical sequence is shown below While the download is in pr
363. r User Manual publication 1766 UM002 342 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 System Loading Calculations Appendix H System Loading and Heat Dissipation TIP A maximum of seven 1762 1 0 modules in any combination can be connected to a MicroLogix 1400 controller You can use this appendix to determine the power supply load and heat dissipation for your system The MicroLogix 1400 controller is designed to support up to any seven 1762 expansion I O modules When you connect MicroLogix accessories and expansion I O an electrical load is placed on the controller power supply This section shows how to calculate the load of your control system The following example is provided to illustrate system loading calculation The system calculation procedure accounts for the amount of 5V DC and 24V DC current consumed by controller expansion I O and user supplied equipment Use the System Loading Worksheet on page 345 to calculate your controller configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 343 Appendix System Loading and Heat Dissipation System Loading Example Calculations Current Loading Calculating the Current for Expansion 1 0 Catalog Number h JA nxB Number of Device Current Requirements max Calculated Current TER at5VDC mA at24VDC mA at5VDC mA at 24V DC mA 1762 148 2 50 0 100 0
364. r more details DNP3 Secure Authentication This section is applicable only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The MicroLogix 1400 implements the DNP3 Secure Authentication based on the DNP3 Specification Supplement to Volume 2 Secure Authentication Version 2 00 DNP3 Secure Authentication has been implemented in the DNP3 Application Layer of the MicroLogix 1400 system If you configure any parameters regarding DNP3 Secure Authentication in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer configuration it affects all ports which are configured for DNP3 protocol in the MicroLogix 1400 controller Enable Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 disables DNP3 Secure Authentication subsystem When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 enables DNP3 Secure Authentication subsystem Enable Aggressive Mode in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Enabled Checked Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 disable
365. r replacement battery 179 baud rate 577 before calling for assistance 193 bit 377 bit file monitoring 98 block diagrams 377 Boolean operators 377 BOOTP configuring SLC 5 05 364 367 using the Rockwell Utility 365 branch 377 buttons 93 cable pinout MicroLogix controller channel 0 to modem cable 66 76 cables planning routes for DH485 connections 218 selection guide for the 78 selection guide for the DeviceNet network 83 calling for assistance 195 CE mark 7 8 changing communication configuration 61 changing mode switch position 115 collision avoidance 315 common mode rejection ratio specification 173 common techniques used in this manual 18 communication DeviceNet 83 84 Ethernet 84 communication connections 59 communication options 5 communication protocols ASCII 223 DF1 Full Duplex 211 DF1 Half Duplex 212 DH485 215 DNP3 223 Ethernet 355 Modbus 223 supported 59 communication scan 377 communications toggle push button using 60 387 Index component descriptions 2 1762 expansion 1 0 3 communication cables 4 memory module 2 real time clock 2 configuration errors 192 configure processor with DHCP server 367 configuring Ethernet network 122 IP address 124 configuring the Ethernet channel 362 connecting expansion 1 0 26 connecting the system AIC 76 81 DeviceNet network 83 84 DF1 Full Duplex protocol 63 DF1 isolated point to point connection 64 DH485 network 70 connecting to DF1 Hal
366. raded through the Ethernet port of the controller In order to download a new operating system you must have the following e ControlFLASH Upgrade Kit containing the new OS Go to http www ab com programmablecontrol plc micrologix downloads ht ml to download the upgrade kit a Windows 7 Windows 2000 Windows NT Windows XP or Windows Vista based computer to run the download software The ControlFLASH Upgrade Kit includes the operating system upgrade to be downloaded e the ControlFLASH programming tool along with its support drivers and on line help Before upgrading the controller s operating system OS you must install ControlFLASH software on your personal computer prepare the controller for updating Install ControlFLASH Software Double click the ControlFLASH msi file to install the operating system upgrade Ifa ControlFLASH directory does not already exist one is created in your Program Files directory Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 167 Appendix D 168 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Prepare the Controller for Firmware Upgrade 1 It is important that the SNMP server is enabled before the firmware upgrade begins You can check if the SNMP server is enabled by looking at the Channel Configuration page for Channel 1 in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro If the SNMP server is not enabled you can still enable it in the channel configuration page Chan
367. rain wire shield should be connected to the metal mounting panel earth ground Keep the shield connection to earth ground as short as possible To ensure optimum accuracy for voltage type inputs limit overall cable impedance by keeping all analog cables as short as possible Locate the I O system as close to your voltage type sensors or actuators as possible The module does not provide loop power for analog inputs Use a power supply that matches the input transmitter specifications 1762 IF20F2 Input Type Selection Select the input type current or voltage using the switches located on the modules circuit board and the input type range selection bits in the Configuration Data File Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 01 You can access the switches through the ventilation slots on the top of the module Switch 1 controls Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 channel 0 switch 2 controls channel 1 The factory default setting for both switch 1 and switch 2 is Current Switch positions are shown below Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Cho Chi 4 Voltage OFF 4 Current ON Default 51 Chapter3 Wire Your Controller 1762 IF20F2 Output Type Selection The output type selection current or voltage is made by wiring to the appropriate terminals
368. re operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it In addition to disconnecting electrical power all other sources of power pneumatic and hydraulic should be de energized before working on a machine or process controlled by a controller Safety Circuits WARNING Explosion Hazard Do not connect or disconnect connectors while circuit is live Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons like overtravel limit switches stop push buttons and interlocks should always be hard wired directly to the master control relay These devices must be wired in series so that when any one device opens the master control relay is de energized thereby removing power to the machine Never alter these circuits to defeat their function Serious injury or machine damage could result Power Distribution There are some points about power distribution that you should know Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Install Your Controller Chapter 2 The master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine motion by removing power to the machine I O devices when the relay is de energized It is recommended that the controller remain powered even when the master control relay is de energized e Ifyou are usinga DC power supply interrupt the load side rather than the AC line power This avoids the additional delay of power supply turn off The DC power supply should be powered directly from the fused
369. read 06 no range or all 129 response 7 28 index 32 bit with flag and time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 6 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 7 28 index 16 bit with flag and time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 30 0 Analog Input Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 30 1 Analog Input 32 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 00 01 start stop flag 30 2 Analog Input 16 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 00 01 start stop flag 30 3 Analog Input 32 bi 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 00 01 start stop without flag 30 4 Analog Input 16 bi 1 read 06 no range or all 29 response 00 01 start stop without flag 30 5 Analog Input Single prec 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop flt pt with flag 32 0 Analog Input Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 32 1 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 32 bit without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 2 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 7 28 index 16 bit without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 3 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 7 28 index 32 bit with time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 4 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 7 28 index 16
370. ress Validation is Enabled Checked The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 0 Master IP Address0 This value is used to validate Master IP address when the Enable Access Control is Enabled Checked send Unsolicited Response when Unsolicited Response functionality is enabled An Unsolicited Response is sent out to the DNP3 Master having this address The valid value is an IP address Default value is 0 0 0 0 Master IP Adaress1 Master IP Address2 Master IP Address3 Master Address4 This value is used for validation of the Master IP address when the Enable Access Control is Enabled Checked This value is only valid when the Enable Access Control is Enabled Checked The valid value is an IP address Default value is 0 0 0 0 Remote TCP Port Number This value is used to configure Master TCP Port Number for Unsolicited Response The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Remote UDP Port Number for Initial Unsolicited This value is used to configure Master UDP Port Number for Initial Unsolicited Response if the parameter End Point Type is selected as Datagram Only The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Remote UDP Port Number This value is used to configure Master UDP Port Number if the parameter End Point Type is selected as Datagram Only The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 211 Appendix F
371. riation 07 08 limited qty 4 1 Double bit Binary Inpu 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event Without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 315 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Codes Qualifier Codes Num dec hex dec hex 4 2 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event With absolute 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time 4 3 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event With relative time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 10 0 Binary Output Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 10 2 Binary Output Output 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop status with flags 12 1 Binary Command Control 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request relay output block CROB 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 20 0 Counter Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 7 freeze 8 freeze noack
372. ristics should be routed by separate paths Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 21 Chapter 3 28 Wire Your Controller Separate wiring by signal type Bundle wiring with similar electrical characteristics together Separate input wiring from output wiring Label wiring to all devices in the system Use tape shrink tubing or other dependable means for labeling purposes In addition to labeling use colored insulation to identify wiring based on signal characteristics For example you may use blue for DC wiring and red for AC wiring Wire Requirements Wire Type Wire Size 2 wire maximum per terminal screw 1 wire per terminal 2 wire per terminal Solid Cu 90 C 194 F 12 to 20 AWG 16 to 20 AWG Stranded Cu 90 C 194 F 14 to 20 AWG 18 to 20 AWG Wiring torque 0 56 Nm 5 0 in Ib rated Wire without Spade Lugs When wiring without spade lugs it is recommended to keep the finger safe covers in place Loosen the terminal screw and route the wires through the opening in the finger safe cover Tighten the terminal screw making sure the pressure plate secures the wire 7 Finger safe cover 44527 Wire with Spade Lugs The diameter of the terminal screw head is 5 5 mm 0 220 in The input and output terminals of the MicroLogix 1400 controller are designed for a 6 35 mm 0 25 in wide spade standard for 6 screw for up to 14 AWG ora 4 mm metric 4 fork
373. rivers Line drivers also called short haul modems do not actually modulate the serial data but rather condition the electrical signals to operate reliably over long transmission distances up to several miles Line drivers are available in Full Duplex and Half Duplex models Allen Bradley s AIC Advanced Interface Converter is a Half Duplex line driver that converts an RS 232 electrical signal into an RS 485 electrical signal increasing the signal transmission distance from 50 to 4000 feet 8000 feet when bridged For point to point Full Duplex modem connections that do not require any modem handshaking signals to operate use DF1 Full Duplex protocol with no handshaking For point to point Full Duplex modem connections that require RTS CTS handshaking use DF1 Full Duplex protocol with handshaking For radio modem connections use DF1 Radio Modem protocol especially if store and forward capability is required For general multi drop modem connections or for point to point modem connections that require RTS CTS handshaking use DF1 Half Duplex slave protocol In this case one and only one of the other devices must be configured for DF1 Half Duplex master protocol IMPORTANT Never attempt to use DH 485 protocol through modems under any circumstance TIP All MicroLogix controllers support RTS CTS modem handshaking when configured for DF1 Full Duplex protocol with the control line parameter set to Full Duplex Modem Handshaking or DF
374. rk Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response Appendix F DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes hex Function Codes Qualifier Codes Num dec dec hex 20 5 Authentication Session Key 131 Auth resp 5B free format Status 20 6 Authentication Session Key 32 Auth Request 5B free format Change 20 7 Authentication Error 33 Auth Request no 5B free format 131 Auth resp 5B free format ack 20 7 Authentication Error 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 5B free format 20 9 Authentication HMAC Any requests 5B free format 129 response 5B free format 20 9 Authentication HMAC 130 unsol resp 5B free format No Object function code only No Object function code only 13 cold restart 14 warm restart No Object function code only 23 delay meas No Object function code only 24 record current time Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 325 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Notes 326 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 G Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface This appendix describes MicroLogix 1400 controllers and Ethernet communication describes MicroLogix 1400 performance c
375. roLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RMOOI Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 107 Chapterb Using the LCD Viewing System The System Information screen of the LCD allows you to identify the system Information information for your controller Follow these steps to view the system information for your controller 1 Onthe Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000006 User Display b dvanced Set RU 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Set Menu screen is displayed as shown below 000000 TrimPot Set System Info Fault Code 3 If System Info is selected press the OK key If not select System Info using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key RU 4 The System Information screen is displayed You can identify the catalog number operating system firmware revision number and boot firmware revision number of your controller 000000 RU Cat 1 66 LEC 05 FHH 1 BI FHH 1 5 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 3 108 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Viewing Fault Code Using the LCD Cha
376. rties TS Processor Status TS Function Files Al 10 Configuration hs Channel Configuration be Channel Status E DNP3 Default Variation Config File Program Files SYSO0 SYS1 Lap2 DNP3 Default Variation Config File jinary Input Static Object Binary Input Change Object Binary Output Static Object Double Bit Binary Input Static Object Double Bit Binary Input Change Obiect 16bits Counter Static Object 32bits Counter Static Object Frozen 16bits Counter Static Object Frozen 32bits Counter Static Object 16bits Counter Change Object 32bits Counter Change Object Frozen 16bits Counter Change Object Frozen 32bits Counter Change Object 16bits Analog Input Static Object 32bits Analog Input Static Object Short Floating Point Analog Input Static Object 16bits Analog Input Change Object 32bits Analog Input Change Object Short Floating Point Analog Input Change Object 16bits Analog Output Static Object 32bits Analog Output Static Object Short Floating Point Analog Output Static Object Small BCD Obiect The following table shows the structure of the DNP3 Default Variation Configuration File Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 cn o co no co 63 n3 CI PO noo x MicroLogix 1400 Distri
377. rver SMTP Client DNS Client SNMP Server Socket Interface with CIP Generic messaging Modbus TCP Client Server and DNP3 over IP MicroLogix 1400 controllers do not support Ethernet I O master capability through CIP implicit messaging real time I O messaging Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 59 Chapter4 Communication Connections Default Communication Configuration Using the Communications Toggle Functionality 60 For more information on MicroLogix 1400 communications refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 The MicroLogix 1400 communication Channel 0 has the following default communication configuration TIP For Channel 0 the default configuration is present when e The controller is powered up for the first time The communications toggle functionality specifies default communications specified using the LCD Display The DCOMM indicator on the LCD Display is on that is lit in solid rectangle An OS upgrade is completed See Chapter 5 for more information about using the LCD Display See Appendix E for more information about communicating DF1 Full Duplex Default Configuration Parameters Parameter Default Baud Rate 19 2 KBps Parity none Source ID Node Address 1 Control Line no handshaking Error Detection CRC Embedded Responses auto detect Duplicate Packe
378. ry is low and the controller is powered the RTC operates normally If the controller power is removed and the battery is low data is lost ATTENTION Operating with a low battery indication for more A than 2 weeks may result in invalid RTC data unless power is on continuously The memory module supports the following features User Program User Data Datalog and Recipe Back up User Program Compare Data File Download Protection Memory Module Write Protection e Removal Insertion Under Power ATTENTION Electrostatic discharge can damage the Memory Module Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Chapter 6 User Program User Data Datalog and Recipe Back up The memory module provides a simple and flexible program data DataLog and Recipe transport mechanism allowing the user to transfer the program data DataLog and Recipe to the controller without the use of a personal computer and programming software The memory module can store one user program at a time During program transfers to or from the memory module the controllers RUN LED flashes Program Compare The memory module can also provide application security allowing you to specify that if the program stored in the memory module does not match the program in the controller the controller will not enter an executing ru
379. ry marker is for Series A or for Series Directory level can only contain directories y y File level can only contain files Note that the directory marker is different in the MicroLogix 1400 Series A and Series B controllers The directory marker is for Series A and V for Series controllers In this document is used to explain File Object feature Generating IMG files using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Typically RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro stores the ladder program as RSLogix Files RSS However to download a ladder program using a File Object via DNP3 network you must save your ladder program in the RSLogix IMG Files IMG format Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 289 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 After you write your ladder program select Save As from the File menu of RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Select the save type as RSLogix IMG Files IMG Save Program As Ea Path D DNP3S Save in DNP3S Ee ML1400A_DNP3S Export file a Export database Logs CAPS Export options Save as type Save data as external files File PLC Information Processor Name D Station 09 Processor Type Revision Note Version o Bul 1766 MicroLogix 1400 Series A After saving the file you can see th
380. s Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 323 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Num Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes hex Function Codes Qualifier Codes Num dec dec hex 70 7 File Control file descriptor 28 get file info 5B free format 129 response 5B free format 70 8 File Control file specification 31 activate config 5B free format string 80 1 nternal Indications Packed 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop ormat 2 write 00 start stop index 7 85 0 Data Set Prototype 1 read 06 no range or all 85 1 Data Set Prototype 1 read 00 01 start stop 29 response 5B free format 06 no range or all 17 28 index 86 1 Data Set Descriptor Contents 1 read 00 01 start stop 29 response 5B free format 06 no range or all 17 28 index 86 2 Data Set Descriptor 1 read 00 01 start stop 29 response 5B free format Characteristics 06 no range or all 17 28 index 87 0 Data Set Present Value 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 17
381. s 358 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Numerics 1747 BA battery 17 1762 expansion 1 0 dimensions 24 1762 24AWA wiring diagram 36 1762 1A8 wiring diagram 42 1762 IF20F2 input type selection 50 output type selection 52 terminal block layout 53 wiring 52 1762 IF4 input type selection 54 terminal block layout 55 1762 1016 wiring diagram 43 1762 1032T wiring diagram 44 1762 108 wiring diagram 43 1762 1080W6 wiring diagram 50 1762 0A8 wiring diagram 44 1762 0B16 wiring diagram 45 1762 0B32T wiring diagram 46 1762 0B8 wiring diagram 45 1762 0V32T wiring diagram 47 1762 0W16 wiring diagram 48 1762 0W8 wiring diagram 47 1762 0X61 wiring diagram 49 5 05 processors Ethernet communications 355 A address 377 Advanced Interface Converter See AIC advanced LCD configuration 119 agency certifications 7 AIC applying power to 82 attaching to the network 81 connecting 76 definition 377 installing 81 recommended user supplied components 80 safety consideration 81 selecting cable 78 analog cable grounding 42 analog channel wiring guidelines 40 analog expansion 1 0 190 diagnostics 190 module operation vs channel operation 190 power up diagnostics 190 system wiring guidelines 50 troubleshooting 190 analog inputs analog channel wiring guidelines 40 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Index application 377 battery 148 processor battery life expectancy 179 processo
382. s Varistor is not recommended for use on the relay outputs Grounding the Controller In solid state control systems grounding and wire routing helps limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference EMI Run the ground connection from the ground screw of the controller to the ground bus prior to connecting any devices Use AWG 14 wire For AC powered controllers this connection must be made for safety purposes Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 31 Chapter3 Wire Your Controller ATTENTION All devices connected to the RS 232 485 communication port must be referenced to controller ground or be floating not referenced to a potential other than ground Failure to follow this procedure may result A in property damage or personal injury e For 1766 L32BWA and 1766 L32BWAA controllers the COM of the sensor supply is also connected to chassis ground internally The 24V DC sensor power source should not be used to power output circuits It should only be used to power input devices e For 1766 L32BXB and 1766 L32BXBA controllers the VDC NEUT or common terminal of the power supply is also connected to chassis ground internally This product is intended to be mounted to a well grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Refer to the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 for additional information Additional grounding connections from the moun
383. s DNP3 Aggressive Mode in Secure Authentication subsystem When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 enables DNP3 Aggressive Mode in Secure Authentication subsystem Critical FCs File Number in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This file number is used to define the list of the critical function codes in Secure Authentication A critical function code should be defined in a word element in this file The maximum number of element in this file should not exceed 32 the maximum number of the function codes that can be defined The value of this parameter is N file only Valid range is 0 7 9 to 255 Default value is 0 When this file number is configured to 0 and there is no configuration file assigned some function codes are considered as critical by default See the table below for the critical function codes When this file number of this parameter is not 0 and it is a valid N data file all function codes are considered as non critical In this case you must define all critical function codes in this file Note that the function code 0 FC_CONFIRM is considered as critical once the file number is configured newly If you don t want the function code 0 to be considered as critical the number of elements in the file should be adjusted and the element value 0 should not be in any elements Function Code Critical FCs File
384. s 1 Except for Binary and Double Bit Binary type objects the index number can be increased by 1 236 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F DNP3 Configuration Files You can set configuration files for each object These configuration files allow you to configure parameters such as Class level and Object Flag bit information for each element Only a Binary Data file type can be used for configuration file Relationship between MicroLogix Data Files and Configuration Files MicroLogix Data Files Configuration Files File Type File Number Maximum Configurable Elements Binary Input File Binary Input Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Binary Input Online Config File In Series B Double Bit Binary Input File Double Bit Binary Input Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Double Bit Binary Input Online Config File In Series B Binary Output File Binary Output Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 16 bit Counter File 16 bit Counter Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 16 bit Counter Threshold Config File In Series B Only N file 7 9 to 255 32 bit Counter File 32 bit Counter Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 32 bit Counter Threshold Config File In Series B Only L file 9 to 255 Frozen 16 bit Counter File Frozen 16 bit Counter Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 25
385. s Level of Index 11 is 2 B33 1 0 and B33 1 1 Class Level of Index 12 is 3 B33 2 0 and B33 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B33 bin Desc 533 a 833070 Radix Binary Smt Ercpertice O OD AOD m mn c eaa mc D enm 32hits Counter Contig File D D d D 0 0 0 0 ORE Doc Doc D O a OF xis FERES Usage Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F DNP3 Frozen Counter Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with all variations Frozen Counter Static Objects e g21v0 Frozen Counter All Variations g2lvl Frozen Counter 32 bit with flag e g21v2 Frozen Counter 16 bit with flag e g21v5 Frozen Counter 32 bit with flag and time g21v6 Frozen Counter 16 bit with flag and time 52159 Frozen Counter 32 bit without flag default e g2lv
386. s as well as channel configurations after the last application file segment is received For the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller the function code Activate Configuration 0x1F is supported Unlike Series A controller the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller does not activate all configurations as well as channel configurations after the last application file segment is received To activate all configurations you need to 292 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F send a command with the function code Activate Configuration 0 1 after downloading the user program Maximum file size is 384 Kbytes The MicroLogix 1400 supports downloading up to 256Kbyte size of user program when Recipe is not configured When Recipe is configured Maximum file size is 384 Kbytes The first application segment of the ladder program should be larger than or equal to the size of System Exe File structure 64 bytes An application segment of the ladder program cannot be exceed 2048 bytes When the MicroLogix 1400 receives the first application segment it acquires Edit Resource from the system If the last application segment is received properly che MicroLogix 1400 returns Edit Resource to the system After acquiring Edit Resource each of the application segments should be received within the Edit Resource O wner Timeout The MicroLogix 1400 controller checks
387. s equipment is suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D or non hazardous locations only The following WARNING statement applies to use in hazardous locations WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD e Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class Division 2 e Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off e Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off e his product must be installed in an enclosure cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means e All wiring must comply with N E C article 501 4 b Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Chapter 2 10 Install Your Controller Use only the following communication cables in Class I Division 2 hazardous locations Environment Classification Communication Cables Class Division 2 Hazardous Environment 1761 CBL ACOOSeriesCorlater 1761 CBL AMOO Series C or later 1761 Series C or later 1761 CBL PMO02 Series or later 1761 CBL HM02 Series C or later 2707 NC9 Series C or later 1763 NC01 Series or later 1747 CP3 Series Disconnecting Main Power WARNING Explosion Hazard Do not replace components connect equipment or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off The main power disconnect switch should be located whe
388. s in Runtime Online Editing During a runtime online editing session the processor is executing ladder logic The edit zone markers tell the processor that changes exist but the changes are not executed until you test the edits Deleted and replaced modified rungs are not removed from the program and inserted rungs are not executed until you assemble or test the edits Edit Functions in Program Online Editing During a program online editing session the processor is not executing ladder logic This mode is like the offline editing mode Note that if a runtime online editing session was performed prior to entering the offline editing mode edit marked rungs I R and D appear in the program If you perform a program online edit once you accept or delete the rung the edits take effect immediately and the power rail is displayed as a solid line If you edit a rung with edit zone markers the markers are removed when the rung is accepted Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 125 Chapter7 Online Editing Notes 126 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 General Specifications Description Specifications 1766 L32AWA A Appendix A 1766 L32BWA A 1766 L32BXB A Dimensions 90 x 180 x 87 mm HxWxD 3 5 x 7 08 x 3 43 in Shipping weight 0 9 kg 2 0 Ibs Number of 1 0 24 inputs 20 digital and 4 analog and 14 outputs 12 digital and 2 analog Power supply volt
389. screen using the LCD menu If you are at other screen and want to view 1 0 status you have to enter the 1 0 Status screen manually using the menu Otherwise the current screen will be displayed continuously IMPORTANT If a user defined LCD screen is used the 1 0 S sctatus sreen is displayed When the user holds down the ESC key for more than 3 seconds e When time out is enabled that is the time out period is set to a positive value and the time out period is passed You can enable and disable time out and set the time out period using the TO element in the LCD Function File For more information refer to the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Heference Manual publication 1766 RMOOT If time out is disabled that is the time out period is set to zero 0 and a custom LCD screen is displayed it will be displayed continuously until the user gives an input to change to other screen For more information see Using a User Defined LCD Screen on page 89 Viewing 1 0 Status Follow these steps to view the status of inputs and outputs on the LCD 1 On the Main Menu screen select I O Status by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below 000000 PIO Status Monitoring Made Switch HU Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Monitor User Defined Target Files Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 2 Then press the OK key on the LC
390. screte RU 6 The Key In Mode Change Notification screen is displayed as shown below 000000 Hode Change RU 7 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 2 Using Communications Toggle Functionality The MicroLogix 1400 provides the Communications Toggle Functionality which allows you to change from the user defined communication configuration to the default communications mode and back to the user defined communication configuration on Channel 0 See Using the Communications Toggle Functionality on page 60 for more information on this feature Ethernet Network Configuration Viewing Ethernet Status The Ethernet configuration screen of the LCD displays the MAC and IP addresses assigned to the controller Follow these steps to view the Ethernet configuration for your controller 94 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 1 N QJ gt Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 Display b dvanced Set Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Set Menu screen is displayed as shown below 000000 KeyIn Mode DC
391. selections shown below Point Address Type Point Type Point Index Event Occurence Condition Standard DNP3 Point NONE No point type is 0 No Event is generated associated Binary input 0 to 4095 When the Point Type and Point Index are pointing a specific point if the value of the point is B21 Double bit input 0 to 2047 changed an event is generated CI Counter 010 511 Al Analog input 0 to 767 BCD BCD point 0 to 255 Reserved for others Reserved for others No Event is generated Note that a Data Set event can consume any number of event buffers depending on the Data Set configuration This is only applicable to Data Set events The event for other objects consumes a single event buffer When using Data Set events increase the number of events in the DNP3 Slave configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 267 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Descriptor Element Configuration Each Descriptors element is configured in this here Double click each element to edit it Descriptor Element Configuration Descriptor Element Configuration Index Index fi Descriptor Code Descriptor Code NE YS Data Type Code NONE Data Type Code NE Max Data Length bytes Max Data Length bytes Ancillary Value JO Ancillary Value Point Address Standard DNP3 Point v Point Address
392. shown 1 WiGreen 1 WiOrange san Ie 3 WiGreen preferred same as 4Blue 11 2 AT amp T 2584 5 WiBlue 1 5 Green 7 WiBrown 8 Brown P4 RJ 45 Jack Front View RJ 45 Jack Front View 5686 same as AT amp T 258A Cross i P4 45 Jack Front View UTP Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 331 Appendix Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Ethernet Connections 332 TIP The most common wiring for RJ45 cables is the straight through cable which means that pin 1 of the plug on one end is connected to pin 1 of the plug on the other end The straight through RJ45 cable is commonly used to connect network cards with hubs on 10Base T and 100Base Tx networks On network cards pair 1 2 is the transmitter and pair 3 6 is the receiver The other two pairs are not used On hubs pair 1 2 is the receiver and 3 6 the transmitter It may be best to wire your cables with the same color sequence In this cable layout all pins are wired one to one to the other side The pins on the RJ45 connector are assigned in pairs and every pair carries one differential signal Each line pair has to be twisted In small networks where only two Ethernet devices need to be connected together point to point a cross over RJ45 cable may be necessary where the transmit and receive lines on both JR45 connectors are cross connected The color coding for the cro
393. ss over RJ45 cable have been defined in the EIA TIA 568A standard In a cross over cable layout you should remember that one end is normal and the other end has the cross over configuration However because the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port implements auto crossover also called Automatic MDI MDI X Configuration straight through cable may be used even for direct point to point connections between the MicroLogix 1400 and another Fthernet device TCP IP is the mechanism used to transport Ethernet messages On top of TCP Ethernet IP and or Modbus TCP protocol is required to establish sessions and to send the commands Connections can be initiated by either a client program RSLinx application or a processor The client program or processor must first establish a connection to the MicroLogix 1400 to enable the MicroLogix 1400 to receive solicited messages from a client program or another processor In order to send an outgoing message the MicroLogix 1400 must first establish a connection with the destination node at a specified IP address on the Ethernet network connection is established when a MSG instruction executes and no previous connection exists When a MSG instruction executes the MicroLogix 1400 checks to see whether a connection has been established with the destination node If a connection has not been established che MicroLogix 1400 attempts to establish a connection of the peer type In order to receive me
394. ssages from another device on Ethernet an incoming connection must be established This incoming connection is made by the sending processor and uses one incoming connection in the receiving processor Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Appendix The MicroLogix 1400 supports a maximum of 32 EtherNet IP connections and 32 Modbus TCP connections allowing a maximum of 32 outgoing and a maximum of 32 incoming simultaneous connections with up to 64 other devices or applications The connections are dedicated as follows Number of Connections Dedicated to 16 Incoming EtherNet IP Connections 16 Series B only Incoming Modbus TCP Connections 16 Outgoing EtherNet IP Connections 16 Series B only OutgoingModbus TCP Connections 1 Connections established by an INTERCHANGE client RSLinx client and peers are all included when counting the number of connections IMPORTANT For outgoing connections no more that one connection per destination node is established If multiple MSG instructions use the same destination node they share the same connection Duplic ate IP address The MicroLogix 1400 firmware supports duplicate IP address detection In Series D ete cti on B duplicate IP address detection can be disabled in the Channel 1 configuration in order to eliminate this source of broadcast traffic for low bandwidth applications Whe
395. ssary when high ambient temperatures are encountered TIP Do not bring in unfiltered outside air Place the controller in an enclosure to protect it from a corrosive atmosphere Harmful contaminants or dirt could cause improper operation or damage to components In extreme cases you may need to use air conditioning to protect against heat build up within the enclosure A hard wired master control relay MCR provides a reliable means for emergency machine shutdown Since the master control relay allows the placement of several emergency stop switches in different locations its installation is important from a safety standpoint Overtravel limit switches or mushroom head push buttons are wired in series so that when any of them opens the master control relay is de energized This removes power to input and output device circuits Refer to the figures on pages 15 and 16 ATTENTION Never alter these circuits to defeat their function since serious injury and or machine damage could result TIP If you are using an external DC power supply interrupt the DC output side rather than the AC line side of the supply to avoid the additional delay of power supply turn off The AC line of the DC output power supply should be fused Connect a set of master control relays in series with the DC power supplying the input and output circuits Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access
396. st recently queued as an event for that point exceeds the threshold value that was configured in this file Related Configuration File Numbers 16 bit Counter Threshold Config File Number In Series B Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 239 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 32 bit Counter Threshold Config File Number In Series B Word Offet Description Element 0 Threshold for point 0 Element 1 Threshold for point 1 Element 2 Threshold for point 2 Element 3 Threshold for point 3 Element 4 Threshold for point 4 Element 5 Threshold for point 5 For Analog Input type data you can configure Deadband information in the Configuration file Each element can be configured to the deadband value for each point An analog input event is generated if the absolute value of the difference between the present value of an analog input point and the value that was most recently queued as an event for that point exceeds the deadband value that was configured in this file Related Configuration File Numbers 16 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B 32 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B Short Floating Point Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B Word Offet Description Element 0 Deadband for point 0 Element 1 Deadband for point 1 Element 2
397. t 131 F 10 26 4V DC 65 C 149 F 23 points at 60 C 140 F Number of inputs 8 8 16 32 8 Bus current draw max 50 mA at 5V DC 50 mA at 5V DC 70 mA at 5V DC 170 mA at 5V DC 110 mA at 5V DC 0 25W 0 25W 0 35W 0 mA at 24V DC 80 mA at 24V DC Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 135 Appendix Specifications Input Specifications Specification Heat dissipation max 1762 1A8 20W 1762 108 3 7 W 1762 1016 4 3 W at 26 4V 5 4 W at 30V 1762 1032T 5 4 W at 26 4V DC 6 8 W at 30V DC 1762 1080W6 5 0 W at 30V DC 4 4 W at 26 4V DC The Watts per point plus the minimum W with all points energized Signal delay max On delay 20 0 ms Off delay 20 0 ms On delay 8 0 ms Off delay 8 0 ms On delay 8 0 ms Off delay 8 0 ms On delay 8 0 ms Off delay 8 0 ms On delay 8 0 ms Off delay 8 0 ms Off state voltage max 20V AC 5V DC 5V DC 5V DC 5V DC Off state current max 2 5 mA 1 5 mA 1 5 mA 1 0 mA 1 5 mA On state voltage min 79V AC min 132V AC 10V DC 10V DC 10V DC 10V DC max On state current 5 0 mA min at 2 0 mA min at 10V DC 2 0 mA min at 10V DC 1 6 mA min at 10V DC 10 mA at 5V DC 79V AC 47 Hz 8 0 mA nominal at 24V 8 0 mA nominal at 2 0 mA min at 15V DC 12 0 mA nominal at DC 24V DC 5 7 mA max at 120V AC 60 Hz 12 0 mA max at 12 0 mA max at 26 4V DC 16 0 mA max at 30V DC 30V DC
398. t Message Detect enabled ACK Timeout 50 counts AK retries 3 retries retries 3 retries Stop Bits 1 Data Bits 8 The Communications Toggle Functionality can be operated using the LCD display on the controller as shown below Use the Communications Toggle Functionality to change from the user defined communication configuration to the default communications mode and back on Channel 0 The Default Communications DCOMM indicator on the LCD display operates to show when the controller is in the default communications Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Communication Connections Chapter 4 mode Hold down the OK key more than 5 seconds to toggle the communication mode on the Main Menu screen SSP 000000 RU I BBOQOOQOOOO0U0000 0100000 9123456789012 456739 aO rbp p rr uuum TIP The Communication Toggle Functionality only affects the communication configuration of Channel 0 Changing Communication Configuration Follow the procedure below to change from the user defined communication configuration to the default communications mode and back In this example we will start from the Main Menu screen of the LCD display as shown below If necessary press ESC repeatedly until you return to the Main Menu screen 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advance Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the
399. t File Element File Element Description Description for Description for Channel 0 Channel 2 17 CS0 17 CS2 17 Link Layer Error Codes 0 ERR NO ERROR 1 ERR NO BUFFER 2 ERR TOO SHORT 3 ERR TOO LONG 4 ERR UART ERROR 5 ERR BAD 6 ERR CTS TIMEOUT 7 ERR CTS DROP MID PKT 8 ERR UNKNOWN CHAR 18 CS0 18 CS2 18 Reserved Always 0 19 CS0 19 CS2 19 Reserved Always 0 20 CS0 20 CS2 20 Reserved Always 0 21 CS0 21 52 21 Reserved Always 0 22 50 22 CS2 22 Reserved Always 0 23 CS0 23 52 23 Data Link Layer Active Node Table 24 50 24 52 24 Length 25 CS0 25 CS2 25 Format Code 26 CS0 26 CS2 26 Number of Nodes 2 50 27 52 27 Reserved Always 0 28 CS0 28 CS2 28 Reserved Always 0 29 CS0 29 CS2 29 Reserved Always 0 30 CS0 30 CS2 30 Reserved Always 0 31 CS0 31 CS2 31 Reserved Always 0 32 CS0 32 CS2 32 Reserved Always 0 33 CS0 33 CS2 33 Reserved Always 0 34 CS0 34 CS2 34 Reserved Always 0 35 CS0 35 CS2 35 Reserved Always 0 36 CS0 36 CS2 36 Reserved Always 0 37 CS0 37 CS2 37 Reserved Always 0 38 CS0 38 CS2 38 Reserved Always 0 39 CS0 39 CS2 39 Reserved Always 0 40 CS0 40 CS2 40 Reserved Always 0 41 CS0 41 52 41 Reserved Always 0 42 CS0 42 52 42 Reserved Always 0 43 CS0 43 CS2 43 List Category ID 10 44 CS0 44 CS2 44 Length 14 45 CS0 45 CS2 45 Format Code 2 46 CS0 46 CS2 46 Pre Send Time Delay 47 CS0 47 CS2 47 Node Address for this Slave 48 CS0 48 CS2 48 Reserved always
400. t Floating Double B t Input Small BCD o 234 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F For the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Chomer cantaua j x General Channel 0 Channel 1 Chan 1 DNP3 Channel 2 DNP3 Slave DNF3 Slave Application Layer Enable Confirmation Channel for Unsolicited Responses Max Response Size 2048 Send Init Unsol Null Resp on Restart Confirmation Timeout 41 ms 1 0000 Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Number of Retiies 0 Class Class2 Class3 Select Timeout 41 aio Enable Unsolicited for Class 7 Number of Events 10 fio fio Hold Time after Events ttl s Default Variation Config File Number fo Time Syne Interval x1 mins 0 Enable Time Sync On Start Up Only r DNP3 Object File Numbers Data Files Contig Files Class ZOL T D Binary Input 10 30 T Set z ho Ms MR rn 11 3 Poes f fiz E Descriptors 0 vad Sd E Secure Authentication Frozen Counter 1 6bits 34 Enable Secure Authentication Frozen Counter 32bits 35 Enable Aggressive Mode Critical FCs File Number o Expected Session Key Pesce 1 1800 Groups Sesion Key Change Count Reply Timeout x100ms 20 Maximum Error Count al HMAC Algorithm 2
401. t network configuration assigned to the controller Follow these steps to edit the Ethernet network configuration for your controller 96 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 1 Onthe Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 User Display b dvanced Set N Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed as shown below If ENET Cfg is selected press the OK key Otherwise select ENET Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key REMOTE KeyIn Mode Cfg Cfg Address is selected press the OK key If not select IP Address using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key QJ O00000 ENET Cfg Status PIP Address Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 97 Chapter 5 Using the LCD The password screen is displayed Press Up Down Left and Right keys to enter the Master password up to a maximum of 10 digits In this example the current Master password is allocated as 1234 EHET Setup Master Password After entering the Master password press the
402. tart Up Only Channel for Unsolicited Responses Restore Events After Power Cycle Send Init Unsol Null Resp on Restart Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Class Class2 Class3 Enable Unsolicited for Class jw Number of Events 1 25 25 Hold Time after Events 1 so 120 120 T DNP3 Object File Numbers Default Variation Class Flag OL T D Binary Input 101 i21 151 Binary Dutput Counter 16bits 02 122 Counter 32bits 123 Frozen Counter 16bits Frozen Counter 32bits Analog Input 16bits ios Analog Input 32bits Analog Input Short Floating 108 Analog Output 16bits 109 Analog Output 32bits no Analog Output Short Floating mr Double Bit Input n2 Data Files Config Files Config File mo DataSet bject Fie Max Number Numbers of Files Prototypes o Bo Desctiptors 0 0 Secure Authentication Secure Authentication Enable Aggressive Mode Critical FCs File Number Expected Session Key fiso Changelnterval xis Expected Session Key pann Change Count Reply Timeout 100ms 20 Maximum Error Count _ Algorithm 2 EE LEM 0 0 User Info Config File Number T D Threshold Deadband OL OnLine OffLine Diagnostic File Number DNP3 Slave configuration is shared by Channel 0 Channel 1 and Channel 2 ports if Channels 0 1 and 2 are configured for DN
403. ted device that mechanically switches electrical circuits relay logic representation of the program or other logic in a form normally used for relays restore To download transfer a program from a personal computer to a controller reserved bit A status file location that the user should not read or write to retentive data Information associated with data files timers counters inputs and outputs in a program that is preserved through power cycles RS 232 An EIA standard that specifies electrical mechanical and functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits A single ended serial communication interface tun mode This is an executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the ladder program monitors input devices energizes output devices and acts on enabled I O forces rung Ladder logic is comprised of a set of rungs A rung contains input and output instructions During Run mode the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true or false If a path of true logic exists the outputs are made true If all paths are false the outputs are made false save To upload transfer a program stored in memory from a controller to a personal computer OR to save a program to a computer hard disk Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Glossary scan time The time required for the controller to execute the instructions in the program The scan time may vary depend
404. ted qty 1 at last recorded time 51 1 Time and Date CTO Absolute 129 response 07 limited qty time synchronized 130 unsol resp qty 1 51 2 Time and Date CTO Absolute 129 response 07 limited qty time unsynchronized 130 unsol resp qty 1 52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 response 07 limited qty qty 1 60 1 Class Objects Class 0 data 1 read 06 no range or all 60 2 Class Objects Class 1 data 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 20 enbl unsol 06 no range or all 21 dab unsol 60 3 Class Objects Class 2 data 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 60 4 Class Objects Class 3 data 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 20 enbl unsol 06 no range or all 21 dab unsol 70 2 File Control authentication 29 authenticate file 5B free forma 129 response 5B free format 70 3 File Control file command 25 open file 5B free forma 70 3 File Control file command 27 delete file 5B free format 70 4 File Control file command 26 close file 5B free forma 129 response 5B free format status 70 4 File Control file command 30 abort file 5B free forma 129 response 5B free format status 70 5 File Control file transport 1 read file 5B free forma 129 response 5B free format 70 5 File Control file transport 2 write file 5B free forma 129 response 5B free format 70 6 File Control file transport 129 response 5B free format statu
405. terference encoder 1 A rotary device that transmits position information 2 A device that transmits a fixed number of pulses for each revolution executing mode Any run or test mode expansion I O Expansion I O is I O that is connected to the controller via a bus or cable MicroLogix 1400 controllers use Bulletin 1762 expansion I O false The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung FIFO First In First Out The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file file A collection of information organized into one group full duplex A bidirectional mode of communication where data may be transmitted and received simultaneously contrast with half duplex half duplex A communication link in which data transmission is limited to one direction at a time hard disk A storage area in a personal computer that may be used to save processor files and reports for future use Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 351 Glossary 352 high byte Bits 8 to 15 ofa word input device A device such as a push button or a switch that supplies signals to the input circuits of the controller inrush current The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized instruction mnemonic and data address defining an operation to be performed by the processor rung in a program consists of a set of in
406. teries for disposal may be subject to specific regulation of the countries involved or to regulations endorsed by those countries such as the IATA Articles Regulations of the International Air Transport Association Geneva Switzerland IMPORTANT Regulations for transportation of lithium batteries are periodically revised Refer to http www dot gov for the latest shipping information Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Replacement Parts Appendix B Disposal ATTENTION Do not incinerate or dispose of lithium batteries in general trash collection Explosion or violent rupture is possible Batteries should be collected for disposal in a manner to prevent against short circuiting compacting or destruction of case integrity and hermetic seal For disposal batteries must be packaged and shipped in accordance with transportation regulations to a proper disposal site The U S Department of Transportation authorizes shipment of Lithium batteries for disposal by motor vehicle only in regulation 173 1015 of CFR 49 effective January 5 1983 For additional information contact US Department of Transportation Research and Special Programs Administration 400 Seventh Street S W Washington D C 20590 Although the Environmental Protection Agency at this time has no regulations specific to lithium batteries the material contained may be considered toxic reactive or corrosive The person disposing of
407. terminal Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 When using spade lugs use a small flat blade screwdriver to pry the finger safe cover from the terminal blocks as shown below Then loosen the terminal screw Finger safe cover 44528 Using Surge Suppressors Because of the potentially high current surges that occur when switching inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids the use of some type of surge suppression to protect and extend the operating life of the controllers output contacts is required Switching inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the life expectancy of relay contacts By adding a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive device you prolong the life of the output or relay contacts You also reduce the effects of voltage transients and electrical noise from radiating into adjacent systems The following diagram shows an output with a suppression device We recommend that you locate the suppression device as close as possible to the load device DC or L1 Suppression AC or DC Outputs DC COM or L2 e If the outputs are DC we recommend that you use 1N4004 diode for surge suppression as shown below For inductive DC load devices a diode is suitable A 1N4004 diode is acceptable for most applications A surge suppressor can also be Rockwell Automation Publication 1766
408. that no gateway has been configured In this case the controller assumes a Gateway Address of aaa bbb ccc 001 where aaa bbb ccc are the first three octets of the configured IP Address Default Domain The default domain name can have the following formats NULL read write Name a b c a b or a where a b c must start with a letter end with a letter or digit and have as undefined interior characters only letters digits or hyphens Maximum length is 63 characters Primary Name This is the IP address of the computer acting as the local Ethernet network Primary Domain Name O undefined read write Server System DNS server Secondary Name This is the IP address of the computer acting as the local Ethernet network Secondary Domain 0 undefined read write Server Name System DNS server BOOTP Enable The BOOTP enable switch When BOOTP is enabled the MicroLogix 1400 attempts to learn its 1 enabled read write network related parameters at powerup via a BOOTP request There must be a BOOTP server on the network capable of responding to this BOOTP request When both BOOTP and DHCP are disabled the MicroLogix 1400 uses the locally configured network related parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Broadcast Address etc DHCP Enable The DHCP auto configuration enable switch When DHCP is enabled a DHCP server automatically 0 disabled read write assigns network related parameters to the MicroLogix 1400 when it logs into a TCP IP networ
409. this write on area to mark the DeviceNet node GND address E m RS 232 Port 2 Cable Selection Guide Ee iq Em 761 CBL AMOO 1761 CBL HM02 44601 Cable Length Connections from to DNI 1761 CBL AMOO 45 cm 17 7 in MicroLogix 1000 port 2 1761 CBL HM02 2 m 6 5 ft MicroLogix 1100 1400 channel 0 port 2 MicroLogix 1200 port 2 MicroLogix 1500 port 2 a 00 E ir 1761 CBL APOO T 1761 CBL PM02 44600 1 SeriesC or later cables are required Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 83 Chapter4 Communication Connections Cabe Connectionsrom 1761 45cm I77in SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processors channel port2 1761 CBL PM02 2 m 6 5 ft 0 PC COM port port 2 1764 LRP processor channel 1 port 2 MicroLogix 1400 channel 2 port 2 Connecting to Ethernet You can connect directly a MicroLogix 1400 to an Ethernet network via the Ethernet port Channel 1 You do not need to use an Ethernet interface card such as the Ethernet Interface and catalog number 1761 NET ENI and 1761 NET ENIW to connect y
410. ting tab or DIN rail if used are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded TIP Use all four mounting positions for panel mounting installation Qa of 44519 Grounding stamping ATTENTION Remove the protective debris strip before applying A power to the controller Failure to remove the strip may cause the controller to overheat Wiring Diagra ms The following illustrations show the wiring diagrams for the MicroLogix 1400 controllers Controllers with DC inputs can be wired as either sinking or sourcing inputs Sinking and sourcing does not apply to AC inputs Refer to Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Diagrams on page 36 The controller terminal block layouts are shown below The shading on the labels indicates how the terminals are grouped 32 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Wire Your Controller Chapter 3 TIP This symbol denotes a protective earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for safety purposes and provides noise immunity improvement This connection must be made for safety purposes on AC powered controllers This HA symbol denotes a functional earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for non safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement Terminal Block Layouts
411. tion 900 MHz keyed carrier for all modules EFT B immunity For 1762 IEC61 For all other modules IEC1000 4 4 2 kV 5 kHz 0327 1762 08327 1762 0V32T modules 000 4 4 2 kV 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity For 1762 1032T 1762 2 and 1762 OV32T modules IEC61 For all other modules IEC1000 4 5 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode 000 4 5 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode Conducted RF immunity For 1762 10327 1762 0B32T and 1 62 0V22T modules IEC61 For all other modules IEC1000 4 6 10V 0 15 80 MHz 000 4 6 10V 0 15 80 MHz 1 For module specific operating temperature range refer to the Installation Instructions for the specific module 2 Conducted Immunity frequency range may be 150 kHz to 30 MHz if the Radiated Immunity frequency range is 30 1000 MHz Input Specifications Specification 1762 1 8 1762 108 1762 1016 1762 10321 1762 1080 6 Shipping weight approx 209 g 0 46 Ibs 200 g 0 44 Ibs 230 g 0 51 Ibs 200g 0 44 Ibs 280g 0 62 Ibs with carton Voltage category 100 120V AC 24V DC sink source 24V DC sink source 24V DC 24V DC sink source sink source Operating voltage range 79V AC 132V ACat 10 30V DC at 30 C 10 30V DC 10 30V DC 10 30V DC at 30 C 47 Hz 63 Hz 86 F 10 26 4V DC 92 24 points at30 C 86 F 10 26 4V DC at 55 C 86 F 10 26 4V DC a
412. tomation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 365 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com support Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support americas phone en html or contact Canada your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returne
413. tomation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Object Flags for Binary Output MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM_LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE_FORCED Always 0 Not used 4 LOCAL_FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 reserved Always 0 Not used 6 reserved Always 0 Not used 7 STATE Reflects point state of Binary Output point Object Flags for Counter Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not qM 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 5 COMIM_LOST ae the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not 3 REMOTE FORCED May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 4 LOCAL FORCED 5 ROLLOVER 6 DISCONTINUITY 7 reserved Object Flags for Analog Input Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in N
414. tructure of the DNP3 Secure Authentication User Info Configuration File An Update Key is made up of 16 bytes and must be entered in as 32 hexadecimal digits DNP3 Secure Authentication User Info Configuration File Structure Word Offset Name Default Value By Default Value By Valid Range DEC Description Controller DEC RSLogix500 DEC 0 User Number 0 1 0 to 65535 For User 1 1 Reserved 0 0 0 For User 1 2 Update Key 0 0 0 0 to 65535 3 Update Key 1 0 0 0 to 65535 4 Update Key 2 0 0 0 to 65535 5 Update Key 3 0 0 0 to 65535 6 Update Key 4 0 0 0 to 65535 7 Update Key 5 0 0 0 to 65535 222 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Secure Authentication User Info Configuration File Structure Appendix F Word Offset Name Default Value By Default Value By Valid Range DEC Description Controller DEC RSLogix500 DEC 8 Update Key 6 0 0 to 65535 9 Update Key 7 0 0 to 65535 0 User Number 0 0 0 to 65535 For User 2 1 Reserved 0 0 0 For User 1 2 Update Key 0 0 0 0 to 65535 3 Update Key 1 0 0 0 to 65535 4 Update Key 2 0 0 0 to 65535 5 Update Key 3 0 0 0 to 65535 6 Update Key 4 0 0 0 to 65535 7 Update Key 5 0 0 0 to 65535 8 Update Key 6 0 0 0 to 65535 9 Update Key 7 0 0 0 to 65535 90 User Number 0 0 0 to
415. ts It should only be used to power input devices for example sensors and switches See Master Control Relay on page 13 for information on MCR wiring in output circuits ATTENTION The 24V DC sensor supply of the 1766 L32BWA and Figure 4 1766 L32AWA L32AWAA Input Terminal Block 1 1 INO 2 COM INS IN7 IN8 IN10 INI3 IN15 IN17 IN19 1 2 IN1 IN3 IN4 ING COM 2 INS 2 6 INIB 36 ANA we VAC VAC L2 N OUTO OUT OUT2 OUT3 0074 0 5 0077 OUT8 10 0000000060000 00 DCO DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 OUTS OUT6 008 OUT9 OUTI1 ovo VAC VAC VAC VAC s Group 0 Group Group2 Group3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 44525 Output Terminal Block Figure 5 1766 L32BXB L32BXBA Input Terminal Block IN10 COM IN13 IN15 IN17 IN19 IVo IV2 4 1 IN4 ING COM 2 IN9 IN11 IN12 IN14 IN16 IN18 COM IV1 IV3 ANA L 1 L 1 L 1 L L voc 24 NEUT OUTO OUT OUT2 4 OUT6 2 OUT8 e DCO DC1 VDC2 OUT3 OUTS 0077 DC3 DC4 DC5 00 11 ovo A VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC L 11 L 1 L JL J L Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group3 Group 4 Group 5 44526 Output Terminal Block Wire Types and Sizes Wire Type Wire Size Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Wire Your Controller Ch
416. ts which contain the destination address 65532 FFFCh are ignored When this bit is Enabled Checked any packets which contain the destination address 65532 FFFCh are accepted and processed Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 205 Appendix F 206 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Master Node0 This value is used to validate the Master node address when the Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked send Unsolicited Response when Unsolicited Response functionality is enabled An Unsolicited Response is sent out to the DNP3 Master having this address The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 0 Master Node Master Node2 Master Node3 Master Node4 The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 0 This value is used to check validation for Master node address when Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked Control For Channel 0 the selections can be No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking and No Handshaking 485 Network Default selection is No Handshaking For Channel 2 the selections can be No Handshaking and Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking Default selection is No Handshaking When the MicroLogix 1400 is connected to DNP3 Master using RS 232 line directly you must select No Handshaking If you want to use the Modem line in a half duplex network you must select Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking If the
417. twisted pair straight through cable To access other Ethernet mediums use 10 100Base T media converters or Ethernet hubs or switchs that can be connected together via fiber thin wire or thick wire coaxial cables or any other physical media commercially available with Ethernet hubs or switchs Connecting an Ethernet switch on the Ethernet Network The MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port supports the following Ethernet settings 10 Mbps half duplex or full duplex 100 Mbps half duplex or full duplex Mode selection can be automatic based on the IEEE 802 3 auto negotiation protocol In most cases using the auto negotiation function results in proper operation between a switch port and MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port With RSLogix500 RSLogix Micro programming software version 8 10 00 or later you can manually set the communication rate and duplex mode of an Ethernet port you have connected to the switch port The settings of the Ethernet port and the switch port must match Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 329 Appendix Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface IMPORTANT When connecting the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port to a 10 100Base T Ethernet switch note the following recommendations Use the auto negotiation function for both the switch port and the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port f you want to force to a specific speed duplex mode you must force both the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port and the switch p
418. ty and repeatability error terms 4 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 143 AppendixA Specifications Input Specifications 1762 IR4 Specification Input types 1762 IR4 100 Platinum 385 200 Platinum 385 500 Platinum 385 1 000 Q Platinum 385 100 Q Platinum 3916 200 Platinum 3916 500 Platinum 3916 1 000 Q Platinum 3916 10 Copper 426 120 Q Nickel 672 120 Q Nickel 618 604 Nickel Iron 518 0 150 Q 0 500 Q 0 1 000 Q 0 3 000 Q Heat dissipation 1 5 Total Watts The Watts per point plus the minimum Watts with all points enabled Normal mode rejection ratio 70 dB minimum at 50 Hz with the 10 or 50 Hz filter selected 70 dB minimum at 60 Hz with the 10 or 60 Hz filter selected Typical accuracy Autocalibration enabled at 0 5 C F for Pt 385 0 15 for 150 range 25 C 77 F ambient with module operating 0 4 C F for Pt 3916 30 5 Q for 500 range temperature at 25 C 77 F a 0 2 C F for Ni 1 0 Q for 1 000 Q range 0 3 C F for NiFe 1 5 Q for 3 000 Q range 0 6 C F for Cu Typical accuracy Autocalibration enabled at 0 9 C F for Pt 385 0 25 for 150 range 0 55 C 32 131 F 0 8 C F for Pt 3916 0 8 Q for 500 Q range 0 4 C F for Ni 1 5 Q for 1 000 Q range 0 5 C F for NiFe 2 5 Q for 3 000 Q ran
419. ue ofa Trim 134 Trim Pot Configuration in LCD Function File 135 Error COonditiofigss obs eruere eric Cerca tales tos 135 Viewing System Information acier emer up ue nes 136 Viewing Fault Code 137 Saving Loading Communication 138 Saving Communication 0 0c cece eee eee 138 Loading communication 141 eel p ets ta dant to da aed 141 Configuring contrast 142 Configuring the backlight sos C Rte e widgets 143 Protocol Configufatiohi 144 Modbus RTU eut ere Pee o aie ire ER NEP CE 144 Chapter 6 Real Time Glock Operation 5422222292003 peewee 147 Operation at Power up and Entering a Run or Test Mode 147 Writing Data to the Real Time 147 RTC Battery Operation xen epe E eines 148 Memory Module Operation Re RR AR EE ert 148 User Program User Data Datalog and Recipe Back up 149 Program Compare sii rroan ie irama dal a et eg cd tits 149 Data File Download 149 Memory Module Write Protection iu rubio A eor ke e Reps 149 Removal Insertion Under Power 150 Memory Module Information File 0 0 150 Program Data Dowhlosd 150 Program Data Upload e eee
420. upport DH 485 communications 1763 UM001 Bulletin 1764 MicroLogix 1500 Series A or later These controllers support DH 485 communications 1764 UM001 Bulletin 1747 SLC 500 SLC Chassis These processors support a variety of 1 0 requirements and functionality 1747 UM011 Processors Processors 188 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 Connecting to Networks RS 232 RS 485 Interface Appendix E Devices that Support DH 45 Network Catalog Description Installation Function Publication Number 1746 BAS BASIC Module SLC Chassis Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to foreign devices Program in 1746 0 004 BASIC to interface the 3 channels 2 RS232 and 1 DH 485 to printers 1746 01 modems or the DH 485 network for data collection 1746 001 2760 RB Flexible Interface 1771 PLC Chassis Provides an interface for SLC 500 using protocol cartridge 2760 SFC3 to 1747 6 12 Module other PLCs and devices Three configurable channels are available to 2760 0001 interface with Bar Code Vision RF Dataliner and PLC systems 1784 PKTX PC DH 485 IM Computer Bus Provides DH 485 using RSLinx 1784 6 5 22 PKTXD 1784 PCMK PCMCIA IM PCMCIA slot in Provides DH 485 using RSLinx 1784 UM519 computer 2711 K5A2 PanelView 550 Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 processors 2711 UM014 B5A2 K5A5 PanelView B5A5 K5A1 900 Operato
421. urity Idle Event Counter for Rx Valid Aggressive Mode Request 21 7 121 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Valid Aggressive Mode Request 22 72 122 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Invalid Aggressive Mode Request 23 73 123 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Valid Key Change 24 74 124 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Invalid Key Change 25 75 125 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Challenge 26 76 126 Security Idle Reserved 27 77 127 Security Idle Counter for Ignored events 28 78 128 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Unsolicited Non Critical ASDU 29 79 129 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Non Critical ASDU 30 80 130 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Critical ASDU 31 81 131 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Critical ASDU 32 82 132 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Valid Reply 33 83 133 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Invalid Reply 34 84 134 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Reply Timeout 35 85 135 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Max Invalid Replies Or Comm Failure Detected 36 86 136 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Max Invalid Replies Or Comm Failure Detected 37 87 137 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Error Message 38 88 138 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Key Change Timeout 39 89 139 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Expected Key Change Timeout 40 90 140 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Expected Key Change Timeout 41 91 141 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Key Status Request 42 92 142 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Valid Aggressi
422. used 4 LOCAL FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 eserved Always 0 Not used 6 eserved Always 0 Not used 7 eserved Always 0 Not used Object Flags for Analog Output for Series B controllers Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 2 COMM LOST uad the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not 3 REMOTE FORCED May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 4 LOCAL FORCED 5 reserved 6 reserved 7 reserved DNP3 Device Attribute Object 274 The Device Attribute object can be used to identify DNP3 Slave devices With the MicroLogix 1400 some of the variations are written so that you can read or write your own strings in your application Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Appendix F The object group of the Device Attribute object is 0 The supported range of the variation is 211 255 The R W property shows if the object is Read Only Read or Write If the R W property is writable the value which was written by DNP3 master device is stored to non volatile memory The object group of the Device
423. used the last error 63 Last Transmitted IIN in the response 64 Data file number of last error request 65 Data element number of last error request 66 Received Confirm Function Code Counter 67 Received Read Function Code Counter 68 Received Write Function Code Counter 69 Received Function Code Counter other than Confirm Read and Write Function Codes 70 Transmitted Solicited Response Function Code Counter 7 Transmitted Unsolicited Response Function Code Counter 72 Number of events to be reported Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 307 Appendix F Data File for Troubleshooting MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Word Offset Description Category 73 Transport Function Layer Error Codes 0 NO_ERROR No error found in the Transport Layer 1 DISCARD_NOT_FIRST_SEG The received packet was discarded since it was not a first segment 2 DISCARD_DUPLICATED_AND_MORE_SEG The received packet was discarded since it had the same sequence number as previous more segments are expected 3 DISCARD_DUPLICATED_AND_FINAL_SEG The received packet was discarded since it had the same sequence number as previous final segment received 4 DISCARD_OUT_OF_ORDER_SEG The received packet was discarded since the sequence number was out of order 74 Transport Layer Error Count 75 R
424. ut D Canca Heb If you want to communicate with DNP3 protocol using Channel 0 port both Channel 0 and DNP3 Slave configurations should be set If you want to communicate with DNP3 protocol using Channel 2 port Channel 2 and DNP3 Slave configurations should be set Ifyou want to communicate with DNP3 protocol using both Channel 0 port and Channel2 port Channel 0 Channel 2 and DNP3 Slave configurations should be set In this case the channel which is directed in DNP3 Slave configuration supports full functionality But the other port supports limited functionality and it does not support some features like Unsolicited Response DNP3 Slave configuration is shared by both Channel 0 and Channel 2 ports if the Channel 0 and Channel 2 are configured to DNP3 protocol Any changes in DNP3 Slave configuration tab will affect both channels Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 203 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 For the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers you can see the following tabs Configuration General Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 DNP3 Slave DNP3 Slave Application Layer Enable Confirmation Max Response Size 2048 Confirmation Timeout 1 ms 23000 Number of Retries 2 Select Timeout 1 sf 0 Time Sync Interval 1mins 1440 Enable Time Sync On S
425. utput AOB objects FC OPERATE FC Byte 0x04 04 Operate See the comment for FC SELECT FC Byte 0x03 on page 227 FC DIRECT OPERATE FC Byte 0x05 05 Direct Operate Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 227 Appendix F 228 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 This direct operate function is similar to the FC OPERATE function code except that no preceding select command is required FC DIRECT OPERATE FC Byte 0x06 06 Direct Operate No Resp See the comment for FC DIRECT OPERATE No response message is returned when this request is issued from a DNP3 master FC IMMED FREEZE FC Byte 0x07 07 Immediate Freeze Upon receiving a request with this function the MicroLogix 1400 copies the current value ofa counter point to a separate memory location associated with the same point The copied value remains constant until the next freeze operation to the same point FC IMMED FREEZE NR FC Byte 0x08 08 Immediate Freeze No Resp See the comment for FC IMMED FREEZE No response message is returned when this request is issued from a DNP3 master FC FREEZE CLEAR FC Byte 0x09 09 Freeze and Clear Upon receiving a request with this function the MicroLogix 1400 copies the current value to the frozen value then clears the current value to 0 immediately FC FREEZE CLEAR FC Byte 0x04 10 Freeze and Clear No Resp See the comment for FC
426. variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with Any Variation Binary Output Static Objects e gl0v0 Binary Output All Variations e gl0v2 Binary Output Output status with flags default Binary Output Command Objects e gl2vl Binary Command Control relay output block CROB Related Object File Number Binary Output Object File Number Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 243 Appendix F 244 MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Related Configuration File Number Binary Output Config File Number To generate a Binary Output Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Binary Output Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When the Binary Output Object File is configured Index number starts from 0 1 bit is used for 1 Index Asan example a Binary Output Object File is configured as shown below This file has 10 elements and 160 Binary Output points Index 0 of the Binary Output Object is B11 0 0 Index 1 is B11 0 1 and Index 159 is B11 9 15 File 811 bin Binary Output Object File 0 oOo ono a O og cu O O O OI
427. ve Mode Request 43 93 143 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Valid Aggressive Mode Request 44 94 144 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Invalid Aggressive Mode Request 45 95 145 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Valid Key Change 46 96 146 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Invalid Key Change Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P 2014 311 Appendix F MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Word Offset Current State Description CHO CH1 CH2 47 97 147 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Challenge 48 98 148 Wait for Reply Reserved 49 99 149 Wait for Reply Counter for Ignored events Function Codes Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series A Controllers These tables show the Application Layer Function codes implemented in MicroLogix 1400 Message Function Name MicroLogix Description Type Code 1400 Support Confirmation 0 0x00 FC CONFIRM Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses sends Reques 1 0x01 FC READ Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 2 0x02 FC WRITE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 3 0x03 FC SELECT Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 4 0x04 FC_OPERATE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 5 0x05 FC DIRECT OPERATE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 6 0x06 FC DIRECT OPERATE NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Reques 7 0x07 FC IMMED FREEZE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses
428. voltages between 28V DC and 125V DC DC Make Break Voltamperes below 28V DC are limited by the 7 A Make Break current limit Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 139 Appendix 140 Specifications Module Load Ratings 1762 0 6 Volts max Controlled Load Current per Module max 240V AC 6A 120V AC 12 125V DC 11 5A 24V DC 30 A 1 Current per relay imited to 6 A at ambient temperatures above 40 C 104 F 2 24A in ambient temperatures above 40 C 104 F Limited by ambient temperature and the number of relays controlling loads See below Relays Used vs Maximum Current per Relay 24V DC 1762 OX6 _ Ambient Temperature below 40 C 104 F __ Ambient Temperature above 40 C 104 F oa oO gt Maximum Current per Relay Amps 1 2 3 4 5 Number of Relays Controlling Loads o Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Specifications Appendix A Common Specifications Analog Modules 1762 IF20F2 1762 IF4 1762 IR4 1762 IT4 and 1762 OF4 Specification Dimensions 90 mm height x 87 mm depth x 40 mm width height including mounting tabs is 110 mm 3 54 in height x 3 43 in depth x 1 58 in width height including mounting tabs is 4 33 in Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Temperature operating 20 65 4 149 F 1
429. wing typical pinout for constructing a straight through cable pins 4 and 6 are internally connected for 1766 LEC only 66 AIC Optical Isolator Modem or 1766 LEC Channel 2 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 3 TXD TXD 2 3 2 RXD 4 3 2 5 GND 4 gt GND 7 5 1 CD 4 CD 8 1 4 DTR DIR 20 4 6 DSR a DSR 6 6 8 CTS CTS 5 8 7 RTS gt RIS 4 7 Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Communication Connections Chapter 4 Constructing Your Own Null Modem Cable If you construct your own null modem cable the maximum cable length is 15 24m 50 ft with a 25 pin or 9 pin connector Refer to the following typical pinout Optical Isolator Modem 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 3 TXD gt TXD 2 3 2 RXD RXD 3 2 5 GND R GND 7 5 1 CD CD 8 1 4 DTR DTR 20 4 6 DSR gt or le 6 8 CTS CTS 5 8 7 RTS RIS 4 7 p Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 67 Chapter 4 Communication Connections Connecting to a DF1 Half Duplex Network When a communication port is configured for DF1 Half Duplex Slave available parameters include the following DF1 Half Duplex Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2 KBps 38 4 KBps Parity none ev
430. work Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Slave Application Layer 226 Disable EtherNet IP Incoming Connections If you have a critical application and do not want to allow any Ethernet IP Incoming Connections use the parameter Disable Ethernet IP Incoming Connections When this parameter is checked disabled in the Channel 1 Ethernet configuration the MicroLogix 1400 does not allow any incoming Ethernet IP connections In doing so you cannot use RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro over Ethernet port to monitor or change the configuration user program Channel Configuration a General Channel Channel 1 Chan 1 Channel 2 DNP3 Slave Driver Ethernet z Hardware Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Network Link ID IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask Gateway Address r User Provided Web Pages Starting Data File Number p Secondary Name Server uum Nubar of Rages NN Protocol Control Enable DHCP Enable Msg Connection Timeout x 1 5000 SNMP Server Enable SMTP Client Enable Msg Reply Timeout 1m5 3000 HTTP Server Enable v DNP3 over IP Enable Modbus TCP Enable JV Disable EtherNet IP Incoming Connections Auto Negotiate Disable Duplicate IP Address Detection Port Setting 00 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex Inactivity Timeout Min 30 Contact Location Cancel Apply
431. ww ab com networks ethernet bootp html The device must have BOOTP enabled factory default or DHCP enabled to use the utility To configure your device using the BOOTP utility perform the following steps 1 Run the BOOTP DHCP server utility software It will ask you to configure your network settings before using the BOOTP DHCP server tool Enter your Ethernet settings for Subnet Mask and Gateway If you are not sure about it get a help from your system administrator Just leave Primary DNS Secondary DNS and Domain Name If corresponding information is allocated to the PC where BOOTP DHCP server utility is installed enter the same information Network Settings Defaults SubnetMasK 255 255 252 0 Gateway 10 121 28 1 ES 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 Q0 OK Cancel 2 In the Request History panel you will see the hardware addresses of devices issuing BOOTP or DHCP requests 3 BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 loj xl File Tools Help Request History Clear History Add to Relation List hrimin s Ethernet Address IP Address 133 00 0 73 00 78 Hostname 00 0F 73 FF 00 78 600 800 133083 B00 Relation List New Delete Enable BOOTP Enable DHCP Disable BOO TE DHCP Ethemet Address MAC Type Address Hostname Description Status Entries Unabl
432. yed B IE File Hum 989 Data 1 Press UK to edi If Integer is selected as shown in step 2 press the OK key If not selected press the Down key to select it and then press the OK key The current data value ON of the L9 0 word is displayed Note that the target word 0 which is at the right L9 5 is flashing which means the cursor is at the target word position B EI 9 8 BHBBHBHBBH UnProtected We will change the data value of the L9 0 word to the negative decimal value 1300 First press OK to move the cursor to the data value position Then the last digit of 40000000000 will be flashing which means the cursor is at the data value position Rockwell Automation Publication 1766 UM001H EN P May 2014 Usingthe LCD Chapter 5 ON Press the Left key twice Then the cursor will position at the third digit Press the Up key three times to change the third digit to 3 B IE 9 8 BHBBBBH3BH UnProtected Press the Left key once Then press the Up key once The second digit will change to 1 Note that 1 is still flashing which means the cursor is still at the data value position M oo Press the Left key once Then press the Down key once The sign digit will change to 5 as shown below Note that is still flashing which means the cursor is still at the data value position BI III REMOTE 8 B

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"